Solution 144
Security Systems
Installation Manual
EN
Security System
Solution 144  Installation Manual
TRADEMARKS
Throughout this document trademark names may have
been used. Rather than put a trademark symbol in every
occurrence of a trademark name, we state that we are
using the names only in an editorial fashion and to the
benefit of the trademark owner with no intention of
infringement of the trademark.
N OT I C E O F L I A B I L I T Y
While every effort has been taken the accuracy of this
document, neither Bosch Security Systems Pty Ltd nor
any of its official representatives shall have any liability
to any person or entity with respect to any liability, loss
or damage caused or alleged to be caused directly or
indirectly by the information contained in this book.
Should you find any error on inconsistency, please notify
us accordingly.
Bosch Security Systems Pty Ltd reserves the right to
make changes to features and specifications at any time
without prior notification in the interest of ongoing
product development and improvement.
T E L E P E R M I T N OT E
The grant of a Telepermit for a device in no way indicates
Telecom acceptance of responsibility for the correct
operation of that device under all operating conditions.
This equipment shall not be used in any manner that
could constitute a nuisance to other Telecom customers.
Immediately disconnect this equipment should it become
physically damaged, and arrange for its disposal or repair.
Warnings
1) This product must be installed by a qualified
and licensed security installer.
2) This product may not perform as expected if
installed incorrectly.
3) Some features of this product, including but not
limited to Back to Base reporting, SMS and
Email Reporting and Automatic Time and Date
Adjustments require a working telephone line
to operate and telephone communication
service provider charges are applicable
4) Australian standard AS 2201 requires regular
service by qualified and licensed security
persons and regular user testing. Please consult
your security alarm company for further details.
5) Incorrect programming of parameters can result
in operation contrary to what may be desired.
6) Leave the mains adapter plugged in at all times.
7) Leave the telephone line plugged in at all times
under normal conditions.
8) The Product Identification Label for this product
which is supplied in the resistor pack, must be
affixed to the outside of the enclosure during
installation.
Solution 144
Intrusion Control Panel
M a de In
A us tra lia
N12138
TELEPERMIT
N12138
TELEPERMIT
This Bosch Solution 144
CC600B Alarm System
may be connected to the
Telecom Network
RN = 0.5
CO P Y R I G H T N OT I C E
Unless otherwise indicated, this publication is the
copyright of Bosch Security Systems Pty Ltd (“Bosch”).
All rights are reserved.You may download a single copy
of this publication. By downloading the publication you
agree that you will: (i) only use the publication for your
own reference; (ii) not commercially exploit or charge
any person for the use of the publication; and (iii) not
modify the publication in any way without the prior
written permission of Bosch. Except as specified above
or where authorised by the Copyright Act 1968 (Cth), no
part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted,
modified or stored in any form or by any means, without
the prior written permission of Bosch.
PTC 211 / 12 / 017
9) This equipment shall not be set up to make
automatic calls to the Telecom ‘111’ Emergency
Service.
The transmit level from this device is set as a fixed level
and because of this there may be circumstances where
the performance is less than optimal. Before reporting
such occurrences as faults, please check the line with a
standard telepermitted telephone.
ii
Bosch Security Systems 05/11 BLCC600BI
Solution 144  Installation Manual  Contents
CONTENTS
COPYRIGHT NOTICE.................................................................................................................................................................... II
TRADEMARKS.............................................................................................................................................................................. II
NOTICE OF LIABILITY.................................................................................................................................................................. II
TELEPERMIT NOTE...................................................................................................................................................................... II
SECTION 1
OVERVIEW.................................................................................................................................................1-1
FEATURES..................................................................................................................................................................................1-1
OVERVIEW.................................................................................................................................................................................1-1
SECTION 2
INSTALLING THE HARDWARE..................................................................................................................2-1
ABOUT THE PANEL...................................................................................................................................................................2-1
ENCLOSURES............................................................................................................................................................................2-1
ENCLOSURE FIXING METHOD.................................................................................................................................................2-1
INSTALLING THE TAMPER SWITCH.........................................................................................................................................2-1
ENCLOSURE MODULE SPACES................................................................................................................................................2-1
INSTALLING PANELS AND MODULES....................................................................................................................................2-2
CONNECTING POWER TO THE PANEL....................................................................................................................................2-4
CONNECTING THE BATTERY....................................................................................................................................................2-4
AC MAINS TRANSFORMER OPTION.......................................................................................................................................2-4
PANEL LED INDICATORS..........................................................................................................................................................2-5
ABOUT THE KEYPAD................................................................................................................................................................2-5
STATUS ICONS / LED’S..............................................................................................................................................................2-6
KEYPAD TONES.........................................................................................................................................................................2-6
KEYPAD & READERS SETUP.....................................................................................................................................................2-7
DIP SWITCH ADDRESS SELECT...............................................................................................................................................2-7
ROTARY SWITCH ADDRESS SELECT.......................................................................................................................................2-7
EOL RESISTOR COLOUR CODE................................................................................................................................................2-8
SECTION 3
WIRING DIAGRAMS..................................................................................................................................3-1
ZONE WIRING............................................................................................................................................................................3-1
EOL RESISTOR COLOURS AND VALUES..................................................................................................................................3-2
BOARD CONNECTORS..............................................................................................................................................................3-2
TERMINAL DESCRIPTIONS......................................................................................................................................................3-2
LAN OVERVIEW........................................................................................................................................................................3-3
LAN WIRING..............................................................................................................................................................................3-3
SYSTEM EARTHING..................................................................................................................................................................3-4
TERMINATING THE LAN...........................................................................................................................................................3-4
SECTION 4
PROGRAMMING OVERVIEW....................................................................................................................4-1
ENTERING PROGRAMMING MODE.........................................................................................................................................4-1
EXITING PROGRAMMING MODE............................................................................................................................................4-1
COMMAND MENUS..................................................................................................................................................................4-1
PROGRAMMING OPTION BIT MENUS....................................................................................................................................4-1
NAVIGATING THE MENUS........................................................................................................................................................4-1
LIST OPTIONS...........................................................................................................................................................................4-1
ALPHA TEXT..............................................................................................................................................................................4-2
CLOCK PROGRAMMING...........................................................................................................................................................4-2
TELEPHONE NUMBERS............................................................................................................................................................4-2
GETTING STARTED BACK TO BASE.........................................................................................................................................4-2
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
iii
Solution 144  Installation Manual  Contents
SERVICE MODE.........................................................................................................................................................................4-3
Turning Service Mode ON............................................................................................................................................................................................ 4-3
Turning Service Mode OFF........................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-3
DEFAULTING THE SYSTEM.......................................................................................................................................................4-3
Hardware Default............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-3
Software Default.............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-3
TRIGGERING A DURESS ALARM.............................................................................................................................................4-3
DOMESTIC TEMPLATE DEFAULTS...........................................................................................................................................4-3
DIRECT LINK PROGRAMMING................................................................................................................................................4-3
ZONE ARRAY.............................................................................................................................................................................4-4
OUTPUT ARRAY........................................................................................................................................................................4-4
DOOR ARRAY............................................................................................................................................................................4-4
TESTING THE SYSTEM..............................................................................................................................................................4-4
BASIC REPORTING REFERENCE..............................................................................................................................................4-5
DTMF CONTROL FUNCTIONS .................................................................................................................................................4-6
MENU REFERENCE TABLE........................................................................................................................................................4-7
BASIC SYSTEM OPERATION..................................................................................................................................................4-10
TURNING AN AREA ALL ON...................................................................................................................................................4-10
TURNING AN AREA PART ON / PART 2 ON...........................................................................................................................4-10
TURNING AN AREA OFF.........................................................................................................................................................4-10
SILENCING ALARMS...............................................................................................................................................................4-10
AUTOMATIC ARMING.............................................................................................................................................................4-10
REMOTE ARMING - QUICK ARM............................................................................................................................................4-11
DURESS OR SILENT ALARMS................................................................................................................................................4-11
SECTION 5
ACCESS PROGRAMMING..........................................................................................................................5-1
USER DEFAULT TABLE..............................................................................................................................................................5-2
USER PINS.................................................................................................................................................................................5-2
Erase User.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 5-2
Change Own PIN...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-3
Change Other PIN.................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-3
Add PIN...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-4
Delete PIN................................................................................................................................................................................................. 5-4
View PIN.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-4
USER TOKENS...........................................................................................................................................................................5-4
Add Token................................................................................................................................................................................................. 5-4
Delete Token............................................................................................................................................................................................. 5-5
Token Status............................................................................................................................................................................................. 5-5
Edit Token.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 5-5
RF KEYFOBS..............................................................................................................................................................................5-6
Add Keyfob............................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-6
Delete Keyfob........................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-6
Test Keyfob............................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-6
USER PROPERTIES....................................................................................................................................................................5-7
User Name................................................................................................................................................................................................. 5-7
Area Assignment..................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-7
User Options............................................................................................................................................................................................. 5-8
Master User........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 5-8
Arm Only............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 5-8
Can Bypass......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-8
Auto Bypass Allowed...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-8
Always Report Op/Cl...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-8
UNDERSTANDING TIMEZONES...............................................................................................................................................5-8
User....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-8
TimeZones.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-8
TimeZone Access Example..................................................................................................................................................................... 5-8
TimeZone Access..................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-9
Door Assignment..................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-9
User Expire Date.................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-10
PIN Length.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 5-10
iv
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution 144  Installation Manual  Contents
PIN Retry Count..................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-10
Installer PIN............................................................................................................................................................................................ 5-11
Access Route........................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-11
Access Options....................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-11
Add Fingerprint..................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-12
Delete Fingerprint................................................................................................................................................................................. 5-12
Fingerprint Status................................................................................................................................................................................. 5-12
SECTION 6
AREA PROGRAMMING..............................................................................................................................6-1
AREA COMMANDS...................................................................................................................................................................6-1
Area Status................................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-1
Turn Area On/Off..................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-2
Turn All Areas On..................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-2
Turn All Areas Off..................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-2
Move To Area............................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-2
Chime On/Off........................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-2
Chime Mode............................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-3
AREA PROPERTIES...................................................................................................................................................................6-3
Area Name................................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-3
General Options....................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-3
Exit Time Restart............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-4
Reset Alarm Memory...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-4
Duress Allowed................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-4
Fault ACK Required......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-4
One Key Arming............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-4
One Key Part On............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-4
Link To Common Area.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-4
One Key Part Off............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-4
Input Options........................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-4
Non Sequential................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-4
Pulse Count H/Over........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-4
Senior Watch...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-5
Output Options........................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-5
SPK Beeps Keyfob............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-5
SPK Beeps Key/Sw........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-5
SPK Strobe In Part On..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-5
Alarm On PIN Retry......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-5
Alarm Exit Error................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-5
Alarm Key/Sw Tamper.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-5
Reporting Options................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-5
Report PIN Retry............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-6
Report Exit Error............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-6
Smart Lockout................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-6
Cancel Report.................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-6
Op/Cl In Part On............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-6
Op/Cl After Alarm............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-6
Strobe Trigger.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-6
Audible Burglary.............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-6
Silent Burglary................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-6
Fire Alarm............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-6
Keyfob On/Off................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-6
Keyswitch On/Off............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-7
24Hr Alarm......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-7
Part Mode 1 Name.................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-7
Part Mode 2 Name.................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-7
Auto Arming............................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-7
AREA REPORTING.....................................................................................................................................................................6-8
Account Dest 1......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-8
Account Dest 2......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-8
Open Close Route.................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-8
AREAS TIMERS..........................................................................................................................................................................6-8
Exit Time.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-8
Entry Time 1.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-9
Entry Time 2.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-9
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
v
Solution 144  Installation Manual  Contents
Part Entry Time......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-9
Auto Arm Pre-Alert................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-10
Senior Watch Time................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-10
AREA TESTING........................................................................................................................................................................6-11
Area Watch.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-11
User Test Interval................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-11
Service Interval...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-11
Test Options............................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-12
User Test Required.........................................................................................................................................................................................................6-12
Walk Test Report.............................................................................................................................................................................................................6-12
Walk Test 24Hr.................................................................................................................................................................................................................6-12
Walk Test Fire...................................................................................................................................................................................................................6-12
SECTION 7
INPUT PROGRAMMING............................................................................................................................7-1
ZONE ASSIGNMENTS...............................................................................................................................................................7-1
INPUT COMMANDS..................................................................................................................................................................7-2
Zone Status............................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-2
Zone Array................................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-2
Bypass Zones............................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-2
Set Chime Zones...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-3
Set Part 2 Zones....................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-3
Smoke Sensor Reset................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-4
ZONE PROPERTIES...................................................................................................................................................................7-4
Zone Name............................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-4
ZONE DEFAULT TABLE..............................................................................................................................................................7-4
Zone Type.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-5
00 – Not Used.................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-5
01 – Burglary Delay 1...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-5
02 – Burglary Delay 2...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-5
03 – Burglary Instant....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-5
04 – Burg Inst No Exit..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-5
05 – Burglary Handover................................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-5
06 – Burglary 24Hr........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-5
07 – Tamper 24Hr............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-5
08 – Hold Up 24Hr........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-5
09 – Medical 24Hr............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-5
10 – Panic 24Hr................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-6
11 – Fire 24Hr.................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-6
13 – Keyswitch Zone....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-6
14 – Display Only............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-6
15 – Non Burglary 24Hr................................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-6
Area Assignment..................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-6
Pulse Count............................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-7
Pulse Count Time..................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-8
UNDERSTANDING ACCESS GROUPS......................................................................................................................................7-8
Users..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-8
Outputs............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-8
Reader ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-8
Access Group..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-8
Door Access Group Example................................................................................................................................................................. 7-8
Door Assignment..................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-9
Report Route............................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-9
Report Options........................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-9
Lockout Dialler.................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-9
Report Alarm...................................................................................................................................................................................................................7-10
Report Troubles..............................................................................................................................................................................................................7-10
Report Bypass.................................................................................................................................................................................................................7-10
Report Restores..............................................................................................................................................................................................................7-10
Delay Reporting.............................................................................................................................................................................................................7-10
Zone Options.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-10
Lockout Siren...................................................................................................................................................................................................................7-10
Silent Alarm......................................................................................................................................................................................................................7-10
Inverted Seal....................................................................................................................................................................................................................7-10
vi
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution 144  Installation Manual  Contents
Bypass Allowed...............................................................................................................................................................................................................7-11
Sensor Watch...................................................................................................................................................................................................................7-11
Armed In Part On...........................................................................................................................................................................................................7-11
No EOL Required............................................................................................................................................................................................................7-11
Test On Exit.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................7-11
ADDING RF SENSORS.............................................................................................................................................................7-11
Add RF Device........................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-11
Delete RF Device.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-12
Test RF Device........................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-12
GLOBAL INPUT OPTIONS......................................................................................................................................................7-12
EOL Value................................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-12
Keyswitch Options................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-12
Input Options......................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-13
Tamper On Short............................................................................................................................................................................................................7-13
Response Time 500msec.............................................................................................................................................................................................7-13
Keyswitch Open Close.................................................................................................................................................................................................7-13
Alarm On Tamper...........................................................................................................................................................................................................7-13
Input Type............................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-13
Tamper Options..................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-14
Display Cabinet Tpr.......................................................................................................................................................................................................7-14
Report Cabinet Tpr........................................................................................................................................................................................................7-14
Audible Cabinet Tpr......................................................................................................................................................................................................7-14
Display Expander Tpr....................................................................................................................................................................................................7-14
Report Expander Tpr.....................................................................................................................................................................................................7-14
Audible Expander Tpr...................................................................................................................................................................................................7-14
INPUT TESTING.......................................................................................................................................................................7-14
Walk Test All Zones................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-14
Walk Test A Zone.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-14
Sensor Watch Time................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-15
SECTION 8
OUTPUT PROGRAMMING........................................................................................................................8-1
OUTPUT COMMANDS..............................................................................................................................................................8-1
Output Status........................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-1
Turn Output On/Off................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-2
Output Array............................................................................................................................................................................................ 8-2
Door Status............................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-2
Door Array................................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-3
Door Override.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-3
OUTPUT PROPERTIES..............................................................................................................................................................8-4
Output Name............................................................................................................................................................................................ 8-4
Event Type................................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-4
01 - Battery Trouble......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-4
02 – AC Trouble................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-4
03 – Telco Line Fail........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-4
04 – Comm Fail................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-4
05 – 3rd Dial Attempt..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-4
06 – Dest Reporting........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8-4
07 – Reserved.................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-4
08 – Dest Kiss Off............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-4
09 – User Keyfob Func 1................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8-4
10 – User Keyfob Func 2................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8-5
11 – Dialler Disabled....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-5
12 – Output Device Missing......................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-5
13 – Output Trouble........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8-5
14 – Panel On Line........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-5
15 – Incoming Call........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-5
16 – System Trouble........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8-5
17 – Box Tamper............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-5
18 – Zone Trouble............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8-5
19 – Zone Mirror............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-5
20 – Zone Alarm............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-5
21 – Area Disarmed......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-5
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
vii
Solution 144  Installation Manual  Contents
22 – Area Part Or All On................................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-5
23 – Area All On................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8-5
24 – Area Part On............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-5
25 – Area Part 2 On.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-5
26 – Entry Timing............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-6
27 – Exit Timing................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8-6
28 – End Of Exit Time...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-6
29 – Chime On.................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-6
30 - Chime Zone Trigger................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8-6
31 – Auto Arm Pre Alert................................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-6
32 – Ready To Arm All On.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-6
33 – Ready To Part Arm.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-6
34 – Ready To Part 2 Arm.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-6
35 – Close Sent OK.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-6
36 – External Audible..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-6
37 – Internal Audible...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-7
38 – Any Zone Alarm...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-7
39 – Fire Alarm.................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-7
40 – Burglary Alarm........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8-7
41 – Silent Alarm.............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-7
42 – Duress Alarm............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8-7
43 – Keypad Medical....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-7
44 – Keypad Fire............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-7
45 – Keypad Panic............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8-7
46 – Device Tamper......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-7
47 – Access Denied......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-7
48 – Strobe......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-7
49 – Smoke Sensor GND................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8-7
50 – Sensor Watch........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-7
51 – Senior Watch............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8-7
52 – Exit Error.................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-8
53 – Keyfob Function 1.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-8
54 – Keyfob Function 2.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-8
55 – Output In PreDelay................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8-8
56 – Follow PIN Code...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-8
57 – Part Entry Time........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8-8
58 – TimeZones................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8-8
59 – Temperature Hi/Lo................................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-8
60 – Door............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8-8
61 - Door Open Too Long.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-8
71 - CLI Trigger.................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-8
71 - GSM Signal Lost....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-8
73 - GPRS Failure.............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-8
74 - Ethernet Fail.............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-8
Event Assignment.................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-9
Output Polarity........................................................................................................................................................................................ 8-9
Open To Low...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-9
Open To Low + Pre.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-9
Open Latching Low......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-9
Open Pulsing Low............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8-9
Open 1 Shot Low...........................................................................................................................................................................................................8-10
1 Shot Low+Retrigger..................................................................................................................................................................................................8-10
1 Shot Low + Reset........................................................................................................................................................................................................8-10
Low To Open....................................................................................................................................................................................................................8-10
Low To Open + Pre........................................................................................................................................................................................................8-10
Low Latching Open.......................................................................................................................................................................................................8-10
Low Pulsing Open..........................................................................................................................................................................................................8-10
Low 1 Shot Open...........................................................................................................................................................................................................8-10
1 Shot Open+Retrigger...............................................................................................................................................................................................8-10
1 Shot Open + Reset.....................................................................................................................................................................................................8-10
Speaker Output..............................................................................................................................................................................................................8-10
Toggle................................................................................................................................................................................................................................8-10
TIMED OUTPUTS....................................................................................................................................................................8-10
Time Parameter...................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-10
One Shot Mode..............................................................................................................................................................................................................8-11
viii
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution 144  Installation Manual  Contents
Pulsing Mode..................................................................................................................................................................................................................8-11
Output Options...................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-11
Guest Control..................................................................................................................................................................................................................8-11
Monitor Overload..........................................................................................................................................................................................................8-11
Monitor Device Fail.......................................................................................................................................................................................................8-11
Alarm On Device Fail....................................................................................................................................................................................................8-11
Block If All On..................................................................................................................................................................................................................8-11
Show Status On Keypad..............................................................................................................................................................................................8-11
Macro Group........................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-11
Reserved.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-11
DOOR CONTROL.....................................................................................................................................................................8-12
Door Name.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-12
Unlock TimeZone................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-12
Door Options.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-13
Hold Off If Area Armed................................................................................................................................................................................................8-13
Hold Off Auto Unlock...................................................................................................................................................................................................8-13
Report Door Forced......................................................................................................................................................................................................8-13
Alarm Door Forced........................................................................................................................................................................................................8-13
OUTPUT TESTING...................................................................................................................................................................8-13
External Siren Test................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-13
Internal Siren Test.................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-14
Strobe Test.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-14
Fire Siren Test......................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-14
OUTPUT EVENT TYPE TABLE.................................................................................................................................................8-15
OUTPUT ASSIGNMENTS........................................................................................................................................................8-16
OUTPUT DEFAULT TABLE.......................................................................................................................................................8-16
SECTION 9
COMMS PROGRAMMING.........................................................................................................................9-1
COMMS PROGRAMMING COMMANDS..................................................................................................................................9-1
Call/Answer RAS...................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-1
Call Forward On/Off................................................................................................................................................................................ 9-1
Check Web Email..................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-2
Email System Log..................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-2
Start Direct Link....................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-2
Voice Setup............................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-2
Register Customer................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-4
Comms > Commands >.......................................................................................................................................................................... 9-4
Register Installer...................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-4
PHONE NUMBER PROGRAMMING.........................................................................................................................................9-4
Number Prefix.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-4
Destination 1............................................................................................................................................................................................ 9-4
Destination 2........................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-5
Call Forward On....................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-5
Call Forward Off....................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-6
COMMS PROPERTIES...............................................................................................................................................................9-6
Call Attempt Count.................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-6
Dialler Options......................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-7
Dialler Enabled.................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-7
Pulse Dialling..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-7
Dial Tone Detect............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-7
Busy Tone Detect............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-7
Mirror Report WEB........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-7
Extend H/S To 1min......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-7
Abort Failed Reports....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-7
Phone Line Options................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-7
Display Line Fail................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 9-7
Report Line Fail................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-7
Alarm L/Fail If On............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-8
Alarm L/Fail If Off............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-8
Display On Line................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-8
Country...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-8
Set SMS Password.................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-9
Call Back Number.................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-9
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
ix
Solution 144  Installation Manual  Contents
RAS Security PIN.................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-10
Log Threshold......................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-10
Ring Count.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-10
RAS Options............................................................................................................................................................................................ 9-10
RAS Allowed....................................................................................................................................................................................................................9-11
Callback Verify.................................................................................................................................................................................................................9-11
Abort RAS On Alarm.....................................................................................................................................................................................................9-11
Answering Bypass.........................................................................................................................................................................................................9-11
Answer Only If Armed..................................................................................................................................................................................................9-11
Tone Bypass.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................9-11
Report RAS Sessions.....................................................................................................................................................................................................9-11
DTMF Options........................................................................................................................................................................................ 9-11
DTMF Arming..................................................................................................................................................................................................................9-11
DTMF Disarming............................................................................................................................................................................................................9-11
DTMF User Functions...................................................................................................................................................................................................9-11
DTMF Quick Arming.....................................................................................................................................................................................................9-11
Voice Access Code................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-12
CLI Numbers........................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-13
User RAS PIN........................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-13
REPORTING OPTIONS............................................................................................................................................................9-14
TX Format Dest 1................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-14
TX Format Dest 2................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-14
Test Route............................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-14
System Route.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-14
Emergency Route.................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-15
Swinger Dialler....................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-15
Burg Report Delay................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-15
Fire Report Delay................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-15
MYALARM...............................................................................................................................................................................9-16
IP Address............................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-16
IP Port...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-16
MyAlarm Options.................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-16
Gateway Numbers................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-16
Email Address......................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-17
Email Options......................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-17
Open Close.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................9-17
Zones..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................9-17
System...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................9-17
Access................................................................................................................................................................................................................................9-17
SIA IP Prefix............................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-21
Account Number............................................................................................................................................................................................................9-21
Account Prefix.................................................................................................................................................................................................................9-21
Receiver Prefix.................................................................................................................................................................................................................9-21
User Name/Password............................................................................................................................................................................ 9-21
IP RAS Allowed................................................................................................................................................................................................................9-23
IP RAS Only If Disarmed...............................................................................................................................................................................................9-23
Report IP Session...........................................................................................................................................................................................................9-23
Report IP Lockout..........................................................................................................................................................................................................9-23
UDP Installer RAS...........................................................................................................................................................................................................9-23
UDP User RAS..................................................................................................................................................................................................................9-23
COMMS TESTING....................................................................................................................................................................9-24
Send Test Report.................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-24
Test Report Time.................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-24
Test Report Period................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-25
Test Report Options.............................................................................................................................................................................. 9-25
Test If No Other Rpt.......................................................................................................................................................................................................9-25
Test On Siren Reset........................................................................................................................................................................................................9-25
Test Route............................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-26
Dial Number Test................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-26
SECTION 10
DEVICE PROGRAMMING........................................................................................................................10-1
DEVICE COMMANDS..............................................................................................................................................................10-1
Device Status.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-1
LAN Secure.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-1
x
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution 144  Installation Manual  Contents
LAN Scan................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-2
LAN Watch............................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-2
Keypad Volume...................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-2
Keypad Contrast.................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-2
Keypad Backlight................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-2
KEYPAD & READER OPTIONS................................................................................................................................................10-3
Name........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 10-3
Area Options........................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-3
All On Arming Allowed................................................................................................................................................................................................10-3
Part On Arming Allowed.............................................................................................................................................................................................10-3
Disarming Allowed........................................................................................................................................................................................................10-3
Single Button Control...................................................................................................................................................................................................10-3
All User Areas..................................................................................................................................................................................................................10-3
Zero Exit Time..................................................................................................................................................................................................................10-4
PIN To Change Area.......................................................................................................................................................................................................10-4
Home Area Only.............................................................................................................................................................................................................10-4
Home Area.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-4
General Options..................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-5
Enable Rear Tamper......................................................................................................................................................................................................10-5
Report Temperature......................................................................................................................................................................................................10-5
Installer Allowed............................................................................................................................................................................................................10-5
Show Alarm When Armed..........................................................................................................................................................................................10-5
Reader Area Control......................................................................................................................................................................................................10-5
Reader Badging..............................................................................................................................................................................................................10-5
Enable Egress Input......................................................................................................................................................................................................10-5
Log Egress Events..........................................................................................................................................................................................................10-5
Indicator Options.................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-6
Extinguish.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................10-6
Greetings..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................10-6
Display Temperature.....................................................................................................................................................................................................10-6
Display Area Icons.........................................................................................................................................................................................................10-6
Trouble Alert Beeps.......................................................................................................................................................................................................10-6
Entry Exit Warning.........................................................................................................................................................................................................10-6
Part Exit Warning............................................................................................................................................................................................................10-6
Chime Tone......................................................................................................................................................................................................................10-6
Emergency Keys..................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-7
Audible Keypad Fire......................................................................................................................................................................................................10-7
Report Keypad Fire........................................................................................................................................................................................................10-7
Audible Kpad Medical..................................................................................................................................................................................................10-7
Report Kpad Medical....................................................................................................................................................................................................10-7
Audible Kpad Panic.......................................................................................................................................................................................................10-7
Report Keypad Panic....................................................................................................................................................................................................10-7
Door Assignment................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-8
Lockout Time.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-8
RF RECEIVER OPTIONS..........................................................................................................................................................10-9
Receiver Options................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-9
Display RF Rcvr Trouble...............................................................................................................................................................................................10-9
Alarm RF Rcvr Tamper..................................................................................................................................................................................................10-9
Report RF Rcvr Tamper................................................................................................................................................................................................10-9
Alarm RF Rcvr Jamming..............................................................................................................................................................................................10-9
Report RF Rcvr Jamming.............................................................................................................................................................................................10-9
Alarm Rcvr Comm Fail..................................................................................................................................................................................................10-9
Report Rcvr Comm Fail................................................................................................................................................................................................10-9
Supervision Time................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-9
RF Device Options...............................................................................................................................................................................10-10
Display RF Tamper...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-10
Report RF Tamper....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-10
Report RF Low Battery.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-10
Report Lost RF Devices............................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-10
Open Zone On Lost RF.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-10
Audible Keyfob Panic................................................................................................................................................................................................ 10-10
Report Keyfob Panic.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-10
Keyfob Func Part On.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-10
Add RF Keypad.....................................................................................................................................................................................10-10
Delete RF Keypad................................................................................................................................................................................10-10
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
xi
Solution 144  Installation Manual  Contents
View RF Device ID................................................................................................................................................................................10-10
SERIAL DEVICE OPTIONS....................................................................................................................................................10-11
Device Type...........................................................................................................................................................................................10-11
Baud Rate..............................................................................................................................................................................................10-11
Flow Control.........................................................................................................................................................................................10-11
GSM/GPRS Status................................................................................................................................................................................10-11
GSM/GPRS Options.............................................................................................................................................................................10-12
Auto Forward SMS...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-12
Forward SMS To Mail................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-12
CLI Trigger Table 1...............................................................................................................................................................................10-12
CLI Trigger Table 2...............................................................................................................................................................................10-13
SMS Control..........................................................................................................................................................................................10-13
Display Faults............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-15
Report Cable Lost....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-15
Report IP Conflict........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 10-15
Report Poll Fail............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-15
SECTION 11
SYSTEM PROGRAMMING.......................................................................................................................11-1
SYSTEM COMMANDS.............................................................................................................................................................11-1
Panel Status............................................................................................................................................................................................ 11-1
System Trouble....................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-1
SYSTEM TROUBLE MESSAGES..............................................................................................................................................11-2
Power Missing.................................................................................................................................................................................................................11-2
AC Missing........................................................................................................................................................................................................................11-2
Battery Low......................................................................................................................................................................................................................11-2
Battery Missing...............................................................................................................................................................................................................11-2
Low Battery......................................................................................................................................................................................................................11-2
Box Tamper......................................................................................................................................................................................................................11-2
Temperature Alert.........................................................................................................................................................................................................11-2
Receiver Missing............................................................................................................................................................................................................11-2
Case Tamper....................................................................................................................................................................................................................11-2
Receiver Jam....................................................................................................................................................................................................................11-2
Comms Fail Route1.......................................................................................................................................................................................................11-2
Comms Fail Route2.......................................................................................................................................................................................................11-2
Sensor Watch Alert........................................................................................................................................................................................................11-2
Comms BUSS Trble........................................................................................................................................................................................................11-2
Default PIN Trble............................................................................................................................................................................................................11-2
Date & Time......................................................................................................................................................................................................................11-2
Cabinet Tamper..............................................................................................................................................................................................................11-2
Connection Trouble......................................................................................................................................................................................................11-2
Overload Condition......................................................................................................................................................................................................11-2
Zone Was In Alarm.........................................................................................................................................................................................................11-3
Telco Line Fail..................................................................................................................................................................................................................11-3
LAN+ Overload...............................................................................................................................................................................................................11-3
COMM+ Overload..........................................................................................................................................................................................................11-3
ACC+ Overload...............................................................................................................................................................................................................11-3
Service Required............................................................................................................................................................................................................11-3
Memory Checksum.......................................................................................................................................................................................................11-3
Phone Line In Use..........................................................................................................................................................................................................11-3
Battery Trouble...............................................................................................................................................................................................................11-3
History Log............................................................................................................................................................................................. 11-3
Domestic Default................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-4
Factory Default...................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-4
Template Default................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-5
TimeZone Array..................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-5
Service Mode.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-5
SYSTEM CLOCK.......................................................................................................................................................................11-6
Set Date And Time................................................................................................................................................................................. 11-6
Summertime On.................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-6
Summertime Off.................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-6
Australian Daylight Savings Times...........................................................................................................................................................................11-6
Locale....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-7
SYSTEM POWER OPTIONS.....................................................................................................................................................11-7
xii
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution 144  Installation Manual  Contents
AC Options.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 11-7
Display AC Fail.................................................................................................................................................................................................................11-7
Report AC Fail..................................................................................................................................................................................................................11-7
Sync Clock to AC............................................................................................................................................................................................................11-7
Random AC Reporting 2hr.........................................................................................................................................................................................11-7
AC Fail After 1 Hour.......................................................................................................................................................................................................11-7
Display Clock Trouble...................................................................................................................................................................................................11-7
Battery Options...................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-8
Display Battery Fail........................................................................................................................................................................................................11-8
Report Battery Fail.........................................................................................................................................................................................................11-8
Battery Test On Arming...............................................................................................................................................................................................11-8
OK To Arm Low Battery................................................................................................................................................................................................11-8
Fuse Options........................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-8
Display COMM+ O/Load..............................................................................................................................................................................................11-8
Report COMM+ O/Load...............................................................................................................................................................................................11-8
Display +12v O/Load....................................................................................................................................................................................................11-9
Report +12v O/Load.....................................................................................................................................................................................................11-9
Display LAN O/Load......................................................................................................................................................................................................11-9
Report LAN O/Load.......................................................................................................................................................................................................11-9
HORN SPEAKER OPTIONS.....................................................................................................................................................11-9
Tone.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-9
Speed....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-9
Volume.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-9
Siren Swinger.......................................................................................................................................................................................11-10
TIMEZONES...........................................................................................................................................................................11-10
Name......................................................................................................................................................................................................11-11
Time.......................................................................................................................................................................................................11-11
Day.........................................................................................................................................................................................................11-11
TimeZone Options...............................................................................................................................................................................11-12
Invert Logic................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-12
Master Can Edit............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 11-12
SYSTEM HOLIDAYS...............................................................................................................................................................11-12
Holiday Name.......................................................................................................................................................................................11-12
Start Stop Dates...................................................................................................................................................................................11-13
SYSTEM OPTIONS.................................................................................................................................................................11-13
General Options...................................................................................................................................................................................11-13
Display LAN Fail........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-13
Report LAN Fail............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 11-13
Alarm On LAN Fail....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-13
Cannot Change Own PIN......................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-13
Monitor Default PINs................................................................................................................................................................................................. 11-13
PIN Always Required.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 11-14
Display Menu Numbers............................................................................................................................................................................................ 11-14
Area Options.........................................................................................................................................................................................11-14
Area 1 Common.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-14
First Open Last Close................................................................................................................................................................................................. 11-14
Reset Siren All Users................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-14
Power Up As Down.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-14
Fault ACK All Areas..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-14
Delay Trouble Beeps.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 11-14
Power Up Disarmed................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-14
Keypad Idle Screen..............................................................................................................................................................................11-15
Keypad Hi/Lo Temp.............................................................................................................................................................................11-15
Installer Options..................................................................................................................................................................................11-15
Report Installer............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 11-15
Report Prog Change.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 11-15
Restrict Installer PIN................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-15
Auto Exit Install 2hr.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-16
Auto Exit Service 2hr................................................................................................................................................................................................. 11-16
Multi Tenant Mode..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-16
Allow Defaulting......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-16
Language..............................................................................................................................................................................................11-16
Site Name..............................................................................................................................................................................................11-16
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
xiii
Solution 144  Installation Manual  Contents
SYSTEM TESTING..................................................................................................................................................................11-17
Walk Test All Zones..............................................................................................................................................................................11-17
Battery Test...........................................................................................................................................................................................11-17
SECTION 12
PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES..................................................................................................................12-1
Opening a Door using a Single Digit Code..........................................................................................................................................................12-1
Opening a Garage Door Using a 4 Button RF Keyfob.......................................................................................................................................12-1
Auto Arming an Area....................................................................................................................................................................................................12-1
Operating an Output with a TimeZone.................................................................................................................................................................12-2
Unlock a Door and Disarm Area 1 using a LAN Reader....................................................................................................................................12-2
Unlock a Door and Arm/Disarm Area 1 using a LAN Reader.........................................................................................................................12-2
Using CLI to establish Upload/Download Connection....................................................................................................................................12-3
Sending SMS Alarm Reports......................................................................................................................................................................................12-3
SECTION 13
SPECIFICATIONS.....................................................................................................................................13-1
SECTION 14
INDEX.......................................................................................................................................................14-1
xiv
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI

S EC TIO N 1
Overview
F E AT U R E S
OVERVIEW
Listed below are the main features of the Solution 144
Control Panel.
Zones
The Solution 144 control panel provides up to 144 separate
zones of protection. Zone programming determines the
panel’s response to open/short and tamper conditions on
the zone loop.
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
Individual Box Tamper Circuit Monitoring
Report Via Email (Internet)
Telephone Line Busy Tone Detect
RAS Intelli-Connect® CLI Caller Line Identification
Daylight Savings
Senior Watch
System Maintenance Interval Reminder
System Weekly Test Reminder
Area Inactivity Interval
Temporary PIN
Dual Reporting
Dual Redundant Reporting
Alarm Report Abort/Cancel Options
8 Programmable Holiday Calendars
16 Programmable Door Assignments
8 On-board Zones (Exp To 144 Zones)
Fire Alarm Verification
255 PIN Users
4 Supervised High Power Digital Outputs
1 Relay 2 Amp Form (C) Contact (Expandable to 32)
Supervised Siren Driver
Partitionable To 8 Areas
Dialler Reports SIA, Contact ID, SMS and Email Formats
Supervised LAN Keypads (Maximum 16 Keypads)
Keyswitch Input
1000 History Event Memory
EMI / Lightning Transient Protection
Fully Menu Text Programmable
Programmable Via Solution Link Software (Remote/Direct)
Telephone Line Fail Monitor
Time Executed Functions
60+ Output Event Types
Exit Restart
Expansion Module Supervision
DTMF Tone Decoder Built In
Remote Arming
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Areas
The control panel supports up to 8 separate areas. You
can assign all zones to a single area, or you can assign
each zone to a combination of different areas.
You can arm and disarm the control panel by area,
alternatively, you can arm and disarm several areas at the
same time.
Dialler
The control panel has a built-in dialler to send reports
to the receiving party (ie. Security company monitoring
station, mobile phone etc).
Keypads
You can connect a maximum of 16 fully supervised
keypads to the control panel. The available current affects
the total number of keypads that you can connect without
the need to provide additional power supplies.
History Log
The control panel can store up to 1000 history events from
all 8 areas. All events are stored in the log, even if they are
programmed not to report via the on-board dialler.
You can view the control panel’s history log via keypad,
serial printer (optional), or by connection of a personal
computer (direct/remote) using the Solution Link upload/
download software.
Programming
You can program the control panel either by a keypad
or using a personal computer using the Solution Link
upload/download software.
1-1
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Overview
This page left intentionally blank
1-2
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI

S EC TIO N 2
Installing the Hardware
A B O U T T H E PA N E L
MW730B - Large Cabinet
E N C LO S U R E S
The MW720B - Small Enclosure and MW730B - Large
Enclosure have been designed to reduce installation time
and improve aesthetics on larger installations where often
multiple enclosures need to be located in close proximity
to each other.
Use appropriate fasteners capable of handling a minimum
of 12kg to fix the cabinet against a sturdy surface using
the mounting holes provided.
A number of new features have been incorporated
including a new style tamper bracket which can be
easily installed before or after the enclosure is mounted
to the wall, an anti tamper lid which insures the cabinet
tamper triggers when the lid is removed, easier access
for flexible and rigid conduits, additional 20mm cable
entry knockouts and a new board mounting system using
removable spring clips.
The MW720B and MW730B enclosures include numerous
holes, allowing the PCB mounting clips to be positioned
in the most appropriate location for each installation.
I N S TA L L I N G T H E TA M P E R S W I TC H
The tamper switch can be located on either the left or right
hand side of the cabinet to suit the installation. Before
installing the bracket, fit the tamper lead to the switch
and then insert it into the bracket.
Once the enclosure has been mounted to the wall, insert
the tamper bracket into the rectangular hole in the top
flange of the enclosure and then slide the base of the
bracket toward the top until the tamper switch locates in
the rear of the enclosure.
Depress the tamper a few times with your finger to ensure
smooth operation.
For ease, it is recomended that the PCB mounting
clips are installed from the rear of the enclosure
Note before mounting it to the wall.
i
3mm Philips Head
Machine Screw
Supplied
Circuit Board
Component Side
Support Clip
Press Fit Supplied
Rear of Cabinet
Figure 1: PCB and Mounting Clip Installation Diagram
E N C LO S U R E F I X I N G M E T H O D
MM720B - Small Enclosure
Use appropriate fasteners capable of handling a minimum
of 6kg to fix the cabinet against a sturdy surface using the
mounting holes provided.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Figure 2: Tamper Bracket Installation
E N C LO S U R E M O D U L E S PAC E S
The MW720 enclosure has space for 2 large modules or
4 small modules while the optional MW730 enclosure
has space for up to 4 large modules or 8 small ones. The
enclosures have been designed so that any combination
of large and small units can be neatly mounted together
on the wall.
Each module is mounted to the enclosure using 4 or more
clip in standoffs. The clips can be inserted from the rear
of the enclosure before mounting it to the wall, or from
the front of the enclosure after it has been mounted. Both
methods should be performed using your finger tips to
2-1
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Installing the Hardware
prevent damage to the standoff. (Standoffs and screws
are supplied with each module).
All compatible add on modules will mount on these
spaces. See below for list if modules which can be added
to the control panel.
Module
Solution 144 Control Panel
CM704B Zone Expander
CM705B Universal Expander
CM710B Output Expander
CM720B LAN Power Supply
CM760B Real Time Clock
CM797B LAN Isolator Module
CM195B RF Receiver Expander
Space Occupied
2 Module Spaces
1 Module Space
2 Module Spaces
1 Module Space
1 Module Space
1 Module Space
1 Module Space
1 Module Space
Table 1: Expansion Options
Use the above table to help determine which size cabinet
you will require for the job.
On some export models, one module space will not be
available as the mains transformer mounts in this location.
I N S TA L L I N G PA N E L S A N D M O D U L E S
Once the enclosure is secured in place, install the panels
and modules onto the mounting clip using the supplied
3mm screws. Do not over tighten the screws.
Figure 3: MW720B - Small Enclosure Details
When fitting panels or large modules, you should use 5
mounting clips, one in each corner of the PCB and one
in the middle of the PCB underneath the main terminal
blocks. When mounting small modules, only 4 clips are
required, 1 in each corner.
Both enclosures are supplied with tamper switches,
tamper leads, tamper brackets and a quantity of
mounting clips and screws. If required, additional
mounting clips and screws may be purchased in bags of
50 clips (10 packs x 5pcs). (P/N: MW890)
Figure 4: PCB Mounting Clip
The following example shows the MW720B -Small
enclosure configured using 4 small modules.
The supplied mounting clips are designed to use the
3mm machine screws supplied with the enclosure.
Note The use of self tapping screws will damage the clips.
i
2-2
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Installing the Hardware
320 mm
C
B
A
A A
A
A
A A
A
520 mm
B
CABLE ENTRY (REAR)
D
A
A A
A
A
A A
A
CABLE ENTRY (REAR)
D
A
A A
A
A
A A
A
CABLE ENTRY (REAR)
D
B
C
A
A A
A
A
A A
A
A
B
C
D
=
=
=
=
B
PCB Mounting Clip Holes
Enclosure Mounting Holes
Tamper Bracket Mounting Holes
Earth Stud - 4mm
Figure 6: MW730B - Large Enclosure Details
The following examples show the MW730B - Large
enclosure configured using 6 small modules and 1 large
module.
Figure 5: MW720B Configuration Examples
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
2-3
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Installing the Hardware
CO N N E C T I N G T H E B AT T E R Y
The panel is supplied with a set of battey leads to suit
the chosen enclosure. Connect the Red Battery lead to
the Battery (+) terminal and the Black Battery lead to the
Battery (-) terminal on the PCB.
When installing large modules you should fit 5
mounting clips as shown.
Clip 5 provides support under the main terminal
block only. No screw is fitted.
Once terminated onto the PCB connect the other end of
the leads to the battery paying attention to the polarity.
1
2
MODULE
SPACE 1
4
3
5
CABLE ENTRY (REAR)
MODULE
SPACE 2
MODULE
SPACE 3
CABLE ENTRY (REAR)
MODULE
SPACE 4
MODULE
SPACE 5
AC M A I N S T R A N S F O R M E R O P T I O N
On models with an internal transformer, a permanent
connection shall be made to the mains supply. See
Figure 8. This must be completed by a suitably qualified
electrician according to the applicable wiring standards
and regulations.
Next connect the transformer output wires (red) to the
removable terminal block supplied and then connect it
to the PCB. Always check the orientation of the terminal
block with the PCB markings before connecting.
For permanently connected equipment, a readily
accessable disconnect device shall be installed in a
Note location near to the equipment.
i
Transformer Output
(Red Wires)
Wiring must be carried out by
a licensed electrician following
applicable wiring standards
CABLE ENTRY (REAR)
MODULE
SPACE 6
MODULE
SPACE 7
A
3
FUSE
8AG - 250V
250mA MAX
NEUTRAL
L
L
ACTIVE
FUSED
A
A
C
When installing small modules, you should
fit 4 mounting clips as shown.
CO N N E C T I N G P O W E R TO T H E PA N E L
For normal operation, the panel requires both AC and DC
power sources. The AC source can be provided either
by an external adapter or by an internal transformer
depending on the model and country of sale.
TRANSFORMER
220 - 240V A.C.
50-60Hz 150mA
EARTH
B
Figure 7: MW730 Configuration Examples
A
Transformer
Input
(Blue Wires)
N
4
D
2
N
1
A
B
C
D
= PCB Mounting Clip Holes
= Enclosure Mounting Holes
= Fused Terminal Block
= Transformer
Figure 8: Internal Transformer Connection Diagram
When connecting using the AC adapter, feed the cable in
to the enclosure and terminate the wires on the removable
terminal block supplied before connection it to the PCB.
If using a 3 wire Adaptor, then the earth wire should also
be terminated onto the terminal block. Always check the
orientation of the terminal block with the PCB markings
before connecting it to the PCB.
2-4
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Installing the Hardware
PA N E L L E D I N D I C ATO R S
The control panel PCB has two LED indicators (Dialler and
Status LED’s) which display the following information.
Condition
Off
On
Flashing
Key
The [MAIL] key allows you to read stored
mail. This key can also be used to initiate
a dialler test when you press and hold for
two seconds.
Meaning
Offline
On Line (Dialling/Answered)
Incoming Call
The [] key allows you to move the
cursor left when programming text or
telephone numbers.
Table 2: Dialler Indicator LED
Condition
Off
On
Flash Once Every 2 Seconds
Flash Fast
The [] key allows you to move the
cursor right when programming text or
telephone numbers.
Meaning
Error
Error
OK
AC or Battery Trouble
The [↑] key allows you to navigate
through menus or to toggle characters
when programming telephone numbers.
The [] key allows you to navigate
through menus or to toggle characters
when programming telephone numbers.
Pressing The [] key will display current
trouble conditions when the area that the
keypad is displaying is disarmed.
Table 3: Status Indicator LED
During factory defaulting the Status and Dialler LED
indicators will flash alternatively for approximately
Note 15 seconds.
i
+
A B O U T T H E K E Y PA D
for 2 sec
The keypad has 20 keys that allow you to input instructions
and navigate the programming menu’s as required. Some
keys have a secondary function which is activated by
pressing and holding them down for two seconds. Each
key is described below.
+
for 2 sec
Key
Description
+
to
The numeric keys allow you to enter your
user PIN when required.
for 2 sec
Use the [MENU] and the numeric keys
to enter commands. The [MENU] key
is also used to go back one level when
navigating through menus or to exit a
programming location without saving
changes.
Description
Press and hold the [] and [↑] keys
together for 2 seconds will initiate a
panic emergency alarm to be triggered.
If programmed, the sirens will sound and
the monitoring station will be notified.
Press and hold the [] and [] keys
together for 2 seconds will initiate a
fire emergency alarm to be triggered. If
programmed, the sirens will sound and
the monitoring station will be notified.
Press and hold the [↑] and [] keys
together for 2 seconds will initate a
medical emergency alarm to be triggered.
If programmed, the sirens will sound and
the monitoring station will be notified.
Table 4: Keypad Key Functions
The [ON] key allows you to turn an area
or output on. To turn all areas on at the
same time when the system has been
partitioned, press and hold the [ON] key
for two seconds.
The [PART] key allows you to turn an
area Part On. This key can also be used
to bypass a zone or multiple zones when
you press and hold for two seconds after
you enter your PIN.
Figure 9: Keypad Emergency Alarm Trigger’s
The [OFF] key allows you to turn an area
or output off. To turn all areas off at the
same time when the system had been
partitioned, press and hold the [OFF] key
for two seconds after you enter your PIN.
The [OK] key allows you to save any
changes and exit the command.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
2-5
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Installing the Hardware
S TAT U S I CO N S / L E D ’S
The following table lists the function of each of the ICON
symbols and LED indicators on the keypad display.
Icon
Status
Meaning
The keypad can be programmed to display area
icons (1 to 8) that allow users to easily identify
which areas have been turned on or off without
the need to toggle between areas (See MENU 6-14).
Flashing
Area not ready to turn on
Flashing
Installer programming mode is
active.
Table 5: ICON & LED Indicator Meanings
K E Y PA D TO N E S
All keypads emit several distinct tones and display text
to alert you to system events. The volume of the keypad
tones can be adjusted in MENU 6-1-0.
The area is turned All On or Part On
Off
The area is turned Off
Flashing
Fast
The area has an alarm
Type
Meaning
On
System power is normal
Fire
Alarm
Tone
When a fire zone sounds an alarm, the keypad
will sound 3 seconds on and 2 seconds off
(repeat).
Flashing
System power is missing
Flashing
A fire alarm is active
Burglary
Alarm
Tone
When a burglary zone activates while your
system is turned on, your keypad emits a
continuous siren tone. It sounds for the time
set by your security company.
Trouble
Tone
When a system component is not functioning
properly, your keypad sounds 4 fast short
beeps followed by a 5 second pause (repeat).
Key Press
Tone
Pressing any key on the keypad sounds one
short beep, indicating that the key press is
accepted.
Entry
Delay
Tone
When you enter the premises through a zone
programmed for entry delay, the keypad
sound a Hi/Low tone to remind you to turn off
the area. If the area is not turned off before
the entry delay expires, an alarm condition will
sound and a report may be sent to your alarm
company.
Exit
Delay
Tone
After you turn an area All On, the keypad will
sound 1 short beep every second. During the
last 10 seconds fast short beeps will be heard.
If you don’t exit before the delay time expires
and an exit delay door is faulted, an alarm
occurs.
Error
Tone
If you enter an incorrect value when
programming, the keypad will sound a 2
second tone.
Menu
Mode
The keypad will sound a Lo/Hi tone to indicate
you have entered MENU Mode and a Hi/Lo
tone to indicate you have exited MENU mode.
Chime
Tone
The keypad sounds fast short beeps to alert
you when a zone programmed for chime is
faulted or unsealled.
No fire alarm
On
Fire alarm in memory (Turn the area
All On and Off to Clear).
On
The existing service or trouble condition has been acknowledged.
Off
No service or trouble conditions
exist
Flashing
A service or trouble condition is
present that has not been acknowledged.
On
The area is turned Part On.
Off
The area is not turned Part On.
On
The area is turned off.
Off
The area is turned All On or Part On
On
The area is turned All On or Part On
Off
The area is turned Off
On
All messages have been read.
Off
Message queue is empty
Flash
2-6
Red &
Green
LED
Area is off.
On
Off
Red
LED
On
Green
LED
An unread message is in the queue.
On
Area is ready to turn on
(All On / Part On)
Off
Not ready, Zone Open
On
All On
Flashing
Alarm
Table 6: Keypad Tones
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Installing the Hardware
K E Y PA D & R E A D E R S S E T U P
The control panel can have a maximum of 16 keypads
and/or readers connected via the LAN terminals. Each
keypad or reader must be set to a unique address before
they will operate.
Each keypad or reader needs to be assigned to a home
area via MENU 6-1-3. This sets the area the keypad or
reader will display and control by default. Keypads and
readers can be locked to a home area or allowed to roam
or move between areas. At factory default, the home area
is factory default to operate Area 1.
Set each keypad or reader address using "Table 7: DIP
Switch Address Settings" on page 2-7 and "Table 8:
Rotary Switch Address Settings" on page 2-7 as a guide.
Only 1 keypad can be assigned to each address. All
keypads are supplied from the factory set to address
Note 1. (OFF-OFF-OFF-OFF).
i
D I P S W I TC H A D D R E S S S E L E C T
4
Figure 10: Keypad DIP Switch Address Settings
DIP Switch Address Settings
Keypad/Reader No
S1
S2
S3
S4
1
Off
Off
Off
Off
2
On
Off
Off
Off
3
Off
On
Off
Off
4
On
On
Off
Off
5
Off
Off
On
Off
6
On
Off
On
Off
7
Off
On
On
Off
8
On
On
On
Off
9
Off
Off
Off
On
10
On
Off
Off
On
11
Off
On
Off
On
12
On
On
Off
On
13
Off
Off
On
On
14
On
Off
On
On
15
Off
On
On
On
16
On
On
On
On
R OTA R Y S W I TC H A D D R E S S S E L E C T
Keypads and readers fitted to the system must be assigned a unique address on the LAN. Some keypads and
readers include a rotary address switch for quick selection.
The following table shows how to set the address setting for each keypad and reader, as well as the number of
devices the panel can support.
Rotary Switch Address Settings
Address Number
Keypad/Reader No
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
Table 8: Rotary Switch Address Settings
Figure 11: Rotary Swich Address Settings
Table 7: DIP Switch Address Settings
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
2-7
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Installing the Hardware
E O L R E S I S TO R CO LO U R CO D E
3K3 =
Orange
6K8 =
Blue
Figure 12:
EOL Resistor Colour Chart
Selected Resistor Colour Codes
Value
Band 1
Band 2
Band 3
Band 4
2K2
RED
RED
RED
BROWN
4K7
YELLOW
VIOLET
RED
BROWN
5K6
GREEN
BLUE
RED
BROWN
8K1
GREY
BROWN
RED
BROWN
10K
BROWN
BLACK
ORANGE
BROWN
12K
BROWN
RED
ORANGE
BROWN
22K
RED
RED
ORANGE
BROWN
Table 9:
EOL Resisstor Colour Codes
Because of variations in the colours used to mark resistors
it is recommended that you use a multimeter to verify the
value of resistors rather than rely on the colour code.
2-8
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI

S EC TIO N 3
Wiring Diagrams
using Normally-Open Alarm Contacts you must
select Inverted Seal for each zone in MENU 3-1-8.
A shorted loop is a tamper condition for all EOL zone
configurations. .
ZO N E W I R I N G
ZN 1
N/C
ZONE 1
N/C
ZONE 2
GND
ZN 2
ZN 1
N/O
ZONE 1
N/O
ZONE 2
GND
2
ZN 2
Figure 13: N/C No EOL Zone
Figure 17: N/O No EOL Zone
ALARM

N/C
GND

N/C
ZN 2
ZONE 1
ALARM
ZONE 2
ZN 1

N/O
GND
ALARM

ZN 1
N/O
ZN 2
ZONE 1
ZONE 2
ALARM
Figure 14: N/C Single EOL Zone
ZN 2
(6K8 EOL)
ZONE 1
Figure 18: N/O Single EOL Zone
N/O
ZONE 9
ALARM
ZN 1
(3K3 EOL)

ALARM

N/C
GND
(3K3 EOL)

ALARM
ZN 1

N/C
(6K8 EOL)
ZONE 1
N/O
GND
ALARM
ZN 2
ZONE 9
Figure 15: N/C Split EOL Zone
Figure 19: N/O Split EOL Zone
ALARM
N/C
ZONE 1
(3K3 EOL)
ZN 1
GND
TAMPER
TAMPER
(6K8 EOL)

ZN 22
N/C
ALARM
N/O

GND

TAMPER
TAMPER
(6K8 EOL)

ZN 11
N/C
ZONE 1
(3K3 EOL)
ZN 2
Figure 16: N/C Zone With Tamper
The Above diagrams display the zone wiring
configurations using Normally-Closed Alarm
Note contacts and Normally-Open Alarm Contacts. When
i
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Figure 20: N/O Zone With Tamper
3-1
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Wiring Diagrams
E O L R E S I S TO R CO LO U R S A N D VA LU E S
Use either the 4 colour, or solid colour resistors supplied.
3K3 =
Orange
6K8 =
Blue
Figure 21: EOL Resistor Colour Chart
B O A R D CO N N E C TO R S
T
he following table lists the various sockets, pin headers
and switches located on the panel and their functions.
Connector
Service
Tamper
Default
Voice
Module
Serial
Telco
Relay
Table 10:
Description
This socket allow you to connect a service
Keypad to the panel during installation.
This socket is used to connect the panel
enclosure tamper switch.
This push button is used to reset the control
panel back to factory default.
This is used to connect the optional Voice
Command Module (CM101B).
This socket is used to connect serial devices to
the control system like a Serial STU.
This is a RJ12 6P/4C connector that allows
you to connect the control panel to the PSTN
telephone line.
The relay select PIN’s allow you to easily
program the relay common contact to switch
either +12v or GND by fitting a plug on link.
Board Connector Descriptions
TERMINAL DESCRIPTIONS
Nº
Name
Description
1
Earth
Earth wire from this terminal is connected to
the Mains earth.
2
3
~ (AC)
~ (AC)
Connection of the AC plug pack transformer
4
5
BAT (-)
BAT (+)
Negative and positive connections to the
stand-by battery. 12 VDC / 7AH
6
7
8
9
10
11
+12 V
+12 V
+12 V
GND
GND
GND
These terminals are used to power detectors
and LAN devices up to 750 mA.
12
13
LAN +
LAN -
These terminals are used to power LAN
devices up to 750 mA.
LAN A
Connect the LAN A data terminal of any LAN
device (eg. Keypads, expansion boards) to
this terminal. The control panel supports up
to 300 m of 24/0.20 (18 AWG) wire on these
terminals.
15
LAN B
Connect the LAN B data terminal of any LAN
device (eg. Keypads, expansion boards) to
this terminal. The control panel supports up
to 300 m of 24/0.20 (18 AWG) wire on these
terminals.
16
COMM+
Alarm power capable of providing a
maximum of 2 Amp (+). This terminal is PTC
Fuse protected.
17
18
19
20
OUT 1
OUT 2
OUT 3
OUT 4
Programmable output, capable of providing
a maximum of 500 mA (-). This terminal is
PTC Fuse protected.
21
22
23
N/C
COM
N/O
2 A @ 24 VDC Relay Output - Form C contact
24
INPUT
Programmable Input for RF Receivers,
Keyswitch and other devices.
25
ZN 1
Zone 1 and 9 sensor loop input (+).
26
GND
Common (-) for Zone 1 and 2 sensor loop.
27
ZN 2
Zone 2 and 10 sensor loop input (+).
28
ZN 3
Zone 3 and 11 sensor loop input (+).
29
GND
Common (-) for Zone 3 and 4 sensor loop.
30
ZN 4
Zone 4 and 12 sensor loop input (+).
31
ZN 5
Zone 5 and 13 sensor loop input (+).
32
GND
Common (-) for Zone 5 and 6 sensor loop.
33
ZN 6
Zone 6 and 14 sensor loop input (+).
34
ZN 7
Zone 7 and 15 sensor loop input (+).
35
GND
Common (-) for Zone 7 and 8 sensor loop.
36
ZN 8
Zone 8 and 16 sensor loop input (+).
37
38
IN
IN
These terminals are used to connect the
telephone line from the street.
39
40
OUT
OUT
These terminals are used to connect the
premises telephones.
14
Table 11: Terminall Block Descriptions and Functions
3-2
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Wiring Diagrams
LAN OVERVIEW
The control panel communicates with other system
module devices via the built in RS485 LAN or Local Area
Network.
L
A
A N
-
B
+
The method shown in Figure 21, is only recommended for
use where the total LAN length is 300metres or less and the
system is not installed in a electrically noisy environment.
In this case it is possible to use 7/0.20 or 14/0.20 security
cable (non twisted) provided that module voltage levels
are maintained within specification.
The method shown in Figure 22, offers the greatest
immunity to noise interference and voltage surges. This
connection method is recommended where the total LAN
length is greater than 300metres. When using twisted pair
cable the LAN length can be up to 1200metres, and this
can be extended even further when using LAN isolators.
The LAN can be wired using the daisy chain method as
shown, where each module is wired back to the panel
on the same cable run or using a star configuration,
where individual modules are wired back to the panel on
individual wires.
Un-shielded cable can be used successfully in many
situations however for the highest reliability and
performance in areas prone to frequent electrical storms
or high levels of electrical interference, shielded twisted
pair cable should be used.
LAN+ and LAN- should not be used to power detectors or
other external devices. These devices should be powered
from the +12V terminals on the panel or via an external
power supply.
When wiring modules with built in power supplies like
the control panel and the CM720B Power Supply, do NOT
connect the EARTHwire from any 3 wire p
lug pack to the
module’sEARTH input terminal, if you have installed a
separate communication earth wire.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
A
B
N
Fit Shunt
First Device
E
Security Cable
(7/0.20-14/0.20)
cable can be used
for this wiring
configuration.
See the CM797 LAN Isolation Module reference guide
for more information on how to use LAN isolators to
increase the overall LAN length, improve surge immunity
protection and prevent earth loops.
+
EARTH
+
L
A
A N
-
Y
LAN
TERM
N
B
-
A
B
KEYPAD
300 metres max
LAN WIRING
Figure 21 and Figure 22 show the two recommended
module connection diagrams.
-
Y
LAN
TERM
CM704-ZONE EXPANDER
When using the recommended cable types the LAN can
be up to 1200 metres in length, or even greater when LAN
isolators are used.
i
EARTH
+
For increased security, the system uses anti-substitution
technology and a proprietary data encryption algorithm
to communicate with all LAN modules.
It is recommended that one or more CM797 Isolators
be used when connecting the LAN between multiple
Note buildings.
CONTROL PANEL
Connect to mains
earth via 3 wire
plug pack transformer.
The LOOP
terminal is
not internally
connected.
+
It can be
used to
terminate
+
the LAN+
on modules
which have
an on board
power supply.
B
L
A
A N
-
-
A
Connect to
mains earth
via 3 wire
plug pack
transformer.
CM720-POWER SUPPLY
B
EARTH
LOOP
-
L
A A
N
Positive LAN
voltage is
re-generated
by the CM720
Power Supply.
Y
LAN
TERM
N
B
+12V OUT
E
-
A
CM710-OUTPUT EXPANDER
EARTH
B
+
A
B
= +12V OUT
= EARTH
= LAN = LAN B
L
A
N
Y
LAN
TERM
N
Fit Shunt
Last Device
= LAN +
= LAN A
Figure 22: LAN Connection Using 2 Pair Security Cable
Recommended for LAN Lengths 300 metres or less.
The LAN A and LAN B wires are not interchangeable.
Make sure that the LAN A wires from all modules connect
to LAN A on the panel and LAN B wires from all modules
connect to LAN B on the panel.
Do not connect the positives of two power supply
sources together. When wiring the LAN to modules
that are self powered, or powered from an external
source you should terminate the LAN+ into the
terminal marked LOOP. This terminal is simply a
termination point and is not internally connected.
3-3
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Wiring Diagrams
2.5mm2 Yellow/Green
Connect to
main building
earth conductor.
CONTROL PANEL
C. E. T.
*
EARTH
+
L
A
A N
-
Shield only
connected
at one end.
Belden 8723
2 pair twisted
shielded data
cable is
recommended
for this wiring
configuration.
First Device
E
CM704-ZONE EXPANDER
EARTH
+
L
A
A N
-
Y
LAN
TERM
N
B
-
A
B
2.5mm2
+
2.5mm2
A B
N
Fit Shunt
B
+ -
E
KEYPAD
The LOOP
terminal is
not internally
connected.
+
It can be
used to
terminate
+
the LAN+
on modules
which have
an on board
power supply.
B
L
A
A N
-
-
A
B
2.5mm2
1500 metres max
Y
LAN
TERM
NOTE:
Do NOT connect
plug pack
Earth wires to
any modules
when running
a separate
communication
earth wire.
E
CM720-POWER SUPPLY
S YS T E M E A R T H I N G
When running a CET communications Earth as per
Figure 24, the communication earth should be connected
to the earth terminal on each module and then connected
back through the CET to the main building earth
conductor.
Do NOT connectthe plug pack transformers earth wire to
any modules earth terminal.
If a separate Communications Earth wire is installed,
Do NOT connect the EARTHwire from any 3 wire plug
Note pack to any modulesEARTH input terminal.
i
If a separate communications earth is NOT being used,
then you should connect the earth wire from the 3 wire
plug pack to the panels earth terminal as shown in Figure
22.
When using shielded cable, the shield of each length of
cable should only be connected to a protective earth at
one end. Do no allow the shield to make contact with
negative 0 volts, ground or any other wiring within the
system.
All earth wiring should be carried out in accordance with
the local wiring regulations in your area.
EARTH
LOOP
-
L
A A
N
Positive LAN
voltage is
re-generated
by the CM720
Power Supply.
Y
LAN
TERM
N
B
2.5mm2
+12V OUT
Shield not
connected
at this end.
A B
E
CM710-OUTPUT EXPANDER
EARTH
+
A
B
= SHIELD
= EARTH
L
A
N
Y
LAN
TERM
N
Fit Shunt
Last Device
= LAN +
= LAN = LAN A
= LAN B
= RE-GENERATED LAN +
Figure 23: LAN Connection Using Twisted Pair Cable
Recommended for LAN Lengths greater than 300 metres.
The LAN- terminals from all modules must be connected
together for correct operation.
T E R M I N AT I N G T H E L A N
For reliable operation the system LAN must be terminated
correctly. The control panel and all LAN modules include a
LAN TERM pin header and shunt which is used to connect
the termination resistor on the module.
When the shunt is installed between the Y pin and the
centre pin, the terminator is fitted and when the shunt is
between the N pin and the centre pin the terminator is
not fitted.
Where all modules are connected to the panel on a single
cable run, (Daisy Chained) the terminators should be
installed on the first and last modules on the LAN.
If the modules are connected to the panel via multiple
cables all running back to the control panel (Star
Configuration) then the terminators should be installed
on the modules at the end of the two longest cable runs.
There are noLAN terminators o
n keypads. If a keypad is
one of the two furthest devices from the control panel
then a 470 ohm 1/2watt resistor can be fitted at the
keypad between the LAN A and LAN B terminals.
In smaller installations where no LAN modules have been
installed there is no need to fit the termination resistor on
the control panel.
i
The LAN must be terminated correctly for proper
operation.
Note
3-4
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Wiring Diagrams
Earth Connection
Spade For Surge
Protection
16-18 VAC
24VA
Panel Cabinet
Tamper Circuit
Connection
Terminals
12VDC 7.2Ah Sealed
Lead Acid Battery
Panasonic LC-P127R2P
or Equivalent
The maximum
continuous
combined
current draw
from the +12V,
LAN + and
C+ terminals
must not
exceed 1 Amp
Battery
Charging
Globe
Accessory
12 VDC Supply
(750mA Fused)
RS485 LAN
Termination
Shunt
4-Pin Socket
to LAN For
Service Keypad
LAN Devices
Connection
Terminals
(750mA Fused)
Relay COM
Terminal
Programming
Shunt
Output Devices
12VDC Supply
(2.5A Fused)
Expansion Port
TCP/IP, GSM
Module
Connection
Output 1, 2, 3 and 4
Connection Terminals
500mA
Default and
Direct Connect
Switch
Ouput 5
Relay Output
24V D.C. 2Amp
Refer to
Documentation
For Dialer &
Status LED’s
RF Receiver
/ Keyswitch
Input
10-Pin Serial
Connection
Socket For Direct
Link / Flash
Programming
etc.
X
Voice Module
Connection
Socket
(Optional)
G
SP

RoHS
N12138
Security & Access Controller N12138
D IGIFLEX
VISION-GRAPhIC
SOLUTION 144
N12138
Intrusion Control Panel
Powered by
Telephone Line
Connection Socket
(RJ12 6P4C)
P/Nº: CC600B
CC720
MFG: 12 P/Nº:
Oct 2012
MFG: 01-Mar-11
VER: 2.00
VER: 2.00
N12138
Zone Input
Terminals
Telephone Line
Connection
Terminals
Figure 24: Terminal Descriptions
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
3-5
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Wiring Diagrams
Earth Connection
Spade For Surge Protection
16-18V AC
24 VA
Connect To
Cabinet Tamper
GREEN
YELLOW
YELLOW
-
+
The maximum
continuous
combined
current draw
from the +12V,
LAN + and
C+ terminals
must not
exceed 1 Amp
+
Panasonic
LC-P127R2P
or Equivalent
12V DC
7.2AH Sealed
Lead Acid Battery
Accessories
(e.g. PIR Detectors)
-
NC
To Zone Terminals
COM
LAN +
Keypad /
LAN Expansion
Device
LAN LAN A
Relay COM
Terminal
Programming
Shunt
LAN B
Siren Tamper Switch
Horn
Speaker
N/C
+
-
Smoke
Detector
-
+
3K3
+
-
Fit the supplied
3K3 resistor
across the piezo
siren so the panel
can monitor the
connection.
Ouput 5
Relay Output
24V D.C. 2Amp
Piezo Siren
ZONE 2
N/C
ZONE 3
N/C
ZONE 4
N/C
ZONE 5
N/C
ZONE 6
+12V
GND
ZONE 7
ZONE 8
N/C
N/C
RJ12 6P4C - RJ12 6P4C
Phone Lead
G
Connect To
Telephone Line
Mode 3
N/C
SOLUTION 144
N/C
Intrusion Control Panel
Connect
To
Accessory
Power
ZONE 1
P/Nº: CC600B
MFG: 12 Oct 2012
VER: 2.00
RF
Receiver
RF DATA
X
Strobe Light
SP
N12138

RoHS
N12138

Premises
Telephone
Incoming Street
Telephone Line
Figure 25: Wiring Diagram
3-6
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI

S EC TIO N 4
Programming Overview
T
he control panel incorporates a menu text driven
interface. This interface is very similar to that found on
many mobile phones. Once programming mode is entered
you will see a number of menu options in the display and
these may vary depending in the user authority level.
ENTERING PROGRAMMING MODE
To enter installer program mode, enter PIN + [MENU].
The default Installer PIN is 1234.
The Red and Green LED indicators on the keypad will flash
to confirm Installer programming mode is active.
N AV I G AT I N G T H E M E N U S
Using the up and down arrow keys to navigate, locate the
desired menu item using the highlight bar and then press
the [OK] key to select.
A new list of menu items will appear. Repeat the above
until the desired menu item is located.
To navigate backwards through the menu items press
the [MENU] key at any time. Alternatively if you know the
direct menu item number press [MENU] + Item Number.
Key
Description
EXITING PROGRAMMING MODE

Scrolls Cursor Left
Press and hold down the [MENU] key for 2 seconds.

Scrolls Cursor Right

Scrolls Cursor Up

Scrolls Cursor Down
The system will scan all timezones and peform the
functions relative to the current system. For example if a
timed output should be operated then it will operate and
if the system should be armed it will arm.
i
Note
You can also select Exit and press [OK] from each
menu level.
OK
MENU
Go Back One Level, Abort Current Change or
Hold Down to Exit Programming Mode
0 to 9
Enter Data Value
ON
Turn On Bit Option
OFF
Turn Off Bit Option, Clear to End of Line
Table 12: Keys Used During Programming
CO M M A N D M E N U S
When you first enter programming mode, a special menu
called the 'Command Menu' will appear at the top of the
menu tree. The command menu provides a list of the most
common system funtions like “Turn Chime Mode On”,
“Move To An Area” or “Turn An Area On”.
LIST OPTIONS
Use the up and down arrow keys to step through the
available options. Press [OK] to save or [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Zone Type Zn1
Use the up and down arrow keys to navigate and press
[OK] to select the command required.
01 - Burglary Delay 1
Press  0-9, OK or MENU
PROGRAMMING OPTION BIT MENUS
Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the 8
different options. To enable an option, press the [ON] key
– a tick will be displayed. To disable an option, press the
[OFF] key.
Enter Menu Options or Saves Changes
i
You can also enter the option number directly
followed by [OK]. You must press the [OK] a second
Note
time to confirm the current setting.
Off On Low Battery
Show Overload
 Report Overload
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
To save programming changes, press [OK] or press [MENU]
to exit without saving.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
4-1
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Programming Overview
ALPHA TEXT
TELEPHONE NUMBERS
Text descriptions are available for Area Name, Zone Name,
User Name, TimeZone Name, Holiday Name, Keypad/
Reader Name and Output Name. Each name can have a
maximum of 20 characters.
To program, select primary telephone number under
MENU 5-1-1 then enter the digits of the telephone number
and press the [OK] key to save.
Area Name A2
Use the up and down arrow keys to program special
characters (•, # and Pause).
Destination 1 Phone 1
Reception Area
Press ◄► OK or MENU
0297417000
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
When programming text, each numeric key represents a
different group of characters.
Pressing the same numeric key repeatedly will step you
through the available characters assigned to the key. The
text key layout is the same as most phones. Refer to the
table below for detailed character information.
Key
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0




OFF
Characters Assigned To Each Numeric Key
.
,
?
!
&
`
1
A
B
C
a
b
c
2
D
E
F
d
e
f
3
G
H
I
g
h
i
4
J
K
L
j
k
l
5
M
N
O
m
n
o
6
P
Q
R
S
p
q
r
s
T
U
V
t
u
v
8
W
X
Y
Z
w
x
y
z
SPACE
0
Scroll Up through entire character list
Scroll Down through entire character list
Move to left one character position
Move to right one character position
Clear from cursor postiion to end of line
Scroll Up through entire character list 0 - 9 • # ,
comma = 2 second pause

Move to left or right one character position
OFF
Clear from cursor position to end of line
7
9
To save programming changes, press [OK] or press [MENU]
to exit without saving.
The following additional special characters are
availablebyscrollingusingtheupanddownarrowkeys.
+ - @ # $ “ & % * : ( ) / < > =
C LO C K P R O G R A M M I N G
Use the left and right arrow keys to move to the field and
use the up and down keys to change. Press [OK] to save or
[MENU] to exit without saving.
i

Enter the digits 0 to 9
To save programming changes, press [OK] or press [MENU]
to exit without saving.
Once the desired character is displayed press the right
arrow key to move to the next character position.
Note
0 to 9
Characters Assigned To Each Numeric Key
Table 14: Phone Number Character Set
Table 13: Text Keypad Character Set
i
Key
G E T T I N G S TA R T E D B AC K TO B A S E
The following steps are the mimimum requirements to
get the system reporting back to base. Examples assume
the panel is disarmed with no alarms and starting from
the factory default settings.
1) Enter programming mode.
[1][2][3][4] + [MENU]
2) Set date and time.
MENU 7-1-0
3) Change default installer PIN.
MENU 1-5-2
4) Change default master PIN.
MENU 1-1-1
5) Enter (client) account number for Area 1.
MENU 2-2-0
6) Enter base station primary telephone number.
MENU 5-1-1
7) Enter base station secondary telephone number.
MENU 5-1-2
8) Press and hold down [MENU] to exit.
The time is set using a 24 hour clock.
Note
Set Date And Time
01-Jan-2012 12:00
Press  OK to SAVE
i
4-2
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Programming Overview
SERVICE MODE
Service mode when activated disables dialler reporting,
prevents all alarms and prevents all users from arming the
system.
Turning Service Mode ON
1) Enter programming mode.
[1][2][3][4] + [MENU]
2) Turn service mode on.
[MENU] [7][0][8]
3) Follow display prompts.
4) Hold down [MENU] to exit.
i
Note
Keypads will display the word “SERVICE” in the middle
of the display when service mode is active.
Turning Service Mode OFF
1) Enter programming mode.
[1][2][3][4] + [MENU]
2) Turn service mode on.
[MENU] [7][0][8]
3) Follow display prompts.
4) Hold down [MENU] to exit.
i
You must exit Service Mode to reactivate the system.
Service mode will automatically exit after 2 hours.
Note
D E FAU LT I N G T H E S YS T E M
Defaulting the system will reset all programming options
back to the factory default setting. All programming
information will be erased.
Hardware Default
1) Remove all power to the system - AC and battery.
2) Press and hold the default push button, then apply
power to the control panel.
3) Release the default button, The panel will reset and
revert to normal operation when default is
complete.
Software Default
1) Enter programming mode.
[1][2][3][4] + [MENU]
2) Select factory default option.
MENU 7-0-4
3) The panel will reset and revert to normal operation
when the default is complete.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
You can disable factory defaulting using MENU 7-74. If factory defaulting has been disabled you must
Note know the installer PIN to perform a factory default
otherwise the system will need to be returned to
your supplier for defaulting or you can purchase a
CM255B Default Unlock Key which will unlock the
panel in the field. Charges will apply for defaulting if
returned to the distrubutor.
i
TRIGGERING A DURESS ALARM
If your PIN is 2580, to send a duress report when the area is off,
Enter, [2][5][8][0] + [8][0] + [OK] or [ON].
If your PIN is 2580, to send a duress report when the area is on,
Enter, [2][5][8][0] + [8][0] + [OFF].
Duress alarms are triggered by entering the user PIN
followed by the last 2 digits of the user PIN followed
Note by the ON or OFF key.
i
D O M E S T I C T E M P L AT E D E FAU LT S
The following table list the changes that will occur when
you select domestic default. See MENU 7-0-3 — Domestic
Default.
Program Option
Domestic Default Value
All Trouble Reports
Disabled
All Bypass Reports
Disabled
All Restore Reports
Disabled
Destination 1 TX Format
Domestic Reporting
Access Route
Log Only
Open / Close Reports
Log Only
Test Route
Log Only
System Route
Log Only
Table 15: Domestic Reporting Defaults
DIRECT LINK PROGRAMMING
The panel can be programmed via the Solution Link™
Upload/Download software in either Direct Link or
Remote Link modes. For Direct Link you will need a CM900
Direct Link module which is used to connect the panels
serial port to the PC.
Once the cable is connected you will need to hold down
the default switch on the panel for 5 seconds to initiate
the programming session. See the board layout drawings
in Section 3 of this manual for the default switch location.
4-3
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Programming Overview
ZO N E A R R AY
The feature allows you to view the condition of all zones
on the panel in banks of 16 zones at a time. From the
installer programing mode press MENU 3-0-1 to access
the zone array.
Use the [] and [] arrow keys to scroll up and down the
zone banks and press [OK] or [MENU] when finished.
The following information can be displayed depending
on the current zone status.
N= NORMAL
S = SHORTED
A= ALARM
T= TAMPER
- = DISABLED
0000000001111111
1234567890123456
NSA-ANAT-------Press  OK or MENU
In the above example screen,
N = Zone 01 and 06 are Normal (Sealed)
S = Zone 02 is Shorted
A = Zone 03,05,07 are in Alarm (Unsealed)
T = Zone 08 is in Tamper Alarm (Unsealed)
- = Zone 04, 09-16 are Disabled (Unused)
O U T P U T A R R AY
This feature allows you to view output status in groups of
16. From the installer programing mode press MENU 4-02 to access the output array.
Use the [] and [] arrow keys to scroll up and down the
output banks and press [OK] or [MENU] when finished.
The following information can be displayed depending
on the current zone status.
N = NORMAL - Off Condition
T = TRIGGERED - On Condition
F = FAULT - Overload Condition
- = DISABLED
1) Enter [MENU] + [4] + [0] + [2] and use the up and
down arrows to select the output group to view.
2) Use the up and down arrows at any time to move to
a new group. The keypad will display the following
output array information for outputs 1 to 16.
0000000001111111
1234567890123456
NNNNN---TF-----Press  OK or MENU
In the above example screen,
N = Outputs 01 to 05 are Normal (Off )
F = Output 10 has a Fault (Overload)
T = Output 09 is Triggered (On)
4-4
- = Outputs 05 to 08 and Outputs 11 to 16 are
Disabled or Not Available
D O O R A R R AY
This feature allows you to view door status in groups of 16.
From the installer programing mode press MENU 4-0-4 to
access the output array.
Press [OK] or [MENU] when finished.
The following information can be displayed depending
on the current zone status.
L = Door Locked
U = Door Unlocked
O = Override
- = Disabled or Not Available
0000000001111111
1234567890123456
LLLLL---UUUUO--Press  OK or MENU
In the above example screen,
L = Doors 01 to 05 are Locked
O = Door 13 has a Override condition
U = Doors 09 to 12 area Unlocked
- = Doors 06 to 08 and Doors 14 to 16 are Disabled or
Not Available
T E S T I N G T H E S YS T E M
You will need to be in programming mode before
accessing the test functions listed below.
Walk Test
Use the walk test command MENU 3-9-0 to test and verify
that all zones work correctly.
External Audible Test
Use MENU 4-9-0 to test and verify that all horn speakers
operate. This test will sound the horn speaker for two
seconds.
Internal Audible Test
Use MENU 4-9-1 to test and verify that all 12 VDC sirens
operate. This test will sound the siren for two seconds.
Strobe Test
Use MENU 4-9-2 to test and verify that the strobe operates.
This test will turn on the strobe until you manually stop
the test.
Battery Test
Use MENU 7-9-1 to test the back-up battery that is
connected to the control panel.
Communication Test
Use MENU 5-9-0 to test the telephone reporting capability
of the control panel. You can also activate a communication
test by holding down the Test / Mail key on the keypad.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Programming Overview
BASIC REPORTING REFERENCE
Zn921 - 928
LAN Isolator 9 - 16
The following table is a shortform point ID listing.
Zn931 - 938
LAN Power Supply 9 - 16
For a complete listing of all the Contact ID and SIA event
reporting information that will be sent by the control
panel you will need to view the base station template
document that is included on the Solution Link CD or
contact your distributor.
Zn951 - 958
Output Expander 9 - 16
Zn971 - 978
Consoles 9 - 16
Point ID Table
Module Description
Ur999
Installer
Ur998
Remote User
Ur997
TimeZone
Ur996
Guard Tour
Ur001 - 995
Ur000
Table 16: Shortform Point ID Listing
Users
Quick Arm
Zn001 - 200
Zones General
Zn201 - 264
Doors 1 - 64 or
Zones 201 - 264
Zn301 - 428
User Keyfob 1-128
Zn429 - 556
User Keyfob 129 - 256
Zn701 - 708
Door Controller 1 - 8
Zn711 - 718
Door Controller 9 - 16
Zn761 - 768
Lift Controller 1 - 8
Zn771 - 778
Lift Controller 9 - 16
Zn781 - 788
Input Expander 1 - 8
Zn791 - 798
Input Expander 9 - 16
Zn801 - 808
Universal Expander 1 - 8
Zn811 - 818
Universal Expander 9 - 16
Zn821 - 828
RF Receiver 1 - 8
Zn831 - 838
LAN Power Supply 1 - 8
Zn841 - 848
Serial Expander 1 - 8
Zn851 - 858
Output Expander 1 - 8
Zn860
GSM Module
Zn861
GSM Input 1
Zn862
GSM Input 2
Zn863
GSM Input 3
Zn864
GSM Input 4
Zn870
Ethernet Module
Zn871
Real Time Clock Module
Zn872
Voice Module
Zn873
Service Keypad
Zn881 - 888
Consoles 1 - 8
Zn891 - 898
Control Panel 1 - 8
Zn911 - 918
LAN Isolator 1 - 8
Zn921 - 928
LAN Isolator 9 - 16
Zn901 - 908
Destination Route 1 - 8
Zn971 - 978
Consoles 9 - 16
Zn901 - 908
Destination Route 1 - 8
Zn911 - 918
LAN Isolator 1 - 8
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
4-5
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Programming Overview
DT M F CO N T R O L F U N C T I O N S
Firmware includes comprehensive DTMF control of
individual areas and outputs with full user PIN and TIMER
GROUP access verification.
DT M F EXA M P L ES
Each example below shows the log on step for clarity. In
practise is only necessary to log on once per DTMF control
session.
Unlike other systems, no additional hardware or modules
are required for DTMF control. To configure the desired
functions see MENU 5-3-5 DTMF Options.
To turn Area 1 ON enter the following
[2] [5] [8] [0] [#] = Log ON
[1] + [1] + [#] + [1] = Arm Area 1
To turn Output 10 ON enter the following
[2] [5] [8] [0] [#] = Log ON
How to Use DTMF Control
1) Once the panel answers the incoming call, if either
option 1, 2, 3 or 4 in MENU 5-3-5 is enabled, then
the panel will play a short welcome jingle. You now
have approximately 5 seconds to enter a valid PIN
and log onto the panel.
2) Enter PIN followed by the [#] key. If the PIN is valid
the system will respond with two short beeps. If the
PIN is invalid then a single long beep will be heard.
If a valid PIN is not entered in time, the panel will attempt
to establish a modem connection as if connecting to the
Solution Link software.
If this happens you will need to hang up for approximately
60 seconds before trying again.
3) Once validated, the following commands can be
performed. See the table below. If no keys are
pressed for 20 seconds then the panel will play the
exit jingle before terminating the session and
hanging up. Pressing [#][#] at any time while
connected will cause the panel to terminate the
session.
[2] + [1] [0] + [#] + [1] = Turn Output 10 ON
To turn Output 12 OFF enter the following
[2] [5] [8] [0] [#] = Log ON
[2] + [1] [2] + [#] + [2] = Turn Output 12 OFF
If the DTMF Quick Arm option is enabled
then it is possible to remotely arm all
Note areas
without logging onto the panel.
Simply enter [0] + [#] following the welcome jingle.
i
Make sure that the phone being used to remotely
control the panel is set to transmit DTMF tones
when keys are pressed during the call. This option is
disabled by default on some phones.
DTMF CONTROL FUNC TIONS
Operation
Command
Tone
Response
Quick Arm
All Areas
[0] + [#]
High,
Medium,
Low
Log In
OK
[PIN] + [#]
Low, High
Error
Incorrect Entry
Long Beep
Turn Area
ON
[1] + [Area No] + [#] + [1]
Low, High
Turn Area
OFF
[1] + [Area No] + [#] + [2] + [#]
High, Low
Turn Output
ON
[2] + [Output No] + [#] + [1] + [#]
Low, High
Turn Output
OFF
[2] + [Output No] + [#] + [2] + [#]
High, Low
End
Session
[#] + [#]
High,
Medium,
Low
Table 17: DTMF Remote Control Functions
4-6
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Programming Overview
M E N U R E F E R E N C E TA B L E
The control panel includes a simple text menu system which makes all levels of programming extremely easy. Once
a valid PIN has been entered followed by the MENU key, the system will automatically determine which menus and
options the PIN holder has access to and only those items will be displayed.
There are four basic grouping levels used. Throughout the manual, symbols have been placed near each menu option
so that you can easily relate the authority level which is required to access them.
 = All (No PIN Required)
U =  = User PIN Has Access
M =  = Master PIN Has Access
I =  = Installer PIN Has Access
A=
The following table lists all programming menus and the authority level required to access them.
UMI
UMI
UMI
UMI
AUMI
UMI
AUMI
AUMI
UMI
MI
UMI
UMI
MI
MI
MI
UMI
UMI
UMI
I
UMI
0
Commands
2-0-1
2-0-2
2-0-3
2-0-4
2-0-5
1-1-0
3-0-0
4-0-0
4-0-1
7-1-0
3-0-5
3-9-0
4-9-0
4-9-1
4-9-2
5-0-1
7-9-1
5-9-0
7-0-8
Turn Area On/Off
Turn All Areas On
Turn All Areas Off
Move To Area
Chime On/Off
Change Own PIN
Zone Status
Output Status
Turn Output On/Off
Set Date And Time
Smoke Sensor Reset
Walk Test All Zones
External Siren Test
Internal Siren Test
Strobe Test
Call/Answer RAS
Battery Test
Test Dialler
Service Mode
About
1
MI
Access
1-0
Commands
1-0-0 Erase User
UMI
MI
MI
MI
I
1-1
1-1-0
1-1-1
1-1-2
1-1-3
1-1-4
PIN Codes
Change Own PIN
Change Other PIN
Add PIN
Delete PIN
View PIN
MI
MI
MI
MI
1-2
1-2-0
1-2-1
1-2-2
1-2-3
Token
Add Token
Delete Token
Token Status
Edit Token
MI
MI
I
1-3
1-3-0
1-3-1
1-3-2
RF Keyfob
Add Keyfob
Delete Keyfob
Test Keyfob
MI
MI
MI
MI
MI
MI
1-4
1-4-0
1-4-1
1-4-2
1-4-4
1-4-5
1-4-6
User Properties
User Name
Area Assignment
User Options
TimeZone Access
Door Assignment
User Expire Date
I
I
I
1-5
1-5-0
1-5-1
1-5-2
Global Properties
PIN Length
PIN Retry Count
Installer PIN
I
I
1-6
Reporting
1-6-0 Access Route
1-6-1 Access Options
MI
MI
MI
1-8
1-8-0
1-8-1
1-8-2
Fingerprint
Add Fingerprint
Delete Fingerprint
Fingerprint Status
2
Areas
AUMI
UMI
UMI
UMI
UMI
AUMI
MI
2-0
2-0-0
2-0-1
2-0-2
2-0-3
2-0-4
2-0-5
2-0-6
Commands
Area Status
Turn Area On/Off
Turn All Areas On
Turn All Areas Off
Move To Area
Chime On/Off
Chime Mode
MI
I
I
I
I
I
MI
MI
MI
2-1
2-1-0
2-1-1
2-1-2
2-1-3
2-1-4
2-1-5
2-1-6
2-1-7
2-1-8
Area Properties
Area Name
General Options
Input Options
Output Options
Reporting Options
Strobe Trigger
Part Mode 1 Name
Part Mode 2 Name
Auto Arming
I
I
I
2-2
2-2-0
2-2-1
2-2-2
Reporting
Account Dest 1
Account Dest 2
Open Close Route
MI
MI
MI
MI
I
I
2-8
2-8-0
2-8-1
2-8-2
2-8-3
2-8-4
2-8-6
Timers
Exit Time
Entry Time 1
Entry Time 2
Part Entry Time
Auto Arm Pre Alert
Senior Watch Time
I
I
I
I
2-9
2-9-0
2-9-1
2-9-2
2-9-3
Area Testing
Area Watch
User Test Interval
Service Interval
Test Options
Table 18: Menu Reference Table
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
4-7
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Programming Overview
3
Inputs
AUMI
MI
UMI
MI
MI
UMI
3-0
3-0-0
3-0-1
3-0-2
3-0-3
3-0-4
3-0-5
Commands
Zone Status
Zone Array
Bypass Zones
Set Chime Zones
Set Part 2 Zones
Smoke Sensor Reset
MI
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3-1
3-1-0
3-1-1
3-1-2
3-1-3
3-1-4
3-1-5
3-1-6
3-1-7
3-1-8
Zone Properties
Zone Name
Zone Type
Area Assignment
Pulse Count
Pulse Count Time
Door Assignment
Report Route
Report Options
Zone Options
I
I
I
3-3
3-3-0
3-3-1
3-3-2
RF Zone
Add RF Device
Delete RF Device
Test RF Device
I
I
I
3-4
3-4-0
3-4-1
3-4-2
Global Input Options
EOL Value
Keyswitch Options
Input Options
I
3-5
PGM Input
3-5-0 Input Type
I
3-6
Tamper Inputs
3-6-0 Tamper Options
3-9
Input Testing
UMI 3-9-0 Walk Test All Zones
UMI 3-9-1 Walk Test A Zone
I
3-9-2 Sensor Watch Time
4-8
4
Outputs
AUMI
UMI
MI
MI
MI
MI
4-0
4-0-0
4-0-1
4-0-2
4-0-3
4-0-4
4-0-5
Commands
Output Status
Turn Output On/Off
Output Array
Door Status
Door Array
Door Override
MI
I
I
I
I
I
4-1
4-1-0
4-1-1
4-1-2
4-1-3
4-1-4
4-1-5
Properties
Output Name
Event Type
Event Assignment
Output Polarity
Time Parameter
Output Options
MI
I
I
4-2
4-2-0
4-2-2
4-2-3
Door Properties
Door Name
Unlock TimeZone
Door Options
MI
MI
MI
MI
4-9
4-9-0
4-9-1
4-9-2
4-9-3
Output Testing
External Siren Test
Internal Siren Test
Strobe Test
Fire Siren Test
5
Comms
UMI
MI
MI
MI
MI
MI
MI
I
5-0
5-0-1
5-0-2
5-0-3
5-0-4
5-0-5
5-0-6
5-0-8
5-0-9
Commands
Call /Answer RAS
Call Forward On/Off
Check Web Email
Email System Log
Start Direct Link
Voice Setup
Register Customer
Register Installer
I
MI
MI
MI
MI
5-1
5-1-0
5-1-1
5-1-2
5-1-6
5-1-7
Telephone Numbers
Number Prefix
Destination 1
Destination 2
Call Forward On
Call Forward Off
I
I
I
I
I
5-2
5-2-0
5-2-1
5-2-2
5-2-3
5-2-7
Properties
Call Attempt Count
Dialler Options
Phone Line Options
Country
Set SMS Password
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5-3
5-3-0
5-3-1
5-3-2
5-3-3
5-3-4
5-3-5
5-3-6
5-3-7
5-3-8
Remote Access
Call Back Number
RAS Security PIN
Log Threshold
Ring Count
RAS Options
DTMF Options
Voice Access Code
CLI Numbers
User RAS PIN
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5-4
5-4-0
5-4-1
5-4-2
5-4-3
5-4-4
5-4-5
5-4-6
5-4-7
Reporting
TX Format Dest 1
TX Format Dest 2
Test Route
System Route
Emergency Route
Swinger Dialler
Burg Report Delay
Fire Report Delay
I
I
I
I
MI
MI
5-5
5-5-0
5-5-1
5-5-2
5-5-7
5-5-8
5-5-9
MyAlarm
IP Address
IP Port
MyAlarm Options
Gateway Numbers
Email Address
Email Options
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Programming Overview
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5-6
5-6-0
5-6-1
5-6-2
5-6-3
5-6-4
5-6-5
5-6-6
5-6-7
5-6-8
5-6-9
IP Reporting
Receiver IP
Receiver Port
Poll Rate
ACK Wait Time
IP Format
Retry Count
Encryption Key
Conettix NNC
SIA IP Prefix
User Name/Password
MI
MI
I
I
I
I
5-7
5-7-0
5-7-1
5-7-2
5-7-3
5-7-5
5-7-6
IP Remote Access
IP Address
IP Port
IP RAS Options
RAS Lockout Time
IPRS Address
IPRS Port
5-9
UMI 5-9-0
I
5-9-1
I
5-9-2
I
5-9-3
I
5-9-4
I
5-9-5
Comms Test
Send Test Report
Test Report Time
Test Report Period
Test Report Options
Test Route
Dial Number Test
6
Devices
UMI
I
I
I
MI
MI
MI
6-0
6-0-0
6-0-1
6-0-2
6-0-3
6-0-7
6-0-8
6-0-9
Commands
Device Status
LAN Secure
LAN Scan
LAN Watch
Keypad Volume
Keypad Contrast
Keypad Backlight
MI
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
6-1
6-1-0
6-1-2
6-1-3
6-1-4
6-1-5
6-1-6
6-1-7
6-1-8
Keypads & Readers
Name
Area Options
Home Area
General Options
Indicator Options
Emergency Keys
Door Assignment
Lockout Time
I
I
I
I
I
I
6-2
6-2-0
6-2-1
6-2-2
6-2-3
6-2-4
6-2-5
RF Devices
Receiver Options
Supervision Time
RF Device Options
Add RF Keypad
Delete RF Keypad
View RF Device ID
I
I
I
6-3
6-3-0
6-3-1
6-3-2
Serial Device
Device Type
Baud Rate
Flow Control
MI
I
MI
MI
MI
6-5
6-5-0
6-5-1
6-5-5
6-5-6
6-5-7
GSM/GPRS
GSM/GPRS Status
GSM/GPRS Options
CLI Trigger Table 1
CLI Trigger Table 2
SMS Control
I
I
I
I
I
6-6
6-6-0
6-6-1
6-6-2
6-6-3
6-6-9
Ethernet Module
Module IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
Module MAC Address
Ethernet Options
7
System
UMI
UMI
UMI
I
I
I
MI
I
7-0
7-0-0
7-0-1
7-0-2
7-0-3
7-0-4
7-0-5
7-0-6
7-0-8
Commands
Panel Status
System Trouble
History Log
Domestic Default
Factory Default
Template Default
TimeZone Array
Service Mode
MI
I
I
I
7-1
7-1-0
7-1-1
7-1-2
7-1-3
Clock
Set Date And Time
Summertime On
Summertime Off
Locale
I
I
I
7-3
7-3-0
7-3-1
7-3-2
Power
AC Options
Battery Options
Fuse Options
I
I
MI
I
7-4
7-4-0
7-4-1
7-4-2
7-4-3
Siren
Tone
Speed
Volume
Siren Swinger
MI
MI
MI
MI
7-5
7-5-0
7-5-1
7-5-2
7-5-3
TimeZones
Name
Time
Day
TimeZone Options
MI
MI
7-6
Holidays
7-6-0 Holiday Name
7-6-1 Start Stop Dates
I
I
I
MI
I
I
MI
7-7
7-7-0
7-7-1
7-7-2
7-7-3
7-7-4
7-7-5
7-7-7
System Options
General Options
Area Options
Keypad Idle Screen
Keypad Hi/Lo Temp
Installer Options
Language
Site Name
7-9
System Testing
UMI 7-9-0 Walk Test All Zones
UMI 7-9-1 Battery Test
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
4-9
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Programming Overview
B A S I C S YS T E M O P E R AT I O N
TURNING AN AREA ALL ON
Use this function to turn an area All On. The control panel
is factory default only for one area. As soon as you turn
an area on, exit time will start. Exit time allows you to exit
the premises without sounding an alarm. The security
installer or a master PIN user can program the length of
exit delay time.
1) Make sure that all zones are normal (not faulted).
2) Enter your PIN, then press the [ON] key. If your PIN
is valid and if all zones are normal, exit delay time will
start. You should leave now. If your control panel
detects a faulted zone, you should return it to
normal, or bypass the zone. During exit delay, you
may stop the area from turning on by entering your
PIN followed by the [OFF] key.
T U R N I N G A N A R E A PA R T O N / PA R T 2 O N
Use this function to turn an area Part On or Part 2 On. The
control panel is factory default only for one area. Part On
and Part 2 On turns on only part of the area, leaving the
rest of the area turned off.
Only the security company can program which zones are
monitored for Part On. A master user can program which
zones are monitored when a user turns an area Part 2 On.
Once you have turned an area Part On or Part 2 On,
exit delay time starts to count down. You should leave
all zones that are active before exit delay time expires.
Leaving active zones after exit delay expires causes an
alarm event. Use Part On or Part 2 On only when you want
part of an area turned on.
1) Make sure that all zones are normal (not faulted).
2) Enter your PIN, then press the [PART] key. If your
PIN is valid and if all zones are normal, the keypad
will prompt you to select Part On or Part 2 On.
3) Using the arrow keys, highlight Part On or Part 2
On then press [OK]. Exit delay time will start. You
should leave now. If your system has a faulted zone,
you should return it to normal, or bypass the faulted
zone. During exit delay, you may stop the system
from turning Part On by entering your PIN followed
by the [OFF] key.
4) When exit time has expired, the keypad will display
the Part On icon.
If you wish to cancel the exit delay time when turning
the area Part On/Part 2 On, press the [PART] key once
Note during the exit delay time.
i
4-10
TURNING AN AREA OFF
When the system is on, you must enter through a
designated entry door to prevent an alarm. Opening
a designated door (e.g. front door) will start entry time.
During entry time, the keypad will sound the Hi/Lo tone to
remind you to turn the area off. To turn the area off, enter
your PIN followed by the [OFF] key before the entry delay
time expires.
If you enter through the wrong door or fail to turn the
system off before the entry delay time expires, you may
sound an alarm. If an alarm occurs, silence the alarm
(by entering your PIN followed by the [OFF] key) and call
your security company to let them know that it is not an
emergency situation.
1) Enter your PIN + [OFF] to turn the system (or area)
off. The keypad will no longer display the ‘Lock’ or
‘Part’ icons.
SILENCING ALARMS
When the control panel has registered an alarm, the
keypad (s) and sirens will sound to alert personnel that an
alarm occurred. The keypad will scroll all alarms on the
keypad display for visual feedback. If you enter your PIN
before the system dials your security company, the alarm
report is cancelled (if programmed).
1) Enter your PIN + [OFF] to silence any alarm and turn
the system off. The keypad will continue to scroll all
alarm events that caused the alarm. This is called
alarm memory.
2) To clear alarm memory, turn the area on and off
again (eg. PIN + [ON] + PIN + [OFF]).
AU TO M AT I C A R M I N G
Your system may have been programmed to automatically
turn one or more areas All On at a certain time of the day.
If for some reason you are still in the building when the
auto arming is taking place, it is possible to delay the
auto-on time (automatic arming time) by one hour simply
by entering your PIN during the auto-on pre-alert time.
The auto-on pre-alert time sounds the keypad buzzer to
warn you that the system will automatically turn All On.
Example:
If the control panel is programmed by your installer to
automatically turn All On at 6:00pm and the auto-on prealert time starts beeping the keypad at 5:55pm, entering
your PIN between 5:55pm and 6:00pm will delay the autoon time by one hour and the auto-on pre-alert time will
again commence at 6:55pm. Therefore the system will
automatically turn All On at 7:00pm.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Programming Overview
R E M OT E A R M I N G - Q U I C K A R M
If you forget to turn your system on, it may be possible for
you to remotely turn on your system using a touch tone
telephone if the remote arm option has been enabled by
your installer.
To remotely turn on your system, call the telephone
number that the control panel is connected to. When the
control panel answers the call, you will here 3 beeps in
accending frequency if the control panel is disarmed. To
turn on your control panel, press [0] + [#] on your touch
tone telephone. You will hear 3 beeps in decending order
when the panel arms.
All areas on the system will be turned All On regardless of
there condition when using the DTMF quick arm function.
DURESS OR SILENT ALARMS
A duress emergency alarm can be easily initiated via the
keypad if you are being forced to operate the system
against your will.
To initiate a duress emergency, enter your normal user PIN
followed by the last 2 digits of your PIN followed by the
ON or OFF key. See the following examples.
1) If your PIN is 2580, to send a duress report when
the area is off, enter, [2] [5] [8] [0] + [8] [0] + [OK] or
[ON].
2) If your PIN is 2580, to send a duress report when
the area is on, enter, [2] [5] [8] [0] + [8] [0] + [OFF].
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
4-11
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Programming Overview
4-12
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI

S EC TIO N 5
Access Programming
T
he control panel has a total of 255 users that can
operate the system using a PIN, token, RF Keyfob
or fingerprint. A maximum of 16 LAN devices which
comprise of keypads that have built-in prox readers, LAN
readers and fingerprint readers can be used to operate
the system.
Each user name can have up to 20 characters to identify the
user within the system and to present a greeting message
when operating the system. User PIN’s can be configured
for 1 to 8 digits or variable where users can have different
pin lengths up to 8 digits long. All users have options
which can be set to control their authority level within the
system, whether they are allowed to bypass zones or send
'open' and 'close' reports see MENU 1-4-2 — User Options.
The installer Ur999 is a special user within the system and
has ultimate privileges which can not be changed. The
Installer PIN can arm or disarm the system and has access
to all menus at all times. This is a very powerful user pin
and should be treated with utmost respect so that it is not
widely known.
TimeZones
Timezones determine the valid operating times and
days and then users which are to be restricted are then
assigned to the timezone.
Door Assignment
A user can be restricted to certain doors within a building
and this is done by assigning the user to one or more
doors. When a user presents their token to a proximity
reader, the user parameters are checked and if the user
has a matching door assignment to the reader door
assignment, then access is granted.
The output used to operate the door strike will also need
to be assigned to the same door number so that it operates
at the same time. To restrict a user from accessing doors
outside specified times, create a timezone and assign the
user timezone to the same timezone.
Example:
Prox reader operating a door.
1) Assign proximity reader 9 to a door 1 to 16, say 4.
TimeZone Access
2) Set an output event type = door and Index = 4.
Users can belong to a timezone that determines whether
or not the user is allowed access to the system. To create
a timezone, you will need to setup a timezone with start
and stop times, including the days of the week and then
set the user to follow that timezone. Each user that you
require to be restricted is then assigned to the timezone
you selected.
3) Assign user to door 4, a user can belong to multiple
doors.
Each timezone have up to 4 different start/stop periods
that can be used to create multiple access times and
holidays can also be linked with timezones.
4) Assign reader to area 0 and disable arm/disarm
options.
5) Present token to reader to access door.
Example:
Prox reader operating door and disarm Area 1.
1) Assign proximity reader 9 to a door 1-16, say 4.
2) Set an output event type = door and index = 4.
Example:
Restricting access to only Monday to Friday 8am to
10pm.
3) Assign user to door assignment 4, a user can
belong to multiple doors.
1) Pick a timezone access number between 2-16, lets
say 5.
5) Present token to reader to disarm, present token
again to release door.
4) Assign reader to area 1, enable disarming option.
2) Setup timezone 5 start time 8am, stop time 10pm,
days MTWTF.
3) Assign each restricted user to timezone access 5.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
5-1
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Access Programming
Example:
Prox reader operating door and arm/disarm Area 1.
1) Assign proximity reader 9 to a door assignment 1 16, say 4.
2) Set an output event type = door and index = 4.
3) Assign user to door 4, a user can belong to multiple
doors.
4) Assign reader to area 1, enable arming/disarming
and badging options.
USER PINS
At factory default, each PIN is set to 4 digits in length.
The default PIN for User 1 (master user) is 2580. Only the
installer can change the PIN length - see MENU 1-5-0 —
PIN Length.
Access > Commands >
Erase User
-
MENU 1-0-0
5) Present token to disarm, present token to release
door, present token 3 times to arm Area 1.
This menu allows the installer or master user, to erase
another user. When a user is erased, it will return back to
factory default all information relating to the following:
U S E R D E FAU LT TA B L E
™™ PIN
Parameter
Add PIN
Name
Area Assignment
User Options
Master User
Reserved
Arm Only
Can Bypass
Auto Bypass Allowed
Always Report Op/Cl
Reserved
Reserved
TimeZone Access
Door Assignment
User 1
2580
User 1
1
User 2 - 255
™™ Token ID
™™ RF Keyfob ID
User 2 - 255
1
Y
™™ Fingerprint ID
™™ Name
™™ TimeZone Access
™™ Door Assignment
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Table 19: User Default Programming Options
™™ Area Assignment
1) Enter [MENU] + [1] + [0] + [0].
2) Use the arrow keys to highlight the user to be
erased then press [OK].
Ur1 John Smith
Ur2 Debbie Smith
Ur3 User 3 Name
Press  OK or MENU
3) Verify the user name to be erased and press [OK].
To abort press [MENU].
To erase Ur1
John Smith
press OK.
Press OK or MENU
5-2
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Access Programming
Access > PIN Codes >
Change Own PIN
--
MENU 1-1-0
2) Enter the new PIN, then press [OK]. If the error
message ‘PIN Not Allowed’ is displayed, press [OK]
and try a different PIN.
This menu allows a user to change their own PIN. The new
PIN should have the same number of digits as the old PIN,
unless the installer has programmed the PIN length as
variable. See MENU 1-5-0 - PIN length.
1) Enter [MENU] + [1] + [1] + [0]. The keypad will
prompt you to enter a new PIN.
Enter New PIN For Ur2
Debbie Smith
Press OK or MENU
2) Enter the new PIN, then press [OK]. If the error
message ‘PIN Not Allowed’ is displayed, press [OK]
and try a different PIN.
Enter PIN For
Debbie Smith
Ur3
Press OK or MENU
If you attempt to enter a new PIN that has already
been programmed for another user, the system
Note will display ‘PIN Not Allowed’. The next time the
original PIN holder disarms the system they will
be notified that their PIN has been compromised.
The compromised PIN message will continue to be
displayed until one of the users that have the same
PIN changes their PIN to be different.
i
3) The keypad will now prompt you to confirm the
new PIN again.
Confirm New PIN Ur2
Debbie Smith
••••
Press OK or MENU
If you attempt to enter a new PIN that has already
been programmed for another user, the system
Note will display ‘PIN Not Allowed’. The next time the
original PIN holder disarms the system they will
be notified that their PIN has been compromised.
The compromised PIN message will continue to be
displayed until one of the users that have the same
PIN changes their PIN to be different.
i
Access > PIN Codes >
Change Other PIN
-
MENU 1-1-1
This menu allows the Installer or master user to change
the PIN of other user’s. The master user can only change
PINs for other users in the same area.
The new PIN should have the same number of digits as
the old PIN, unless the installer has programmed the PIN
length as variable. See MENU 1-5-0 - PIN length.
1) Enter [MENU] + [1] + [1] + [1] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the user in the list then
press [OK]. The system will only list users that can
be changed.
Ur1 John Smith
Ur2 Debbie Smith
Ur3 User 3 Name
Press  OK or MENU
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
5-3
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Access Programming
Access > PIN Codes >
Add PIN
-
MENU 1-1-2
This menu allows the installer or master users the ability
to add a PIN to another user. A master user can only add a
PIN for users that have been assigned to the same area(s).
1) Press [MENU] + [1] + [1] + [2] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the user in the list then
press [OK]. The system will only list users that can
be added.
Ur2 Debbie Smith
Ur3 User 3 Name
Ur4 User 4 Name
Press  OK or MENU
Access > PIN Codes >
View PIN

MENU 1-1-4
This menu allows the installer to view and verify the PIN
for any user.
1) Press [MENU] + [1] + [1] + [4] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the user in the list, then
press [OK].
Ur1 John Smith
Ur2 Debbie Smith
Ur3 User 3 Name
Press  OK or MENU
2) The keypad will display the current PIN of the user
selected.
2) Enter the new PIN, then press [OK] to save.
View PIN Ur1
Enter New PIN For Ur2
Debbie Smith
2580
Press OK to SAVE
Press OK or MENU
Access > PIN Codes >
Delete PIN
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
-
MENU 1-1-3
This menu allows the installer or master users the ability to
delete another users PIN. A master user can only delete a
PIN for users that have been assigned to the same area(s).
The installer and master user cannot delete their own PIN.
1) Press [MENU] + [1] + [1] + [3] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the user in the list then
press [OK]. The system will only list users that can
be deleted.
Ur1 John Smith
Ur2 Debbie Smith
Ur3 User 3 Name
Press  OK or MENU
2) Press [OK] to delete the PIN or press [MENU] to
cancel.
Press OK To Delete PIN
For Ur2
Debbie Smith
Press OK or MENU
U S E R TO K E N S
This section outlines how to add and delete tokens. Users
1 to 255 can have a token assigned. Tokens provide an
alternate method for users to turn the system on and off
or to operate a door strike.
A token is a plastic card that has a unique ID number. Each
user can be assigned a PIN as well as a token for greater
flexibility.
A token can be presented to a keypad with a built in
reader or to an external LAN reader module to operate the
system. Tokens will follow all user settings.
Access > Token >
Add Token
-
MENU 1-2-0
This menu allows the installer or master user to assign a
token ID to each user. Only one token can be assigned to
each user. To change a token for an existing user you will
need to first delete the old token before you add the new
one. See MENU 1-2-1 — Delete Token
1) Enter [MENU] + [1] + [2] + [0] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the user in the list then
press [OK]. The keypad will only list users that dont
already have tokens assigned.
Ur1 John Smith
Ur2 Debbie Smith
Ur3 User 3 Name
Press  OK or MENU
5-4
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Access Programming
2) Swipe the token card past the reader. As you swipe
the token, the reader will sound a single beep to
confirm that the token has been learnt.
Token belongs to Ur2
Debbie Smith
Press OK or MENU
To add token for Ur1
John Smith present new
token
Press OK or MENU
3) To exit, press [OK] or [MENU].
If the Add Token command is initiated from a keypad
that does not have a built in reader, you will need to
Note select a reader from the list before proceeding. Swipe
the Token at the selected reader.
i
Access > Token >
Delete Token
-
MENU 1-2-1
This menu allows the installer or master user to delete an
existing user’s token ID.
1) Enter [MENU] + [1] + [2] + [1] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the user in the list then
press [OK]. The keypad will only display users that
have tokens assigned to them.
Ur1 John Smith
Ur2 Debbie Smith
Ur3 User 3 Name
Press  OK or MENU
Access > Token >
Edit Token
-
MENU 1-2-3
This menu allows the installer or master user to view or
change the token ID for any user.
1) Press [MENU] + [1] + [2] + [3] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the user in the list, then
press [OK].
Ur1 John Smith
Ur2 Debbie Smith
Ur3 User 3 Name
Press  OK or MENU
2) The keypad will display the current token ID of the
user selected.
Edit Token Ur1
0000000000
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Press [OK] to delete the token or press [MENU] to
exit without saving.
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Press OK to Delete Token
For Ur1
John Smith
Press OK or MENU
Access > Token >
Token Status
-
MENU 1-2-2
This menu allows the installer or master user to identify
which user a token has been assigned to. You will need to
have the token in order to do the test. This menu can only
be performed at a prox keypad.
1) Enter [MENU] + [1] + [2] + [2]. The keypad will
prompt you to swipe the token to be checked.
Present Token to be
Identified
Press OK or MENU
2) Present the token to the keypad, you will hear a
confirmation beep and the display will show the
token status.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
5-5
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Access Programming
RF KEYFOBS
This section outlines how to add and delete RF keyfobs.
RF keyfobs provide an alternate method for users to turn
the system on and off. Each user can have one RF keyfob
assigned.
The RF keyfob must be compatible with the RF Receiver
that has been programmed in MENU 3-5-0 — Input Type.
Refer to MENU 6-2-2 — RF Device Options to configure
the following preferences for RF keyfobs.
™™ Audible RF Keyfob Panic,
™™ Report RF Keyfob Panic and
Ur1 John Smith
Ur2 Debbie Smith
Ur3 Mary Smith
Press  OK or MENU
2) Press [OK] to delete the RF Keyfob ID number and
exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
Press OK To Delete
Keyfob For Ur1
009553507
Press OK or MENU
.
™™ RF Keyfob ‘Part On’ Arming Allowed.
Access > RF Keyfob >
Test Keyfob
RF keyfobs will follow all user settings.
Access > RF Keyfob >
Add Keyfob
-
MENU 1-3-0
This menu allows the installer or a master user to assign an
RF keyfob to a user. Only users 001 to 128 can have an RF
keyfob assigned if required.
1) Enter [MENU] + [1] + [3] + [0] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the user in the list then
press [OK]. The keypad will only list users that dont
already have an RF Keyfob assigned.
Ur1 John Smith
Ur2 Debbie Smith
Ur3 User 3 Name
Press  OK or MENU

MENU 1-3-2
This menu allows the installer to test the RF keyfob
operation. Key the transmitter a number of times and the
display will show the number of transmissions received
and a signal level of Good, Poor, Relocate or Average.
1) Enter [MENU] + [1] + [3] + [2] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the user in the list then
press [OK]. The keypad will only list users that
have an RF Keyfob assigned.
Ur1 John Smith
Ur2 Debbie Smith
Ur3 User 3 Name
Press  OK or MENU
2) Press any key on the transmitter you wish to test.
2) Enter the RF Keyfob ID number, or transmit the
keyfob ID by pressing a button on the keyfob.
Ur2 Debbie Smith
Waiting for Trigger!
Press OK or MENU
Enter Keyfob ID Ur2
Debbie Smith
000000000
Press OK or MENU
If the system receives the signal the following screen
will appear.
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Access > RF Keyfob >
Delete Keyfob
-
MENU 1-3-1
Ur2 Debbie Smith
Transmissions = 001
Signal = Average
Press OK or MENU
3) Repeat step 2 as required and then press [OK] to
exit.
This menu allows the installer or a master user to delete an
RF Keyfob ID that has been assigned to a user.
1) Enter [MENU] + [1] + [3] + [1] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the user in the list then
press [OK]. The keypad will only list users that have
an RF Keyfob assigned.
5-6
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Access Programming
USER PROPERTIES
This section outlines user properties including User Name,
Area Assignment, User Options, TimeZone Access, Door
Assignment, and Expire Date.
Access > User Properties >
User Name
U s e r
1
-
MENU 1-4-0
N a m e
This menu allows the installer or a master user to program
the user’s name (max of 20 characters). This name is used
for system greetings, reporting and log entries to identify
the user by name.
1) Enter [MENU] + [1] + [4] + [0] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the user in the list then
press [OK].
Ur1 User 1 Name
Ur2 User 2 Name
Ur3 User 3 Name
Press  OK or MENU
2) Use the arrow and number keys to move and
change text. When the user name is complete,
press [OK]. At any time you can press the [OFF] key
to clear the text from the current cursor position to
the end of the line.
Access > User Properties >
Area Assignment
-
MENU 1-4-1
1
Security System
Y
2
Area 2 Name
N
3
Area 3 Name
N
4
Area 4 Name
N
5
Area 5 Name
N
6
Area 6 Name
N
7
Area 7 Name
N
8
Area 8 Name
N
This menu allows the installer or master user to program
which areas (1 to 8) other users can access. Each user can
be assigned to one or multiple areas.
The master user can only assign other users to any one
or multiple areas that the master user itself has been
assigned to. At factory default, each user is assigned to
operate Area 1.
1) Enter [MENU] + [1] + [4] + [1] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the user in the list then
press [OK].
Ur1 John Smith
Ur2 Debbie Smith
Ur3 User 3 Name
Press  OK or MENU
User Name Ur1
User 1 Name
Press 
OK to SAVE
See Alpha Text Programming in Section 4 —
Programming Overview for further detail on entering
Note alpha text.
i
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
 Security System
Area 2 Name
Area 3 Name
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
3) Repeat Step 2 until you have assigned the user to
all required areas, then press [OK] to save and exit,
or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
5-7
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Access Programming
Access > User Properties >
User Options
-
MENU 1-4-2
Always Report Op/Cl
Setting this option will cause the system to send opening
and closing reports when the user arms and disarms an
area.
1
Master User
Y
2
Reserved
N
3
Arm Only
N
U N D E R S TA N D I N G T I M E ZO N E S
4
Can Bypass
Y
5
Auto Bypass Allowed
Y
Timezones can be used to restrict users from operating
doors outside given times.
6
Always Report Op/Cl
Y
7
Reserved
N
8
Reserved
N
The above options can only be programmed by the
installer and are programmable per user.
1) Enter [MENU] + [1] + [4] + [2] and select the user
from the list then press [OK].
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
 Master User
Reserved
Arm Only
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Master User
Setting this option assigns the user to a master user.
Master users have access to additional menus that
ordinary users do not have. See the Menu Referrence
Table in Section 4 for a list of available Master User
commands.
Arm Only
Setting this option restricts the user to only turn an area
on. The PIN has no access to turn an area off or reset an
alarm.
To do this, you need to create a timezone. Each timezone
includes a maximum or 4 different time periods. Each
time period can be set to different days of the week
(including holidays). Then assign one or more user’s to
the timezone to specify the access period, day of the week
and holidays. This now restricts the user from accessing
the system outside the nominated times and days within
the timezone.
User
Can only belong to 1 timezone.
TimeZones
Only one timezone can be linked to each user.
TimeZone Access Example
1) To set up timezone access, you need to select an
unused timezone from 1 to 16, in this example we
will assume timezone access number to be 5.
2) Select timezone 5 and program the times and days
of the week.
3) Then under the user timezone access properties,
assign all users who you wish to restrict to
timezone access 5. Remember that you are only
able to assign a user to one timezone.
A master code holder is able to change the timezones
so they can change the access times for a given user. If
a user tries to operate the system outside their assigned
timezone periods, then access will be denied.
Can Bypass
Setting this option allows the user to manually bypass
and un-bypass zones.
Auto Bypass Allowed
Setting this option allows the user to turn an area on
when one or more zones are still faulted or open. Upon
arming, the area, the keypad will prompt the user to
automatically bypass each faulted zone by pressing the
[OK] key.
To prevent users from being able to force arm an area
you will need to disable this option.
5-8
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Access Programming
Access > User Properties >
TimeZone Access
-
MENU 1-4-4
0
00 - Disabled
01 - 24 Hour TimeZone
02 - TimeZone 2 Name
03 - TimeZone 3 Name
04 - TimeZone 4 Name
05 - TimeZone 5 Name
06 - TimeZone 6 Name
07 - TimeZone 7 Name
08 - TimeZone 8 Name
Access > User Properties >
Door Assignment
-
1
09 - TimeZone 9 Name
10 - TimeZone 10 Name
11 - TimeZone 11 Name
12 - TimeZone 12 Name
13 - TimeZone 13 Name
14 - TimeZone 14 Name
15 - TimeZone 15 Name
16 - TimeZone 16 Name
This menu is used to assign a user to a timezone. Time
zones are used to restrict user access to be within specific
times. Each user can only be assigned to one time zone.
Setting this option to 1 will give the user 24 hour access
to the system.
1) Enter [MENU] + [1] + [4] + [4] and select the user
from the list and press [OK].
MENU 1-4-5
0
0
1
Door 1 Name
N
2
Door 2 Name
N
3
Door 3 Name
N
4
Door 4 Name
N
5
Door 5 Name
N
6
Door 6 Name
N
7
Door 7 Name
N
8
Door 8 Name
N
9
Door 9 Name
N
10 Door 10 Name
N
11 Door 11 Name
N
12 Door 12 Name
N
13 Door 13 Name
N
14 Door 14 Name
N
15 Door 15 Name
N
16 Door 16 Name
N
TimeZone Access Ur1
01 - 24 Hour TimeZone
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Use the arrow and number keys to select the time
zone (00 to 16) that you want the user to follow,
then press [OK] to save and exit.
This menu allows you to assign each user to one or
multiple doors. A door assignment is used to allow and/
or restrict which users have access to various keypads,
readers and outputs.
1) Enter [MENU] + [1] + [4] + [5] and select the user
from the list then press [OK].
Ur1 John Smith
Ur2 Debbie Smith
Ur3 User 3 Name
Press  OK or MENU
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
door assignment, then press the [ON] key to select
or the [OFF] key to deselect.
Door 1
Door 2
Door 3
Press 
Name
Name
Name
OK ON OFF MENU
3) Repeat Step 2 until all required door assignments
are programmed, then press [OK] to save and exit
or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
5-9
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Access Programming
Access > User Properties >
User Expire Date
Access > Global Properties >
-
MENU 1-4-6
By default, the user expire date for each user is set to 1
January 2100 which ensures that each user practially
never expires. If a programmed user expire date is
reached, all user credentials including PIN, fingerprint,
token, RF keyfob etc will be disabled and a log entry made
(eg. Ur003 John Smith User Expired).
A master user cannot be expired and the master user is
allowed to change another user's expire date. To return
the expire date to default, press the [OFF] key to allow the
user to operate indefinitely, or press the [ON] key to set the
date to the current system date, then make the necessary
adjustments to achive the required expired time.
1) Enter [MENU] + [1] + [4] + [6] and select the user
from the list then press [OK].
Ur1 John Smith
Ur2 Debbie Smith
Ur3 User 3 Name
Press  OK or MENU
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to toggle the day,
month and year. Use the left and right keys to
move the cursor between the day month and year.
User Expire Date Ur1
Expire Date
01 Jan
2100
Press  OK to SAVE
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
i
Note
Setting the user option 'Master PIN' for a user will
override the user expire date.
PIN Length

MENU 1-5-0
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
00 - Variable
01 - 1 Digit
02 - 2 Digits
03 - 3 Digits
04 - 4 Digits
05 - 5 Digits
0
4
06 - 6 Digits
07 - 7 Digits
08 - 8 Digits
At factory default, all user PINs are set to be 4 digits long.
This menu allows you to change the length for all PIN
codes.
If you select the variable PIN length option, then you are
free to create PINs with different lengths. For example
User 1 could have a 4 digit PIN number while user 3 can
have an 8 digit PIN number.
Variable PIN lengths are useful for increasing security
levels. Another use would be to program a single digit
PIN to trigger an output. To do this create a user that is
not assigned to an area and then map this to the required
output.
1) Enter [MENU] + [1] + [5] + [0]. The keypad will
display the current PIN length.
PIN Length
04 - 4 Digit Length
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Select the required PIN length using the up and
down arrow keys then press [OK] to save and exit
or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
Access > Global Properties >
PIN Retry Count

MENU 1-5-1
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
0
6
This menu sets how many times an invalid PIN can be
entered before the keypad will be quarantined or locked out.
See MENU 6-1-8 — Keypad Lockout Time to set the lockout
time period.
An access denied report will be sent to the base station
when the keypad is quanrantined. If keypad lockout is not
required set this option to 0.
The PIN retry count is reset every time the corresponding
area is turned All On, Part On or Off.
The PIN retry count is not applicable for invalid tokens
swiped at proximity readers or fingerprints presented at
biometric readers.
1) Enter [MENU] + [1] + [5] + [1]. The keypad will
display the current PIN retry count.
PIN Retry Count
6
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
5-10
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Access Programming
2) Enter the required PIN Retry Count using the up
and down arrow keys then press [OK] to save and
exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving. Valid
entries are 1 - 15 , 0 = Unlimited.
Access > Global Properties >
Installer PIN
1
2

MENU 1-6-1
1
Access Granted
Y
2
Access Denied
Y
MENU 1-5-2
3
Egress Granted
Y

4
Egress Denied
Y
4
A A A A
5
Reserved
N
6
Reserved
N
7
Reserved
N
8
Reserved
N
3
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
This menu sets the Installer PIN. The installer can access
all menu functions and can also disarm one or multiple
areas. The installer PIN canbe up to 8 digits long.
The factory default Installer PIN is 1234.
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option, then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
Installer PIN
 Access Granted
 Access Denied
 Egress Granted
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
1234AAAA
Press  OK to SAVE
2) Enter the new installer PIN, then press [OK] to save
and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.

00 - Log Events Only
01 - Dest 1 + Log
02 - Dest 2 + Log
03 - Dest 1 & 2 + Log
04 - Dest 2 If 1 Fails
The above options are programmable per ???.
1) Enter [MENU] + [1] + [6] + [1] and select the area
from the list then press [OK].
1) Enter [MENU] + [1] + [5] + [2]. The keypad will
display the current Installer PIN.
Access > Reporting >
Access Route
Access > Reporting >
Access Options
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
MENU 1-6-0
0
1
This menu programs the destination for access reports.
Only one option can be programmed in this menu.
1) Enter [MENU] + [1] + [6] + [0] and select the area
from the list then press [OK].
2) Use the numeric keys 0-9 or the up and down arrow
keys to select the desired option.
Access Granted
This option allows the control panel to report 'Access Granted'
events using the destination set in MENU 1-6-0.
Access Denied
This option allows the control panel to report 'Access Denied'
events using the destination set in MENU 1-6-0.
Egress Granted
This option allows the control panel to report 'Egress Granted'
events using the destination set in MENU 1-6-0.
Egress Denied
This option allows the control panel to report ' Egress Denied'
events using the destination set in MENU 1-6-0.
Access Route
00 - Log Events Only
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
5-11
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Access Programming
Access > Fingerprint >
Add Fingerprint
-
MENU 1-8-0
This menu allows the installer or master user to assign a
fingerprint ID to any users. Only one fingerprint can be
assigned to each user. To change a fingerprint for an
existing user you will need to first delete the old fingerprint
before adding the new one.
1) Enter [MENU] + [1] + [8] + [0] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the user in the list then
press [OK]. The system will only list users that dont
already have fingerprint assigned.
2) Present the finger to be fingerprint reader to learn
the user’s ID. As you learn the fingerprint, the
reader will sound a single beep to confirm that the
fingerprint has been learnt.
Press OK to delete
Fingerprint for Ur1
User 1 Name
Press OK or MENU
Access > Fingerprint >
-
Fingerprint Status
Ur1 John Smith
Ur2 Debbie Smith
Ur3 User 3 Name
Press  OK or MENU
MENU 1-8-2
This menu allows the Installer to identify the user ID of the
fingerprint.
2) Select which fingerprint reader that you want to
use to learn the user’s fingerprint.
1) Enter [MENU] + [1] + [8] + [1] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the reader in the list then
press [OK]. The system will only list readers that
have been configured.
Fp6 Keypad 6 Name
Exit
Fp6 Keypad 6 Name
Exit
Press  OK or MENU
Press  OK or MENU
3) Present the finger to be fingerprint reader to learn
the user’s ID. As you learn the fingerprint, the
reader will sound a single beep to confirm that the
fingerprint has been learnt.
2) Present the finger to be fingerprint reader to read
the user’s fingerprint until a single beep has been
heard.
Position Finger at
Fp6
Position Finger for Ur1
John Smith at Fp6
Press OK or MENU
Press OK or MENU
When you add a new fingerprint, it will be
automatically loaded into all biometric readers.
Note Fingerprint readers are ready only once the blue light
is steady.
i
3) The keypad will display the user ID that the
fingerprint has been assigned to.
Finger belongs to Ur1
John Smith
Press OK or MENU
Access > Fingerprint >
Delete Fingerprint
-
MENU 1-8-1
This menu allows the Installer or master user to delete a
user’s fingerprint ID.
» » E N D
O F
S E C T I O N « «
1) Enter [MENU] + [1] + [8] + [1] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the user in the list then
press [OK]. The system will only list users that have
a fingerprint assigned.
Ur1 John Smith
Ur2 Debbie Smith
Ur3 User 3 Name
Press  OK or MENU
5-12
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI

T
he control panel has 8 different areas each with its own
specific programmable options.
Under the commands menu you can interrogate the
status of an area, turn chime mode on/off, move to an area
or arm and disarm a specific area.
The customer account number is programmable for
each individual area as well as input, output and general
options. Each time you are presented with an option that
is area specific, the menu will prompt you to specify the
area first.
Partitioning
The control system can be partitioned into 8 individual
areas. Each area has its own individual properties which
determine how the area operates. The default name for
Area 1 is “Security System” and it can be changed to any
other name using the area properties menu. All zones and
users are assigned to Area 1 so no assigning of users or
zones is required for non partitioned systems by default.
To create an area, assign one or more zones to the area
of your choice. A zone can only belong to one area and
any number of zones can belong to a single area. Each
area operates independently from other areas as if it were
another security panel and there are numerous options
available to tailor just how the entire system should
operate. If you require a common area that automatically
arms when all other areas are armed, and disarms as soon
as any other area is disarmed, then Area 1 can be set as
a common area. To make area 1 a common area, set the
option under MENU 7-7-1 — Area Options.
All keypads connected to the system have the ability to
display the arm/disarm condition of every area at the same
time using the area icons on the display. This is selectable
per keypad under MENU 6-1-5 — Indicator Options.
Once you log onto a keypad using your [PIN] + [OK] the
system knows who you are and will allow you to use
the left arrow key to move from the current area to the
next area that your assigned to. To move areas without
having to enter your PIN select the option under MENU
6-1-2 — Area Options and then simply step through all
the available areas using the arrow keys. Each keypad is
assigned a home area and will automatically revert back
to this area after 60 seconds.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
S EC TIO N 6
Area Programming
The system outputs must be configured to operate for
their corresponding areas. The external siren, internal
siren and strobe outputs are defaulted to output index 0
and will operate for any area.
Example: Simple Two Area System
1) Assign zones to area 1 and area 2
2) Assign the home areas for the keypads.
3) Assign users to areas.
4) Set outputs to operate individually or common for
all areas.
5) Set account number for each area.
6) Set options,
PIN to change areas or just arrow keys.
Which keypads to display area icons.
Reset sirens by any user on any area.
A R E A CO M M A N D S
Areas > Commands >
Area Status
---
MENU 2-0-0
This command allows you to view the condition of any
area in the system. In the following example, Area 1
has the name “Security System” and it is currently in the
disarmed state.
1) Enter [MENU] + [2] + [0] + [0] and select the area to
view and press [OK].
Security System A1
Disarmed
Press OK or MENU
The keypad will display the following states:
Disarmed - when the area is turned off.
Armed All On - when the area has been turned All On.
Armed Partial - when the area has been turned Part On.
Armed Part 2 - when the area has been turned Part 2 On.
6-1
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Area Programming
Areas > Commands >
Turn Area On/Off
--
MENU 2-0-1
This command allows you to turn on or off areas. If an area
has already been turned All On or Part On, a ‘tick’ () will
be displayed on the right side of the area name.
1) Enter [MENU] + [2] + [0] + [1] and select the area
and press [OK] to change the current state.
A1 Security System 
A2 Area 2 Name
A3 Area 3 Name 
Press  OK or MENU
Areas > Commands >
Turn All Areas On
--
MENU 2-0-2
1) Enter [MENU] + [2] + [0] + [2]. The keypad will
display the exit time bar to prompt you to exit all
areas. You should leave all areas now.
When exit time has expired, the keypad will display
that all areas are turned All On (armed).
Area 1 Name
EXIT NOW
MENU 2-0-4
Each keypad on the system can operate any area, however
you can only operate the area which is currently being
displayed. This menu allows you to change the current
keypad view from one area to display another area.
An alternative method for changing the current area
being displayed is to enter your PIN and then press the
left or right arrow keys. Keep pressing the arrow key until
the desired area is displayed. Only areas which have been
assigned to the PIN will be available for view.
1) Enter [MENU] + [2] + [0] + [4] and select the area
from the list and press [OK] to move to the selected
area.
A1 Security System
A2 Area 2 Name
A3 Area 3 Name
Press  OK or MENU
Turn off option - see MENU 6-1-2, PIN To Change Area
and just use the [←] and [→] keys to move through
Note all areas on the system without the need to enter
your PIN.
i
Areas > Commands >
Chime On/Off
The display area icons option is programmable per
keypad. If this option has not been selected then area
Note icons 1 to 8 will not be displayed. See Menu 6-1-5 —
Indicator Options.
i
--
--
If you move to another area, the keypad will automatically
revert back to its assigned home area after 2 minutes. See
MENU 6-1-3 - Home Area.
This command allows you to turn on all areas that your
PIN has been assigned to at the same time. An alternative
method for arming all areas is to enter your PIN then press
and hold the [ON] key for 2 seconds.
Areas > Commands >
Turn All Areas Off
Areas > Commands >
Move To Area
MENU 2-0-3
This command allows you to turn off all areas that your PIN
has been assigned to at the same time. This command
cannot be accessed from a keypad that is in the armed
state. An alternative method for disarming all areas is to
enter your PIN, then press and hold the [OFF] key for 2
seconds.
---
MENU 2-0-5
Chime mode allows you to monitor a zone (or group of
zones) by sounding the keypad buzzer or activating a
programmable output. This can be useful when you need
to monitor the front or back entrance to a premises while
in the disarmed state.
To select which zones will be monitored for chime, see
MENU 3-0-3 — Set Chime Zones.
1) To turn chime mode on or off, enter [MENU] + [2] +
[0] + [5] and select the area from the list then press
[OK].
Security System A1
Chime is OFF.
To turn ON, Press ON.
To Go Back Press OK
1) Enter [MENU] + [2] + [0] + [3] to disarm all areas.
The chime tone will only be heard on keypads
programmed to sound the chime tone. See MENU
Note 6-1-5 — Chime Tone
i
6-2
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Area Programming
Areas > Commands >
Chime Mode
AREA PROPERTIES
-
MENU 2-0-6
The chime mode option allows you to program how
chime zones will operate on an area by area basis. In
latching mode a valid PIN will need to be entered to reset
the chime alarm.
It is possible to stop the chime alarm if the door is left
open for a long period of time or to only trigger the chime
alarm if the door is left open for a period of time.
Available options include;
Chime Always
Chime For 000 Seconds
Chime After 000 Seconds
Chime Latching
1) To set the required chime mode, enter [MENU] + [2]
+ [0] + [6] and select the area from the list then
press [OK].
A1 Security System
A2 Area 2 Name
A3 Area 3 Name
Press  OK or MENU
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to select the
required chime mode. If the chosen type requires a
time parameter use the right arrow to move to the
time field and then use the up and down arrow key
to select the appropriate time. When finished press
[OK].
Chime Mode A1
Chime For 000 Seconds
Press  OK to SAVE
Areas > Area Properties >
Area Name
S e c u r i t y
-
MENU 2-1-0
S y s t e m
This menu allows you to program the name for each
area. Each area name can be programmed with up to 20
characters. At factory default, only Area 1 is used. The
control panel can have a maximum of 8 independent
areas programmed.
1) Enter [MENU] + [2] + [1] + [0] and select the area
from the list and press [OK].
Area Name A1
Security System
Press  OK to SAVE
2) Use the arrow and number keys to move and
change text. When the area name is complete,
press [OK]. At any time you can press the [OFF] key
to clear the text from the current cursor position to
the end of the line.
i
Note
See Alpha Text section in Section 4 - Programming
Overview for further detail on entering alpha text.
Areas > Area Properties >
General Options

MENU 2-1-1
1
Exit Time Restart
N
2
Reset Alarm Memory
N
3
Duress Allowed
Y
4
Fault ACK Required
N
5
One Key Arming
Y
6
One Key Part On
Y
7
Link To Common Area
Y
8
One Key Part Off
N
The above options are programmable per area.
1) Enter [MENU] + [2] + [1] + [1] and select the area
from the list then press [OK].
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option, then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
Exit Time Restart
Reset Alarm Memory
 Duress Allowed
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
6-3
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Area Programming
Exit Time Restart
The exit delay timer will restart (once per arming cycle)
when the same entry/exit delay zone is faulted a second
time during exit delay (eg. If an entry/exit delay zone is
unsealled, restored and unsealled a second time during
exit delay = exit time restart).
Reset Alarm Memory
Clears all alarm memories displayed on the keypad when
a user has turned the corresponding area off. If this
option is not set, alarm memory will continue to display
until the user has turned the corresponding area on
again.
Duress Allowed
If a user is being forced to turn off the security system
under duress, they can disarm the system and initiate a
silent duress alarm.
One Key Part Off
This option allows users to disarm from Part On or Part 2
On, simply by pressing the [OFF] key. This function will
only work if there are no alarms in effect, and the entry
timer is not running.
Areas > Area Properties >
Input Options

MENU 2-1-2
1
Non Sequential
Y
2
Pulse Count H/Over
Y
3
Senior Watch
N
4
Reset Smoke On Arming
Y
5
Reserved
N
6
Reserved
N
7
Reserved
N
8
Reserved
N
To trigger the duress alarm enter your PIN then repeat
the last two digits of your PIN before pressing [ON], [OFF],
or [OK] key.
The above options are programmable per area.
Example:
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
If your PIN is 2580, to send a duress report when the area
is off,
Enter, [2] [5] [8] [0] + [8] [0] + [OK] or [ON].
If your PIN is 2580, to send a duress report when the area
is on,
Enter, [2] [5] [8] [0] + [8] [0] + [OFF].
Fault ACK Required
If this option has been programmed, the control panel
will force a user to acknowledge each trouble condition
even though the trouble condition has already cleared.
If this option is not programmed, any trouble condition
that occurs will not have to be acknowledged if it has
already been rectified or cleared.
One Key Arming
This option allows users to simply press the [ON] key to
turn the area All On. All zones being armed must be
sealed. If open and close reports are programmed, the
user ID number will report as 000.
One Key Part On
This option allows users to simply press the [Part On]
key to turn the area Part On. All zones being armed
must be sealed. If open and close reports for Part On is
programmed, the user ID number will report as 000.
Link To Common Area
This option causes the selected area or areas to control
the common area. If this option is not selected for an
area then it will be able to operate independant of the
common area. See MENU 7-7-1 — Area Options to
enable the common area.
6-4
1) Enter [MENU] + [2] + [1] + [2] and select the area
from the list then press [OK].
 Non Sequential
 Pulse Count H/Over
Senior Watch
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Non Sequential
With non-sequential entry path, you can trigger
handover zones in any order provided that an entry delay
zone was triggered first.
If this option is not programmed, handover zones must
be triggered in numerical sequence provided that an
entry delay zone was triggered first.
If a handover zone is triggered before an entry delay
zone is triggered an instant alarm will occur.
Pulse Count H/Over
This option allows zones from the same area that have
both pulse count and pulse count time programmed the
ability to hand over pulses to other pulse count zones
during their respective pulse count time. Only zones that
have an active pulse count time can accept pulse count
handover from another zone.
Burglary delay zones can only handover pulses to other
burglary delay zones. Burglary instant and/or handover
zones can handover pulses to other burglary instant and/
or handover zones. 24 hour non-fire zone types can only
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Area Programming
handover pulses to other 24 hour non fire zones. A 24hour fire zone can only handover pulses to another 24hour fire zone.
Senior Watch
This option requires at least one burglary zone in the
corresponding area to be faulted and restored during
the senior watch time. If no burglary zone has register
during the senior watch time, the keypad will sound an
alarm.
To warn the user that senior watch time is about to
expire, the keypad will sound the auto arm pre-alert time
(if programmed) prior to sounding the alarm. See MENU
2-8-6 — Senior Watch Time.
This feature is not applicable when the corresponding
area is turned All On.
An output (Output Event Type 51) can be programmed to
operate as follow senior watch if required.
Reset Smoke On Arming
This option when set, will trigger any output that is
programmed as event type 49 - Smoke Sensor GND to
operate on the next arming cycle, therefore resetting the
connected smoke sensors each time the area is armed.
If this option is not set then a manual reset will need to
be performed via MENU 3-0-5.
Areas > Area Properties >
Output Options

MENU 2-1-3
1
SPK Beeps Keyfob
Y
2
SPK Beeps Key/Sw
Y
3
SPK Strobe In Part On
Y
4
Alarm On PIN Retry
Y
5
Alarm Exit Error
N
6
Alarm Key/Sw Tamper
Y
7
Reserved
N
8
Reserved
N
SPK Beeps Keyfob
This option allows audible beeps via the speaker output
to verify to the user that they have successfully turned
the area On or Off using the RF keyfob. The speaker
output will sound one beep for Off (disarm), two beeps
for All On and three beeps for Part On.
SPK Beeps Key/Sw
This option allows audible beeps via the speaker output
to verify to the user that they have successfully turned
the area On or Off using a keyswitch input. The speaker
output will sound one beep for Off (disarm), two beeps
for All On and three beeps for Part On.
SPK Strobe In Part On
This option allows the strobe and audible alarms to
operate when the area is turned Part On or Part 2 On.
Alarm On PIN Retry
When the PIN retry count as programmed in MENU 1-5-1
is reached, an audible alarm will occur.
Alarm Exit Error
This option allows you to sound an alarm when an exit
error occurs.
An exit error occurs when an entry/exit delay zone
becomes unsealed during the exit delay time and
remains unsealed at the end of exit delay time. If this
happens, the entry delay will start. If the area is not
turned off (disarmed) before the entry delay time expires,
an alarm will occur.
Alarm Key/Sw Tamper
This option allows you to sound an alarm when a tamper
condition occurs on a zone programmed as a keyswitch
input. Refer to MENU 3-1-1 — Zone Type for information
on programming zones to be a keyswitch input.
Areas > Area Properties >
Reporting Options

MENU 2-1-4
1
Report PIN Retry
Y
2
Report Exit Error
Y
1) Enter [MENU] + [2] + [1] + [3] and select the area
from the list then press [OK].
3
Smart Lockout
N
4
Reserved
N
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
5
Cancel Report
Y
6
Reserved
N
7
Op/Cl In Part On
N
8
Op/Cl After Alarm
N
The above options are programmable per area.
 SPK
 SPK
 SPK
Press
Beeps Keyfob
Beeps Key/SW
Strobe In Part ON
 OK ON OFF MENU
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
The above options are programmable per area.
1) Enter [MENU] + [2] + [1] + [4] and select the area
from the list then press [OK].
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
6-5
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Area Programming
 Report PIN Retry
 Report Exit Error
Smart Lockout
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
Areas > Area Properties >
Strobe Trigger

MENU 2-1-5
1
Audible Burglary
Y
2
Silent Burglary
N
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
3
Fire Alarm
Y
4
Keyfob On/Off
N
5
Keyswitch On/Off
N
Report PIN Retry
When the PIN retry count as programmed in MENU 1-5-1
is reached, a 'Wrong Code Entry' alarm report will be sent
to the control room.
6
Reserved
N
7
24Hr Alarm
Y
8
Reserved
N
Report Exit Error
This option allows the system to report an 'Exit Error'
alarm report.
An exit error occurs when an entry/exit delay zone
becomes unsealled during exit delay time and remains
unsealled at the end of exit delay time. If this happens,
the entry delay will start. If the area is not turned off
(disarmed) before the entry delay time expires an 'Exit
Error' alarm report will be sent.
Smart Lockout
Smart lockout allows a previously locked zone to
reactivate during the siren run time when a new alarm
event occurs.
Cancel Report
When set, a 'Cancel' report will be sent if a user disarms
the area before the siren timer expires.
Op/Cl In Part On
When set, the panel will send 'Open' or 'Close' reports
when the area has been turned Part On or Part 2 On.
Op/Cl After Alarm
When set, the panel will only send an 'Open' or 'Close'
report after an alarm has occured. This report will be sent
for all users regardless of whether or not they have been
programmed to send open/close reports.
Programming any of these options allow the strobe
output to operate when the corresponding event
occurs. The strobe light must be connected to an output
programmed as a event type 48 for it to operate. See
Section 8 — Output Programming for more information
on output event types.
1) Enter [MENU] + [2] + [1] + [5] and select the area
from the list then press [OK].
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
 Audible Burglary
Silent Burglary
 Fire Alarm
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Audible Burglary
When selected, the panel will activate the strobe output
when an audible burglary zone has triggered an alarm.
Silent Burglary
When selected, the panel will activate the strobe output
when a silent burglary zone has triggered an alarm.
Fire Alarm
When selected, the panel will activate the strobe output
when a zone programmed as fire (audible or silent) has
triggered an alarm.
Keyfob On/Off
When selected, the panel will activate the strobe output
for six seconds when a user turns the area on via an RF
keyfob. This provides silent feedback to the user that the
signal has been received.
6-6
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Area Programming
Keyswitch On/Off
When selected, the panel will activate the strobe
output for six seconds when a user turns the area on
via a keyswitch zone or the programmable input. This
provides silent feedback to the user that the signal has
been received when turning the area on or off.
24Hr Alarm
When selected, the panel will activate the strobe output
when a zone programmed as 24-hour (audible or silent)
has registered an alarm. Zones programmed as 24-Hour
Hold-Up are not included.
Areas > Area Properties >
Part Mode 1 Name
-
P a r t
1
1
A r e a
Areas > Area Properties >
Part Mode 2 Name
-
P a r t
1
2
A r e a
This menu allows you to program the name for each area
when turning the area Part On or Part 2 On. Each area
name can be programmed with up to 20 characters. At
factory default, only Area 1 is used. The control panel can
have a maximum of 8 independent areas programmed.
1) Enter [MENU] + [2] + [1] + [6] and select the area
from the list and press [OK].
Part Mode 2 Name A1
Part 2 Area 1 Name
Press  OK to SAVE
N a m e
1) Enter [MENU] + [2] + [1] + [6] and select the area
from the list and press [OK].
Part Mode 1 Name A1
2) Use the arrow and number keys to move and
change text. When the area name is complete,
press [OK]. At any time you can press the [OFF] key
to clear the text from the current cursor position to
the end of the line.
i
Note
Part 1 Area 1 Name
Press  OK to SAVE
See Alpha Text section in Section 4 - Programming
Overview for further detail on entering alpha text.
Areas > Area Properties >
Auto Arming
2) Use the arrow and number keys to move and
change text. When the area name is complete,
press [OK]. At any time you can press the [OFF] key
to clear the text from the current cursor position to
the end of the line.
Note
N a m e
MENU 2-1-6
This menu allows you to program the name for each area
when turning the area Part On or Part 2 On. Each area
name can be programmed with up to 20 characters. At
factory default, only Area 1 is used. The control panel can
have a maximum of 8 independent areas programmed.
i
MENU 2-1-7
See Alpha Text section in Section 4 - Programming
Overview for further detail on entering alpha text.
-
MENU 2-1-8
0
00 - Disabled
01 - 24 Hour TimeZone
02 - TimeZone 2 Name
03 - TimeZone 3 Name
04 - TimeZone 4 Name
05 - TimeZone 5 Name
06 - TimeZone 6 Name
07 - TimeZone 7 Name
08 - TimeZone 8 Name
0
09 - TimeZone 9 Name
10 - TimeZone 10 Name
11 - TimeZone 11 Name
12 - TimeZone 12 Name
13 - TimeZone 13 Name
14 - TimeZone 14 Name
15 - TimeZone 15 Name
16 - TimeZone 16 Name
This menu allows you to assign which time zone the area
will follow to automatically turn the area All On and/or
off (disarm). Only one time zone can be assigned to each
area.
1) Enter [MENU] + [2] + [1] + [8] and select the area
from the list and press [OK].
Auto Arming A1
00 - Disabled
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Use the arrow and number keys to select the time
zone that you want the area to follow, then press
[OK] to save and exit.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
6-7
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Area Programming
AREA REPORTING
Areas > Reporting >
Open Close Route
Areas > Reporting >
Account Dest 1

0
0
0
0
0
0
MENU 2-2-0
0
0
0
0
The area account number identifies which control panel is
reporting to the security company’s base station receiver.
Each destination can have a different account number
programmed. The number should be entered from left to
right with trailing zeros.
1) Enter [MENU] + [2] + [2] + [0] and select the area
from the list then press [OK].

0
00 - Log Events Only
01 - Dest 1 + Log
02 - Dest 2 + Log
03 - Dest 1 & 2 + Log
04 - Dest 2 If 1 Fails
This menu programs the destination for open and close
reports. Only one option can be programmed in this
menu.
2) Use the numeric keys 0-9 or the up and down arrow
keys to select the desired option.
Account Dest 1 A1
Open Close Route A1
0000000000
Press  OK to SAVE
01 - Dest 1 + Log
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.

0
0
0
0
0
0
MENU 2-2-1
0
0
0
1
1) Enter [MENU] + [2] + [2] + [2] and select the area
from the list then press [OK].
2) Using the numeric keys, enter the new account
number. Use the up and down arrows to select
special characters BCDEF.
Areas > Reporting >
Account Dest 2
MENU 2-2-2
0
The area account number identifies which control panel is
reporting to the security company’s base station receiver.
Each destination can have a different account number
programmed. The number should be entered from left to
right with trailing zeros.
1) Enter [MENU] + [2] + [2] + [1] and select the area
from the list then press [OK].
2) Using the numeric keys, enter the new account
number. Use the up and down arrows to select
special characters BCDEF.
Account Dest 2 A1
0000000000
Press  OK to SAVE
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
AREAS TIMERS
Areas > Timers >
Exit Time
-
MENU 2-8-0
0 6 0
Seconds
This menu allows the installer to set the exit time for each
area. Exit delay time can be programmed between 0 and
255 seconds. The exit time starts when an area is turned
All On or Part On/Part 2 On (armed).
At factory default, when turning an area All On, the
keypad will sound the exit warning tone. When turning
an area Part On or Part 2 On, only a single beep at the end
of exit time will be heard. See MENU 6-1-5 to allow the
exit warning tone to be heard when turning an area Part
On or Part 2 On.
1) Press [MENU] + [2] + [8] + [0]. The keypad will
display a list of areas.
A1 Security System
A2 Area 2 Name
A3 Area 3 Name
Press  OK or MENU
2) Highlight the area required to change, then press
[OK] to select. The keypad will display the current
exit time set for the area selected.
6-8
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Area Programming
Exit Time A1
Areas > Timers >
Entry Time 2
060 Seconds
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
-
0 4 0
Seconds
3) Using the numeric keys, enter the required entry
time in seconds. Valid times are 1 - 255 seconds, 0
= No Exit Time.
4) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Areas > Timers >
Entry Time 1
-
MENU 2-8-2
MENU 2-8-1
0 2 0
Seconds
This menu allows the installer to set the entry delay time
for each area. The entry delay time can be programmed
between 0 and 255 seconds. This should be set to allow
the user enough time to turn the area off (disarm) before
an alarm condition occurs (eg. end of entry time = alarm).
The entry delay timer starts as soon as a user faults a zone
programmed as burglary delay 1 (eg. opens the front
door) after the area has been turned on and the exit delay
timer has expired.
This menu allows the installer to set the entry delay time
for each area. The entry delay time can be programmed
between 0 and 255 seconds. This should be set to allow
the user enough time to turn the area off (disarm) before
an alarm condition occurs (eg. end of entry time = alarm).
The entry delay timer starts as soon as a user faults a zone
programmed as burglary delay 2 (eg. opens the back
door) after the area has been turned on and the exit delay
timer has expired.
1) Press [MENU] + [2] + [8] + [2]. The keypad will
display a list of areas.
A1 Security System
A2 Area 2 Name
A3 Area 3 Name
Press  OK or MENU
2) Highlight the area required to change, then press
[OK] to select. The keypad will display the current
entry time set for the area selected.
1) Press [MENU] + [2] + [8] + [1]. The keypad will
display a list of areas.
A1 Security System
A2 Area 2 Name
A3 Area 3 Name
Press  OK or MENU
2) Highlight the area required to change, then press
[OK] to select. The keypad will display the current
entry time set for the area selected.
Entry Time 1 A1
020 Seconds
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
3) Using the numeric keys, enter the required entry
time in seconds. Valid times are 1 - 255 seconds, 0
= No exit time.
4) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Entry Time 2 A1
040 Seconds
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
3) Using the numeric keys, enter the required entry
time in seconds. Valid times are 1 - 255 seconds, 0
= No entry tTime.
4) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Areas > Timers >
Part Entry Time
-
MENU 2-8-3
0 6 0
Seconds
This menu sets the time period which a keypad will sound
its warning tone after a zone is triggered in Part On or Part
2 On modes. The user must disarm the area before the
Part Entry Time expires, otherwise an alarm condition will
be triggered.
At factory default, when an area has been turned Part On
or Part 2 On and exit time has finished, violating a non 24hr
burglary zone will start the part entry time. The keypad
will sound the hi/lo tone for a period of 60 seconds before
the control panel sound an alarm or until the user turns
the area off.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
6-9
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Area Programming
The part entry time will start when any of the following
zone types area faulted and set to be monitored for Part
On or Part 2 On.
™™ Burglary Delay 1
™™ Burglary Delay 2
™™ Burglary Instant
™™ Burglary Inst No Exit
™™ Burglary Handover
Only the installer or a master user can set the part entry
time for each area (001 to 255 seconds). Programming 001
seconds allows all non 24 hour burglary zones (including
delay zones) to act as if they were all instant zones when
the area is turned Part On or Part 2 On. Programming 000
seconds allows all non 24 hour burglary zones to operate
as they would if the area has been turned All On.
1) Press [MENU] + [2] + [8] + [3]. The keypad will
display a list of areas.
A1 Security System
A2 Area 2 Name
A3 Area 3 Name
Press  OK or MENU
1) Press [MENU] + [2] + [8] + [4]. The keypad will
display the current Pre-Alert Time.
Auto Arm Pre Alert
000 Minutes
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
Areas > Timers >
Senior Watch Time

(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
060 Seconds
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
MENU 2-8-6
0
0 0
Hours
This feature can be used to verify that an elderly person
is OK or as a dead man timer for an onsite patrolman or
security officer.
3) Using the numeric keys, enter the required entry
time in seconds. Valid times are 1 - 255 seconds, 0
= No exit time.
4) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.

MENU 2-8-4
0 0 0
Minutes
This menu allows the installer to program the auto arm
pre-alert timer that is global for all areas. The auto arm
pre-alert timer can be programmed between 1 and 255
seconds / 0 = disabled.
For the auto arm pre-alert timer to operate, it requires at
least one area to follow a timezone. When the stop time
and day of the week programmed within a period of the
timezone has been met, the control panel will commence
the auto arm pre-alert time. When the auto arm pre-alert
time has expired, the area will automatically turn All On.
During the auto arm pre-alert time, the keypads assigned
6-10
To set up a timezone - see TimeZones.
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Part Entry Time A1
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
The auto arm pre-alert timer allows users the opportunity
to abort automatic arming for that set arming period, or
alternatively delay the area automatically turning All On
by 1 hour, by entering their PIN + [OFF] and then selecting
the option they require. If the user selects the option
to delay the auto arm, this sequence will repeat again
1 hour later untill the area is turned All On manually or
automatically.
2) Using the numeric keys, enter the pre-alert time .
Valid times are 0 to 255 minutes. 0 = No Auto Arm
Pre Alert.
2) Highlight the area required to change, then press
[OK] to select. The keypad will display the current
part entry time set for the area selected.
Areas > Timers >
Auto Arm Pre-Alert
within the same area will sound a warning tone to alert
users that the area will soon automatically turn All On.
This menu allows you to program the Senior Watch Time
period. The panel must register at least one burglary zone
in the programmed area to unseal and reseal during this
time period or the panel will report a Senior Watch alarm
to the base station.
A Senior Watch Restore will be sent when. at least one
zone is unsealed and resealed. Senior Watch monitoring
is only active when the corresponding area is in the
disarmed state.
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [8] + [6]. The keypad will
display the current senior watch time. (default = 0
hours).
Senior Watch Time
000 Hours
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Using the numeric keys, enter the new senior watch
time. Valid times are 001 to 255 hours. 000 = No
Senior Watch Time.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Area Programming
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
AREA TESTING
Areas > Area Testing >
Area Watch
Areas > Area Testing >
Service Interval
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)

(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
1
2
Weeks
This menu programs the number of weeks (001 – 255
weeks / 000 = disabled) an area can remain disarmed
before registering an ‘Inactivity Interval’ report. A restore
signal will be sent when the area is next armed and the
exit time expires.
1) Enter [MENU] + [2] + [9] + [0]. The keypad will
display the current number of weeks programmed
for area watch.
Area Watch
MENU 2-9-2
0
0
0
Weeks
MENU 2-9-0
0

This menu sets the number of weeks between service
intervals. When a service interval is due, a trouble condition
will display on the keypad to remind the customer that a
system check is required by the security company. When
viewing the trouble condition, the keypad will display ‘Call
For Service’. To clear the trouble condition, the installer
must enter and exit installer’s programming mode.
1) Enter [MENU] + [2] + [9] + [2]. The keypad will
display the current number of weeks between
installer service intervals.
Service Interval
000 Weeks
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
012 Weeks
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Using the numeric keys, enter the number of weeks
that an area can remain turned off betore a trouble
condition will occur. Valid entries are 1 – 255
weeks or 000 to disable.
2) Using the numeric keys, enter the number of weeks
between each service interval. Valid entries are 1 –
255 weeks or 000 to disable.
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Areas > Area Testing >
User Test Interval
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)

MENU 2-9-1
0
0
0
Days
This menu sets the number of days before it will prompt
the user to walk test the system. To clear the trouble
condition, you will need to perform the ‘Walk Test’ function.
1) Enter [MENU] + [2] + [9] + [1]. The keypad will
display the current number of weeks between user
test intervals.
User Test Interval
000 Days
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Using the numeric keys, enter the number of days
between each user test interval. Valid entries are 1
– 255 days or 000 to disable.
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
6-11
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Area Programming
Areas > Area Testing >
Test Options

MENU 2-9-3
1
User Test Required
Y
2
Reserved
N
3
Reserved
N
4
Reserved
N
5
Reserved
N
6
Walk Test Report
Y
7
Walk Test 24Hr
N
8
Walk Test Fire
N
The above options are programmable per area.
1) Enter [MENU] + [2] + [9] + [3] and select the area
from the list then press [OK].
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
 User Test Required
Reserved
Reserved
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
User Test Required
This option allows the keypad assigned to the
corresponding area to display a trouble condition when a
user test is due. The trouble condition can be cleared by
performing a walk test.
Walk Test Report
This option allows the corresponding area to send 'Walk
Test' reports when a user enters/exits walk test mode and
test zones.
Walk Test 24Hr
This option allows any 24-hour (non-fire) zone assigned
to the corresponding area to be tested during walk test.
Walk Test Fire
This option allows 24-hour fire zone assigned to the
corresponding area to be tested during walk test.
» » E N D
6-12
O F
S E C T I O N « «
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI

S EC TIO N 7
Input Programming
T
he control panel is capable of controlling up to 144
inputs in either hardwire and/or wireless configuration.
Each input can have its own unique name up to 20
characters to identify it on the system for display and
reporting purposes.
Under the commands menu you are able to view the
status of any input, bypass a zone, define which zones will
operate in chime mode, define which zones operate in
part 2 mode and reset smoke detectors.
There is a command called 'Zone Array' that allows the
installer to view the condition of inputs in banks of 16.
This is extremely helpful when commissioning a system
or fault finding.
There are numerous configurations for each hardwire
input. The end of line resistor can be configured to
eliminate the need to change the end of line resistors on a
job when doing a change over. Input zones can be setup
as alarm only, alarm + tamper or even split end of line.
For normally open contacts the system is wired exactly
the same as for normally closed but there is an option
provided that inverts the sealed state of a zone.
When arming the system, all zones will be tested by default
and you may wish to turn this option off for certain zones
so that you don’t continually alert the operator during
arming.
The sensor watch feature lets you monitor zones to ensure
that they are working and detecting movement within a
determined programmable period.
Zones by default can be bypassed and you should disable
this option for zones you don’t want to be able to bypass,
for example 24hr, fire, holdup or panic zone types.
ZO N E A S S I G N M E N T S
Zone Assignment Table
Address Setting
Module
Number SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5
Zone
Numbers
(Single EOL)
Zone
Numbers
(Alarm+Tamper
EOL)
Single or Alarm
+ Tamper EOL
With CM705B +
CM707B Module
Zone
Numbers
(Split EOL)
Control Panel
1-8
1-8
N/A
1 - 16
17 to 24
17 to 24
17 to 24
1=
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
25 to 32
2=
ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
33 to 40
33 to 40
33 to 40
41 to 48
3=
OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
49 to 56
49 to 56
49 to 56
57 to 64
4=
ON
ON OFF OFF OFF
65 to 72
65 to 72
65 to 72
73 to 80
5=
OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
81 to 88
81 to 88
81 to 88
89 to 96
6=
ON OFF ON OFF OFF
97 to 104
97 to 104
97 to 104
105 to 112
7=
OFF ON
ON OFF OFF
113 to 120
113 to 120
113 to 120
121 to 128
8=
ON
ON
ON OFF OFF
129 to 136
129 to 136
129 to 136
137 to 144
17 to 32
33 to 48
49 to 64
65 to 80
81 to 96
97 to 112
113 to 128
129 to 144
Table 20: Zones Assignments To Modules
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
7-1
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Input Programming
The PGM input is a special input that can be configured
to accept data from a number of different RF receiver
manufacturers or simply be used as an keyswitch input.
The tamper options configure the system behaviour for
cabinet tamper alarms and also for the cabinet tamper of
the peripheral devices.
I N P U T CO M M A N D S
Inputs > Commands >
Zone Status
---
MENU 3-0-0
This menu allows you to view the zone status of each zone
(i.e. Normal, Alarm or Tamper etc).
1) Enter [MENU] + [3] + [0] + [0] and select the zone
you want to view from the list then press [OK].
Alternatively, you can directly enter the zone
number to view then press [OK].
2) The keypad will display the zone status and EOL
resistance value.
3) The keypad will display the following zone array
information for Zones 97 to 112.
9990000000000111 1
7890123456789012 0
---------------- 0
Press  OK or MENU
4) The keypad will display the following zone array
information for Zones 113 to 128.
1111111222222222 1
3456789012345678 0
---------------- 0
Press  OK or MENU
5) When finished press [OK] or [MENU] to exit.
Zone 1 Name Zn1
EOL=Normal 06523 Ohms
Inputs > Commands >
Bypass Zones
Press OK or MENU
3) Press the [OK] key to exit.
Inputs > Commands >
Zone Array
S = Zone 02 is Shorted
A = Zone 03,05,07 are in Alarm (Unsealed)
T = Zone 08 is in Tamper Alarm (Unsealed)
- = Zone 04, 09-16 are Disabled (Unused)
-
MENU 3-0-1
This menu allows you to view zones in groups of sixteen.
The top two rows of the display show the zone number,
the third row displays the zone status
N= NORMAL
S = SHORTED
A= ALARM
T= TAMPER
- = DISABLED
If a 100 is displayed at the right hand side of the top line,
it means that you are displaying zones 97 to 112 or zones
113 to 128 etc. See example.
1) Enter [MENU] + [3] + [0] + [1] and use the up and
down arrows to select the zone group to view.
2) Use the up and down arrows at any time to move to
a new group. The keypad will display the following
zone array information for zones 1 to 16.
0000000001111111
1234567890123456
NSA-ANAT-------Press  OK or MENU
--
MENU 3-0-2
This menu allows users with the appropriate access level
to manually bypass zones effectively removing them
from the area for the current arming cycle. All zone types
including 24hour zones can be bypassed. Bypassed zones
will be reset when the area is turned off or disarmed.
1) Enter [MENU] + [3] + [0] + [2]. A list of zones that
can be bypassed will display on the keypad. A tick
displayed on the right side of the zone name
indicates that the zone is already bypassed.
Zn1 Zone 1 Name 
Zn2 Zone 2 Name
Zn3 Zone 3 Name
Press  OK or MENU
2) Using the up and down arrow keys highlight the
zone that you want to bypass, then press [OK].
Alternatively, you can enter the zone number that
you want to bypass, then press [OK]. If the zone is
bypassed, the keypad will prompt:
Zone 1 Name Zn1 is
bypassed. To un-bypass,
press OFF.
Press OK or MENU
3) If the zone is not bypassed, the keypad will prompt:
In the above example screen,
N = Zone 01 and 06 are Normal (Sealed)
7-2
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Input Programming
Zone 1 Name Zn1 is
un-bypassed. To bypass,
press ON.
Press OK or MENU
Inputs > Commands >
Set Part 2 Zones
4) Press [ON] or [OFF] to toggle the zone bypass state
then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to
exit without saving.
5) Repeat steps 1 to 4 to bypass or un-bypass
additional zones.
Inputs > Commands >
Set Chime Zones
-
MENU 3-0-3
This menu allows you to program zones to be monitored
when chime mode is turned on. Chime mode is ideal for
monitoring a front door in a shop, a pool gate or other
entrance points. To sound the keypad buzzer when a
chime zone is opened (faulted). See MENU 6-1-5 —
Indicator Options. To turn on chime mode - see MENU
2-0-5 - Chime Mode On/Off.
Chime mode only works when the area is disarmed.
1) Enter [MENU] + [3] + [0] + [3] and use the up and
down arrow keys to highlight the area from the list
then press [OK].
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
zone you want to program, then press [OK].
Alternatively, you can enter the zone number
directly then press [OK]. A tick mark displayed on
the right side of the zone name indicates that the
zone is already set for chime.
Zn1 Zone 1 Name 
Zn2 Zone 2 Name
Zn3 Zone 3 Name
Press  OK or MENU
-
MENU 3-0-4
This menu allows you to program which zones are to be
excluded or bypassed when an area has been turned On
in Part Mode 2.
1) Enter [MENU] + [3] + [0] + [4] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the area from the list
then press [OK].
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to select the
zone(s) that you want to disable in Part 2, then
press [OK]. Alternatively, you can enter the zone
number directly then press [OK]. Zones marked
with a tick are active and will alarm in Part 2 mode.
Zn1 Front Door 
Zn2 Main Bedroom
Zn3 Lounge Window 
Press  OK or MENU
3) One of the following messages will be displayed
depending on the current zone programming.
4) Press [ON] to arm the zone in Part 2 mode or press
[OK] to exit.
Main Bedroom Zn2
Is not armed in PART2.
To Enable, Press ON.
To Go Back Press OK
5) Press [OFF] to disarm the zone in Part 2 mode or
press [OK] to exit.
Main Bedroom Zn2
Is armed in PART2.
To remove, Press OFF.
To Go Back Press OK
One of the following messages will be displayed
depending on the current zone programming.
Zone 1 Name Zn1
Zone Chime is OFF,
To turn ON, Press ON.
To Go Back Press OK
Zone 1 Name Zn1
Zone Chime is ON.
To turn OFF, Press OFF.
To Go Back Press OK
3) Press [ON] or [OFF] to toggle the zone to be
monitored when chime mode is turned on then
press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
7-3
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Input Programming
ZO N E P R O P E R T I E S
Inputs > Commands >
Smoke Sensor Reset
--
MENU 3-0-5
This command allows you to reset smoke sensors.
When initiated this command will cause any outputs
programmed as Event Type 49 — Smoke Sensor GND in
the chosen area to turn off for 10 seconds.
1) Enter [MENU] + [3] + [0] + [5] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the area that you want to
reset the smoke detectors in then press [OK].
Smoke Detector reset in
progress. Please wait
Inputs > Zone Properties >
Zone Name
Z o n e
1
-
MENU 3-1-0
N a m e
This menu allows you to program the name for each zone.
Zone names can be up to 20 characters long.
1) Enter [MENU] + [3] + [1] + [0] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the Zone in the list then
press [OK]. Alternatively, you can enter the zone
number directly and press [OK].
2) User the arrow and number keys to move and
change text. When the Zone Name is complete,
press [OK]. At any time you can press the [OFF] key
to clear the text from the current cursor position to
the end of the line.
2) The keypad will automatically return to the menu
when all smoke detectors in the area has been
reset.
Zone Name Zn1
Zone 1 Name
Press  OK to SAVE
Smoke detectors must have the negative power
terminal connected to an output programmed as
Note Event Type 49 for this command to work.
i
See Alpha Text Programming in Section 4 Programming Overview for further detail on entering
Note alpha text.
i
ZO N E D E FAU LT TA B L E
The table below lists the default values for all zone parameters in the control panel. Zones marked as Not Used do not
require EOL resistors to be fitted.
Programming
Zone Name
Zone Type
Area Assignment
Pulse Count
Pulse Count Time
Door Assignment
Report Route
Reporting Options
Lockout Dialler
Report Alarm
Report Troubles
Report Bypass
Reserved
Reserved
Report Restores
Delay Reporting
Zone Options
Lockout Siren
Silent Alarm
Inverted Seal
Bypass Allowed
Sensor Watch
Armed In Part On
No EOL Required
Test On Exit
Zone 1
Zone 1
1 = Delay 1
1
0
120
0
2
Zone 2
Zone 2
5 = Handover
1
0
120
0
2
Zone 3
Zone 3
5 = Handover
1
0
120
0
2
Zone 4
Zone 4
5 = Handover
1
0
120
0
2
Zones 5 - 16
Zone 5 to 16
3 = Instant
1
0
120
0
2
Zones 17 - 144
Zone 17 to 144
0 = Not Used
1
0
120
0
2
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
Y
N
Y
N
N
Y
N
Y
N
N
Y
N
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
Y
N
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
Y
N
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
Y
N
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
Y
N
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
Table 21: Zone Defaults
7-4
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Input Programming
Inputs > Zone Properties >
Zone Type

MENU 3-1-1
0 1
00 - Not Used
01 - Burglary Delay 1
02 - Burglary Delay 2
03 - Burglary Instant
04 - Burg Inst No Exit
05 - Burg Handover
06 - Burglary 24Hr
07 - Tamper 24Hr
08 - Hold Up 24Hr
09 - Medical 24Hr
10 - Panic 24Hr
11 - Fire 24Hr
12 - Not Used
13 - Keyswitch Zone
14 - Display Only
15 - Non Burglary 24Hr
This menu allows you to configure the zone type or
behaviour for every zone in the system. Each zone should
be assigned to a Zone Type that defines the way in which
the panel will respond when an alarm is triggered on that
zone. Refer to the table and descriptions below for the
available Zone Type selections.
1) Press [MENU] + [3] + [1] + [1] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the Zone in the list then
press [OK]. Alternatively, you can enter the zone
number directly and press [OK].
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to select the Zone
Type required then Press [OK] to save and exit or
press [MENU] to exit without saving.
Zone Type Zn1
01 - Burglary Delay 1
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
00 – Not Used
Program the zone type as zero if the zone is not being
used.
01 – Burglary Delay 1
Zones programmed as Delay 1 will cause Entry Timer 1 to
start when tripped. The user must disarm the area before
entry timer expires or an alarm will occur. Zones set as
Burglary Delay 1 are only active when the area is armed.
See MENU 7-2-1 — Entry Time 1 to set the required delay
time.
02 – Burglary Delay 2
Zones programmed as Delay 2 will cause Entry Timer 2 to start
when tripped. The user must disarm the area before entry timer
expires or an alarm will occur. Zones set as Burglary Delay 2 are
only active when the area is armed. See MENU 7-2-2 — Entry Time
2 to set the required delay time.
03 – Burglary Instant
Zones programmed as Instant 1 will immediatly cause
the alarm to trigger when the zone is tripped. ie No Entry
Delay. Zones set as Burglary Instant 1 have Exit Delay and
are only active when the area is armed. See MENU 7-2-0
— Exit Time
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
04 – Burg Inst No Exit
Zones programmed as Instant 2 will immediatly cause
the alarm to trigger when the zone is triggered. ie. No
Entry Delay. Zones set as Burglary Instant 2 have NO Exit
Delay and are only active when the area is armed.
05 – Burglary Handover
A Handover zone will provide a delayed alarm only when
a delay zone has been tripped first (ie. the entry time is
active) otherwise it will trigger an instant alarm.
Zones programmed as Handover can be set to sequential
or non-sequential handover. At factory default, handover
is set to sequential which means that zone must be
triggerred in numerical order for the delay to handover.
Non Sequential Handover means the zone do not have
to be programmed in numerical order. In both cases an
entry delay zone must be triggered first for the delay to
handover.
See MENU 2-1-2 — Input Options to set Non Sequential
Handover.
The Zone Types listed above will only trigger an
alarm if the system or area is in the armed state
Note and the exit time has exprired. Zones must be
sealled at the end of exit time to trigger alarms.
i
06 – Burglary 24Hr
Zones programmed as 24-hour burglary will trigger an
alarm as soon as the zone becomes faulted regardless
of what state the area is in. 24-Hour zones are active 24
hours a day. A 24hr Burglary report will be sent to the
central station receiver.
07 – Tamper 24Hr
Zones programmed as 24-Hour Tamper will trigger an
alarm as soon as the zone becomes faulted regardless
of what state the area is in. 24-Hour zones are active 24
hours a day. A 24hr Tamper report will be sent to the
central station receiver.
08 – Hold Up 24Hr
Zones programmed as 24-Hour Hold Up will trigger
a Silent alarm as soon as the zone becomes faulted
regardless of what state the area is in. 24-Hour zones are
active 24 hours a day. A 24hr Hold Up report will be sent
to the central station receiver. No Siren/Strobe or Keypad
indication will be given. To view the status of a 24hr hold
up zone, refer to MENU 3-0-1.
09 – Medical 24Hr
This zone type is used for personal medical emergency
alarms. Zones programmed as 24-Medical will trigger an
alarm as soon as the zone becomes faulted regardless
of what state the area is in. A 24hr Medical report will be
sent to the central station receiver.
7-5
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Input Programming
10 – Panic 24Hr
This zone type is used for a general type of emergency
including the presence of one or more unwanted persons
trying to gain entry to the premises. It will sound an
alarm at any time as soon as the zone becomes faulted
regardless of what state the area is in. A 24hr Panic report
will be sent to the central station receiver.
Inputs > Zone Properties >
Area Assignment
11 – Fire 24Hr
This zone type is used for Fire and Smoke detector
alarms. If the EOL configuration is set for a single EOL
value, the correct operation for fire zones are SHORT =
Alarm / OPEN = Trouble. For this to operate correctly, the
option 'Smoke Reset On Arming' needs to be disabled for
each area. A 24hr Fire report will be sent to the central
station receiver.
If a horn speaker is connected and programmed, a
distinct fire sound will be heard to indicate that it is a fire
alarm that has registered. The fire sound via the horn
speaker is different than the burglary sound.
All fire zones that have registered an alarm will continue
to display on all keypads until a fire reset has been
performed (see "MENU 3-0-5" on page 146), even if the
fire zone input has returned back to normal state. During
this time, a user will also be prevented the ability to turn
the area on or manually bypass the fire zone(s) until a fire
reset has been performed.
13 – Keyswitch Zone
A keyswitch zone can be used as an input terminal to
turn on and/or off an area. Refer to MENU 3-4-1 —
Keyswitch Options to select the various options such as
latching or momentary arm and/or disarm etc. When
reporting back to base, the keyswitch user number will
follow the actual zone number.

MENU 3-1-2
0 1
00 - No Area
01 - Security System
05 - Area 5 Name
02 - Area 2 Name
06 - Area 6 Name
03 - Area 3 Name
07 - Area 7 Name
04 - Area 4 Name
08 - Area 8 Name
This menu programs which area or partition each zone
belongs to. The system can be partitioned to a maximum
of 8 separate areas. Each zone can only be assigned to a
single area. For installations requiring a common access
point, it is possible to set Area 1 to be a common area. See
MENU 7-7-1 — Area Options
1) Press [MENU] + [3] + [1] + [2] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the Zone in the list then
press [OK]. Alternatively, you can enter the zone
number directly and press [OK].
Area Assignment
Zn1
01 - Security System
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Use the up and down arrows to select the area that
you want to assign the zone to.
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
14 – Display Only
A display zone is not a burglary zone. It can never sound
the sirens or trigger the dialler. Its purpose is to only
display on the keypad when faulted.
15 – Non Burglary 24Hr
This zone type operates as a 24-hour type and is used for
non-specific alarms such as water level or temperature
sensors.
The 24 Hour Zone Types listed above are active
24hrs a day. They will trigger an alarm regardless of
Note whether or not the system or area is in the Armed,
Part Armed or Disarmed state.
i
7-6
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Input Programming
Inputs > Zone Properties >
Pulse Count

0 0
Pulses
00 - No Pulse Count
01 - 1 Pulse
02 - 2 Pulses
03 - 3 Pulses
04 - 4 Pulses
05 - 5 Pulses
06 - 6 Inertia Pulses
07 - 7 Inertia Pulses
Pulse Count Zn1
MENU 3-1-3
08 - 8 Inertia Pulses
09 - 9 Inertia Pulses
10 - 10 Inertia Pulses
11 - 11 Inertia Pulses
12 - 12 Inertia Pulses
13 - Door Open Too Long
14 - PreDelay
15 - Reserved
Options 1 to 5 set the number of trigger pulses a single
zone must receive before an alarm will be tripped. The
number of pulses must be detected within the Pulse
Count Time period for an alarm to occur. See MENU 3-1-4
— Pulse Count Time.
Options 6 to 12 sets the number of trigger pulses a single
inertia zone must receive before an alarm will be tripped.
The number of pulses must be detected within the Pulse
Count Time period for an alarm to occur. See MENU 3-1-4
- Pulse Count Time.
00 - No Pulse Count
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Using the numeric keys, enter the number of pulses
required. Valid entries are 0 – 15 pulses.
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Example of Zone Trigger Delay
Configure Zone 3 With Delay of 3 Minutes (180 Seconds)
1. Program zone type etc as per normal. Then set Zone
pulse count as seconds (Option 13) in MENU 3-1-3.
2. Set the zone 3 delay multiplier in MENU 3-1-4 as 180.
If zone 3 is faulted and remains faulted for 180 seconds,
then an alarm event will be triggered. If the zone returns
to normal within the 180 second period, then the timer
will reset and no alarm will be registered.
Option 13 - Door Open Too Long is used for door
monitoring. In this mode, the zone operates as a normal
zone, however, it doubles up as the input sensing point
for Door Open Too Long alarms. The pulse count time
programmed in MENU 3-1-4 defines the Door Open Too
Long time that needs to elapse before the system registers
a DOTL alarm.
Option 14 - PreDelay programs how long a zone must be
faulted before the zone will register an alarm condition.
The pulse count time in MENU 3-1-4 defines how long
the zone must stay unsealed before being registered as
unsealed. This mode is especially useful when working
with refrigeration alarms as you may wish to only trigger
an alarm condition if the fridge temperature sensor
registers an out of temperature range for a time period
before actually triggering the alarm.
A feature called Pulse Count Handover can be enabled
allowing pulses registered by one zone to handover to
another zone provided they are the same Zone Type (ie.
instant zone to instant zone) and in the same Area. See
MENU 2-1-2 — Input Options
When pulse count hands over from one zone to another
and an alarm is triggered, a cross alarm report will be sent
to the central station.
1) Press [MENU] + [3] + [1] + [3] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the Zone in the list then
press [OK]. Alternatively, you can enter the zone
number directly and press [OK]. The keypad will
display the current pulse count time for the chosen
zone.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
7-7
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Input Programming
U N D E R S TA N D I N G ACC E S S G R O U P S
Inputs > Zone Properties >
Pulse Count Time

MENU 3-1-4
1 2 0
Seconds
Value
000 - 255
Multiplier
Seconds, Minutes or Hours
Pulse count time operates in accordance with the pulse
count option set in MENU 3-1-3. There are four modes of
operation that can be set including:
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
Pulse Count
Inertia Pulse
Door Open Too Long
PreDelay
Users
A user can belong to multiple Access Groups.
Outputs
An output can only belong to 1 Access Group.
Reader
A reader can belong to only 1 Access Group.
When programming the pulse count time, enter the value
between 000 to 255, then set the multiplier in seconds,
minutes or hours.
1) Press [MENU] + [3] + [1] + [4] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the Zone in the list then
press [OK]. Alternatively, you can enter the zone
number directly and press [OK]. The keypad will
display the current pulse count time.
Pulse Count Time
Access Groups are used to link Readers, Users and Outputs
together to allow you to operate a door strike when a user
token is presented to a given reader. To do this you need
to create an access group and assign the user, the reader
and the output to the same access group.
Zn1
120 Second
Press  OK to SAVE
2) Use the [↑] and [↓] keys to set the time required.
Valid entries are 0 – 255 seconds.
Access Group
There are 8 different access groups.
Door Access Group Example
1) To set up a door access group you need to select an
unused Access Group number from 1 to 8, in this
example we will assume the Access Group number
to be 5.
2) Under user properties assign the users who you
wish to have access to Access Group 5. Remember
that you are able to assign users to more than one
Access Group.
3) Now select the output that will be used to operate
the door strike and assign it to Access Group 5. You
also need to set the output type to ACCESS and the
polarity to one shot low with a time of how long
you would like the strike to operate. Generally a
strike would be operated for 5 seconds.
3) Use the [→] key to toggle to cursor and set the
multiplier in seconds, minutes or hours using the
[↑] and [↓] keys.
4) Assign the Reader under Reader properties to
Access Group 5.
4) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
When a user who belongs to Access Group 5 presents their
token to the reader that is assigned to Access Group 5, the
assigned output will operate releasing the door strike.
A reader can belong not only to a Access Group but also
to an Area if arming and disarming is required from the
reader.
If a user presents their token to an reader that has an
area assigned, then the user Access Group and Area
Permissions are both checked. If the area is armed and the
user belongs to the same area as the Reader and the same
Access Group, the system will disarm and allow access.
If the user does not belong to the same area as the reader
but the Access Groups match, then door access will only
be available to that user if the area is disarmed.
When using the same reader for door access as well as
arming, you need to select the badging option MENU 1-63 — Reader Options. Badging requires that you present
your token 3 times in succession within 5 seconds to arm
the system.
7-8
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Input Programming
Inputs > Zone Properties >
Door Assignment

MENU 3-1-5
0
00 - No Door Assignment
01 - Door 1 Name
02 - Door 2 Name
03 - Door 3 Name
04 - Door 4 Name
05 - Door 5 Name
06 - Door 6 Name
07 - Door 7 Name
08 - Door 8 Name
0
2) Use the up and down arrows to select the Report
Route that you want to assign the zone to.
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
At factory default all Zones are set to report to
Destination 1 and the System Log. See the Zone
Note Default Table for more information on Zone default
settings.
i
09 - Door 9 Name
10 - Door 10 Name
11 - Door 11 Name
12 - Door 12 Name
13 - Door 13 Name
14 - Door 14 Name
15 - Door 15 Name
16 - Door 16 Name
Inputs > Zone Properties >
Report Options

MENU 3-1-7
1
Lockout Dialler
Y
This menu allows the installer to assign a zone to a single
door. There are 16 different doors available.
2
Report Alarm
Y
3
Report Troubles
Y
1) Press [MENU] + [3] + [1] + [5] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the Zone in the list then
press [OK]. Alternatively, you can enter the zone
number directly and press [OK]. The keypad will
display the current door assignment.
4
Report Bypass
Y
5
Reserved
N
6
Reserved
N
7
Report Restores
Y
8
Delay Reporting
N
Door Assignment Zn1
The above options are programmable per zone.
00 - No Door Assignment
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Use the up and down arrows to select the door that
you want to assign the zone to.
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Inputs > Zone Properties >
Report Route

MENU 3-1-6
0
00 - Log Events Only
01 - Dest 1 + Log
02 - Dest 2 + Log
03 - Dest 1 & 2 + Log
04 - Dest 2 If 1 Fails
1
This menu sets the Zone Report Route or Report
Destination for each individual zone in the system. All
events such as alarms and troubles for each zone will be
reported according to this menu setting. Each zone can
only be assigned to one report route from the list above.
1) Press [MENU] + [3] + [1] + [6] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the Zone in the list then
press [OK]. Alternatively, you can enter the zone
number directly and press [OK]. The keypad will
display the current Zone Report Route.
Report Route
Zn1
01 - Dest 1 + Log
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
1) Press [MENU] + [3] + [1] + [7] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the Zone in the list then
press [OK]. Alternatively, you can enter the zone
number directly and press [OK]. The keypad will
display the Report Options for the currently
selected zone.
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
 Lockout Dialler
 Report Alarm
 Report Troubles
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Lockout Dialler
Setting this option will enable Dialler Lockout
functionality for the respective zone(s). All zones in
the system can be individually programmed for Dialler
Lockout.
When enabled the zone will be allowed to transmit
alarm reports each time it is triggered provided that
the Swinger Dialler count has not been reached. If the
zone is triggered and the Swinger Dialler count has been
reached then the zone will become locked out and no
further reports will be sent for that zone. Dialler lockout
will be reset on the next arming cycle.
7-9
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Input Programming
See MENU 5-4-5 — Swinger Dialler to set the number of
times a zone is allowed to trigger before being locked
out.
Report Alarm
Setting this option will enable the system to Report
Alarm events for the respective zone. All zones in the
system can be individually programmed to report alarms.
Report Troubles
Setting this option will enable the system to Report
Trouble events for the respective zone. A Trouble report
will be sent if the zone is left unsealled at the end of
exit time. All zones in the system can be individually
programmed to report trouble events.
Report Bypass
Setting this option will enable the system to Report Zone
Bypass events for the respective zone. A Bypass report
will be sent at the end of exit time for zones which have
been manually bypassed. All zones in the system can be
individually programmed to report Zone Bypass events.
Report Restores
Setting this option allows the system to send Restore
reports for zones that have already sent a previous alarm
or trouble report on the same arming cycle.
1) Burglary Zone alarms and troubles restore when
the zone reseals or the area is disarmed.
2) 24hr Zone alarms and troubles restore when the
zone reseals.
3) Bypassed Zone restore when the area is disarmed.
Delay Reporting
Setting this option will cause the system to delay alarm
reports for the selected zone. This option can be enabled
to allow a user to enter their PIN and disable the report
in case they have caused a false alarm. If a PIN is not
entered within the delay time, the system will trigger the
sirens and send the report as normal.
See MENU 5-4-6 — Burg Report Delay and MENU 5-4-7
— Fire Report Delay to set the delay time.
If a PIN code is entered after the delay time has expired,
and the sirens are still sounding, the system will send the
Alarm report followed by a Cancel report.
Inputs > Zone Properties >
Zone Options

MENU 3-1-8
1
Lockout Siren
Y
2
Silent Alarm
N
3
Inverted Seal
N
4
Bypass Allowed
Y
5
Sensor Watch
N
6
Armed In Part On
Y
7
No EOL Required
N
8
Test On Exit
Y
The above options are programmable per zone.
1) Press [MENU] + [3] + [1] + [8] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the Zone in the list then
press [OK]. Alternatively, you can enter the zone
number directly and press [OK]. The keypad will
display the Zone Options for the currently selected
zone.
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
 Lockout Siren
Silent Alarm
Inverted Seal
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Lockout Siren
Setting this option will enable Siren Lockout functionality
for the respective zone(s). All zones in the system can be
individually programmed for Siren Lockout.
When enabled the respective zone will be allowed to
cause the sirens to sound each time a new alarm is
triggered provided that the Swinger Siren count has not
been reached. If the zone is triggered and the Swinger
Siren count has been reached then the siren will become
locked out for that zone and no further siren activations
will occur from that zone. Only zones which have been
locked out are prevented from triggering the sirens.
Siren lockout will be reset on the next arming cycle.
See MENU 7-4-3 — Swinger Siren to set the shutdown
count.
Silent Alarm
Setting this option will set the correspondiing zone to
become a silent zone. Audible alarm outputs will not
sound when a silent zone is triggered.
Inverted Seal
Setting this option allows a normally-open sensor
or device to operate as a normally-closed device by
reversing the open/closed state of the zone loop. (eg.
7-10
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Input Programming
When the zone loop is open, the system will register the
zone loop as closed or normal.)
Bypass Allowed
Setting this option allows users with the appropriate
access level to manually bypass this zone effectively
removing it from the area for the current arming cycle.
All zone types including 24hour zones can be bypassed if
this option is selected. Bypassed zones will be reset when
the area is turned off or disarmed.
Sensor Watch
Setting this option causes the system to monitor the
zone’s activity while the corresponding area is in the
disarmed state. If the zone fails to unseal and reseal at
least once during the Sensor Watch Time period a system
trouble will be displayed on the keypad and a Sensor
Watch report for the corresponding zone will be sent to
the programmed destination. See MENU 3-9-2 — Sensor
Watch to set the time period.
Sensor Watch monitoring is only active when the
area is in the disarmed state. 24 hour zone types
Note cannot be monitored using the Sensor Watch feature.
i
Armed In Part On
Setting this option causes the zone to be active or
monitored when the corresponding area is armed Part
On.
If this option is not set, the corresponding zone will be
inactive when the area is armed Part On allowing users to
move freely within this zone and not trigger an alarm.
No EOL Required
Setting this option allows you to connect a zone loop
without the need for an EOL resistor to be fitted as
programmed in the global EOL resistor value.
Test On Exit
Setting this option will cause the system to prompt the
user that a zone or zones are not sealled when they
attempt to arm the area in which the zone belongs.
An error beep will sound and a zone trouble message
will display on the keypad advising the user to seal the
zone(s) or to bypass them before the area will arm.
If this option is disabled the zone will not be tested
during the arming sequence and the system will arm. If
the zone(s) are unsealled at the end of exit time a Zone
Trouble report will be sent.
ADDING RF SENSORS
The control panel supports a wide range of 3rd party
wireless movement sensors, door contacts and smoke
detectors allowing you to choose the most appropriate
devices for each installation.
In all cases the RF sensor must be compatible with the RF
Receiver that is installed. See MENU 3-5-0 — Input Type.
i
Note
Zones configured as RF zone will follow all other zone
properties.
Inputs > RF Zone >
Add RF Device

MENU 3-3-0
This menu allows you to program an RF device to a zone.
Only one RF device can be used for each zone.
1) Press [MENU] + [3] + [3] + [0] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the zone you want to
program in the list and press[OK]. Alternatively, you
can enter the zone number directly and press [OK].
The system will only list zones that dont already
have an RF device programmed.
Enter Device ID Zn1
Zone 1 Name
000000000
Press OK or MENU
2) Using the numeric keys, enter the RF device ID
number, or trigger the RF device tamper to send
the RF device ID.
Channel 1
Channel 2
Exit
Press  OK or MENU
3) Use the [] and [] keys to highlight which channel
you want to learn the RF device input (external/
internal contact), then press [OK] to select.
Both channel 1 and channel 2 can only be utilised
by Bosch 3401E and 3405E sensors, allowing you to
utilise both internal and external contacts from the
same device on different zones. All other bosch RF
sensors can only use channel 1.
4) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
If you require to change a channel, you need to first
delete the RF device ID (see MENU 3-3-1) and add the
Note RF device again.
i
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
7-11
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Input Programming
Inputs > RF Zone >
Delete RF Device
G LO B A L I N P U T O P T I O N S

MENU 3-3-1
This menu allows you to delete an RF device .
1) Press [MENU] + [3] + [3] + [1] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the zone in the list and
press[OK]. The keypad will only list zones that have
an ID programmed. If no zones have an ID number
programmed, the keypad will display:
No Matching List Items
Found!
Press  OK or MENU
Delete Device ID Zn1
Zone 1 Name
007407097
Press OK or MENU

MENU 3-3-2
This menu allows you to test just how good the current
position is for an RF device. Enter the command and you
will be presented with a list of RF zones in the current area
that are available for test. Use the arrow keys to highlight
the zone to test and press OK. At any time press menu to
exit.
1) Press [MENU] + [3] + [3] + [2] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the zone you want to test
in the list and press[OK]. Alternatively, you can
enter the zone number directly and press [OK]. The
system will only list RF zones in the current area.
Zn2 Zone 2 Name
W a i t i n g for Trigger!
Press OK or MENU
2) Once a signal is received the following information
will be displayed.
Zn2 Zone 2 Name
Transmissions = 001
Signal = Good
Press OK or MENU
Signal can = Good, Average or Relocate
Every time you send a transmission, the number of
transmissions will increment and the average of the signals
with be displayed. Be sure to send a few transmissions to
establish a more accurate signal measurement.
7-12

MENU 3-4-0
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
0
00 - No EOL
08 - 6k8 Ohm
01 - 1k0 Ohm
09 - 8k1 Ohm
02 - 1k5 Ohm
10 - 10k Ohm
03 - 2k2 Ohm
11 - 6K8 Alarm + 2k2 Tamp
04 - 2k7 Ohm
12 - 10k Alarm + 10k Tamp
05 - 3k3 Ohm
13 - 22k Ohm
06 - 4k7 Ohm
14 - 3k3 Alarm + 6k8 Tamp
07 - 5k6 Ohm
15 - Split EOL 3k3 //6k8
5
This menu programs the End Of Line resistor (EOL) value
that is global for all hard-wired zones including zones on
the Zone Expander Module. Only one EOL Value can be
programmed.
2) Press [OK] to DELETE the RF device and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without deleting.
Inputs > RF Zone >
Test RF Device
Inputs > Global Input Options >
EOL Value
Setting the EOL Value to type 0 to 14 will configure the
control panel as 8 hardwired zones. Additional zones
via optional zone expander boards will start on zone 9.
Setting the EOL as type 15 will configure the control panel
as 16 hardware zones with zones 17 upwards via optional
zone expander boards.
1) Press [MENU] + [3] + [4] + [0]. The keypad will
display the current EOL value (Default = 5).
EOL Value
05 - 3k3 Ohm
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Use the up and down arrows to select the EOL
Value you want to use then press [OK] to save and
exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
Inputs > Global Input Options >
Keyswitch Options

MENU 3-4-1
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
00 - Latching All On/Off
05 - Pulse All On/Off
01 - Latching All On
06 - Pulse All On
02 - Latch Part On/Off
07 - Pulse Part On/Off
03 - Latching Part On
08 - Pulse Part On
04 - Latching Off
09 - Pulse Part Off
0
0
This menu programs the properties for any zone in the
system programmed as a keyswitch zone. Only one
option can be selected for the entire system which means
that all keyswitches fitted will behave the same way.
The system can send Open and Close reports based on the
keyswitch operation with the zone number representing
the user number in the report.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Input Programming
1) Press [MENU] + [3] + [4] + [1]. The keypad will
display the current keyswitch options (Default = 0
Disabled).
Keyswitch Options
Alarm On Tamper
This option allows tamper circuits on RF sensors and
hardwire zones to sound an alarm when faulted when
their corresponding area is turned off (disarmed).
00 - Latching All On/Off
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Use the up and down arrows to select the required
keyswitch option then press [OK] to save and exit
or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
Inputs > Global Input Options >
Input Options
Keyswitch Open Close
This feature allows you to select whether or not a zone
programmed as a Keyswitch Zone, will send opening and
closing reports. The default is set to Off.
Inputs > PGM Input >
Input Type

MENU 3-5-0
0

MENU 3-4-2
00 - Disabled
1
Tamper On Short
N
01 - Latching On/Off
04 - Bosch Serial Rcvr
2
Reserved
N
02 - Pulse On/Off
05 - Crow Serial Rcvr (TBA)
3
Response Time 500msec
N
03 - Simple RF On/Off
4
Reserved
N
5
Keyswitch Open Close
Y
6
Alarm On Tamper
N
7
Reserved
N
8
Reserved
N
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
This menu programs the various global input options
which will effect all zones on the system.
1) Press [MENU] + [3] + [4] + [2]. The keypad will
display the current input options.
This menu option is used to configure the systems
programmable input terminal. Various devices can be
connected including keyswitches of radio controlled relays
etc. When RF zones are required you need to connect the
RF receiver to this input
Connect keyswitch between Input terminal and GND.
See Wiring Diagrams in Section 3 for various connection
diagrams.
1) Press [MENU] + [3] + [5] + [0]. The keypad will
display the current input type (Default = 0
Disabled).
Input Type
Tamper On Short
Reserved
Response Time 500msec
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Tamper On Short
Setting this option will cause any Zone which become
shorted to report a tamper alarm condition for the zone.
0
00 - Disabled
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Use the up and down arrows to select the required
Input Device Type then press [OK] to save and exit
or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
The Latching and Momentary On/Off modes
are active low, and when triggered, they will
Note automatically force arm the area.
i
Response Time 500msec
Setting this option will increase the response time for all
zones to 500ms.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
7-13
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Input Programming
Inputs > Tamper Inputs >
Tamper Options
INPUT TESTING

MENU 3-6-0
1
Display Panel Tpr
Y
2
Report Panel Tpr
Y
3
Audible Panel Tpr
Y
4
Display Expander Tpr
Y
5
Report Expander Tpr
Y
6
Audible Expander Tpr
Y
7
Reserved
N
8
Reserved
N
This menu programs how the various system tamper
inputs behave when faulted. These dedicated tamper
inputs are active 24 hours a day when enabled.
1) Press [MENU] + [3] + [6] + [0]. The keypad will
display the current tamper options.
 Display Panel Tpr
 Report Panel Tpr
 Audible Panel Tpr
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Display Cabinet Tpr
Setting this option allows the keypad to display a trouble
condition when the tamper circuit that monitors the
systems cabinet is faulted. The trouble condition will
clear when the tamper circuit has restored.
Report Cabinet Tpr
Setting this option allows the panel to send a Cabinet
Tamper report when the cabinet tamper circuit is faulted.
A Cabinet Tamper Restore report will be sent when the
tamper circuit has restored.
Audible Cabinet Tpr
Setting this option will cause the panel to sound the
sirens when the cabinet tamper circuit is faulted.
Display Expander Tpr
Setting this option causes the system to display tamper
events which have occured on peripheral modules.
Report Expander Tpr
Setting this option enables peripheral tamper reporting.
Audible Expander Tpr
Setting this option causes the system to trigger an
audible alarm when a peripheral tamper is triggered.
7-14
Inputs > Input Testing >
Walk Test All Zones
--
MENU 3-9-0
This menu allows you to test all zones within an area at the
same time. To perform a successfull walk test, each zone
in the area must be sealed and unsealed. Users must have
access to the area they want to test.
Once the mode is activated all zones in the area will be
listed one after the other on the keypad display. As each
zone is successfully tested it will be removed from the list
leaving only those zone still to be tested in the list.
1) Press [MENU] + [3] + [9] + [0] and select the area to
walk test from the list then press [OK].
2) The keypad will begin scrolling all of the zones that
are to be tested as per the below display.
To test zone Zn1
open then close
Zone 1 Name
Press OK or MENU
To test zone Zn2
open then close
Zone 2 Name
Press OK or MENU
3) Open and close each zone in the list. Zones that
have been successfully tested are removed from
the keypad scroll list. When all zones have been
tested, the keypad will display:
All zones have been
sucessfully tested
Press OK or MENU
4) Press [OK] or [MENU] to exit.
Inputs > Input Testing >
Walk Test A Zone
--
MENU 3-9-1
This menu allows you to select a single zone to be walk
tested. To perform a successfull walk test, the sellected
zone must be sealled and unsealled. Users must have
access to the zone they want to test.
1) Press [MENU] + [3] + [9] + [1] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the zone you want to
walk test in the list and press[OK]. Alternatively,
you can enter the zone number directly and press
[OK].
2) The keypad will display the zone to be tested.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Input Programming
To test zone Zn1
open then close
Zone 1 Name
Press OK or MENU
3) Open and close the zone that needs to be tested.
When the test has been completed the keypad will
display:
Zn1 Zone 1 Name
Test Successful
Press OK or MENU
4) Press [OK] or [MENU] to exit.
Inputs > Input Testing >
Sensor Watch Time

(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
MENU 3-9-2
0 3 0
Days
This menu programs the Sensor Watch Time interval.
Zones programmed for Sensor Watch are required to seal
and unseal at least once within the Sensor Watch Time
period or a trouble message will be displayed on the
keypad and a Zone Trouble report sent.
Valid entries are 001 -255 Days and 000 = Sensor Watch
Disabled
5) Press [MENU] + [3] + [9] + [2]. The keypad will
display the current sensor watch time (Default = 30
days).
Sensor Watch Time
030 Days
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Using the numeric keys, enter the new Sensor
Watch time in days then press [OK] to save and exit
or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
Sensor Watch monitoring is only active when the
area is in the disarmed state. 24 hour zone types
Note cannot be monitored using the Sensor Watch feature.
i
» » E N D
O F
S E C T I O N « «
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
7-15
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Input Programming
7-16
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI

S EC TIO N 8
Output Programming
T
he Solution 144 is capable of controlling up to 16
outputs. The first 4 outputs are on the main control
board and an additional 4 outputs are provided using an
output expander module. Each output can have its own
unique name up to 16 characters to identify it on the
system for display and reporting purposes.
Under the commands menu you are able to view the
status of any output and to change its on/off condition. In
the case of latching output types, you will be required to
reset the output manually using these commands.
Outputs are programmed using an event type. First select
the event type that will cause the output to trigger. Then
select the polarity of the event, if it is low and goes high or
high and goes low. If the event is pulsing or one shot type,
the time parameter must also be programmed to define
the time of the pulse.
Event Assignment, this is extremely important parameter
and has a different meaning depending on the event type
selected. For example, event type “24 - Area Part On” the
event assignment selects the Area that is armed in part on
for the output to trigger. If you set the event assignment
to 1, then it will correspond to area 1 and so on, setting
it to zero means all areas. See the event type table for
more detail on the relationship of event type to event
assignment.
Outputs 1 and 2 are special outputs that can be configured
as horn speaker polarity types and are monitored to
report a device connection trouble. Output 4 is a dry
relay contact which has a optional jumper that allows you
to switch positive or negative without the need to add
additional wiring.
The outputs are all protected and will shut down
individually under overload conditions. A report will be
generated and a displayed on the keypad to indicate the
trouble condition.
1) Press [MENU] + [4] + [0] + [0] and select the output
you want to view from the list then press [OK].
Alternatively, you can directly enter the output
number that you want to view then press [OK].
The keypad will display the following when the output
is currently in the OFF state and ready to activate.
External Siren Op1
Is OFF and Ready
Press OK or MENU
The keypad will display the following when the output
is currently in the OFF state but the connection is
missing.
External Siren Op1
Is OFF and Ready
Connection Trouble
Press OK or MENU
The keypad will display the following when the output
is currently in the ON state and ready.
External Siren Op1
Is ON and TIMING
Triggered
Press OK or MENU
The keypad will display the following when the
output is currently in the ON state but the connection
is missing.
External Siren Op1
Is ON and TIMING
Connection Trouble
Press OK or MENU
O U T P U T CO M M A N D S
Outputs > Commands >
Output Status
2) Press [OK] or [MENU] to exit.
---
MENU 4-0-0
This command allows you to view the current status of
any system output.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
8-1
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Output Programming
Outputs > Commands >
Turn Output On/Off
--
MENU 4-0-1
This command allows you to manuallly turn any output
ON or OFF. Outputs can be configured to control various
functions including outside lighting, pool pumps,
watering systems, air conditioners etc.
1) Press [MENU] + [4] + [0] + [1] and select the output
you want to operate from the list then press [OK].
Alternatively, you can directly enter the output
number then press [OK].
2) The keypad will display the following when the
output is off. To turn the Output On, press [ON]. To
override any time parameters that the output has
set, press and hold the [ON] key.
External Siren Op1
Output is OFF,
To turn ON, Press ON.
To Go Back Press OK
3) The keypad will display the following when the
output is on. To turn the output Off, press [OFF].
External Siren Op1
Output is ON,
To turn OFF, Press OFF.
To Go Back Press OK
In the above example screen,
N = Outputs 01 to 05 are Normal (Off )
F = Output 10 has a Fault (Overload)
T = Output 09 is Triggered (On)
- = Outputs 05 to 08 and Outputs 11 to 16 are
Disabled or Not Available
3) The keypad will display the following output array
information for outputs 17 to 32.
1112222222222333
7890123456789012
---------------Press  OK or MENU
4) The keypad will display the following output array
information for output 33 to 40.
3333333444444444
3456789012345678
-------Press  OK or MENU
5) When finished press [OK] or [MENU] to exit.
Outputs > Commands >
Door Status
-
MENU 4-0-3
This menu allows you to view the status of a selected door.
4) Press [OK] or [MENU] when finished.
1) Enter [MENU] + [4] + [0] + [3].
2) A list of available doors will display on the keypad.
Outputs > Commands >
Output Array
-
MENU 4-0-2
This menu allows the master user and installer to view
output status in groups of 16. Outputs will continuously
be updated during the display so that real time status can
be seen. The top two rows of the display show the output
number, the third row displays the output status
N = NORMAL - Off Condition
T = TRIGGERED - On Condition
F = FAULT - Overload Condition
- = DISABLED
1) Enter [MENU] + [4] + [0] + [2] and use the up and
down arrows to select the output group to view.
2) Use the up and down arrows at any time to move to
a new group. The keypad will display the following
output array information for outputs 1 to 16.
Dr1 Front Door
Dr2 Computer Room
Dr3 Warehouse Door
Press , OK or MENU
3) Use the [] and [] keys to select the door that you
want to check the status of, then press [OK] to
select. Alternatively, you can enter the door
number then press [OK].
The keypad will display the following:
Front Door Dr1
Door Locked
Press OK or MENU
4) The following door states can be displayed in the
door status menu.
Door Locked
Door Unlocked
0000000001111111
1234567890123456
NNNNN---TF-----Press  OK or MENU
8-2
Door Open By TimeZone
Door Manually Open
Door Forced Open
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Output Programming
5) When finished press [OK] or [MENU] to exit.
Outputs > Commands >
Door Array
-
Dr1 Door 1 Name
Dr2 Door 2 Name
Dr3 Door 3 Name
Press  OK or MENU
MENU 4-0-4
This menu allows the master user and installer to view
door status of the doors in groups of 16. Doors will
continuously be updated during the display so that real
time status can be seen. The top two rows of the display
show the door number, the third row displays the door
status
L = Door Locked
3) Use the [ON] and [OFF] keys to override the door
and toggle the door open or close, then press [OK].
To abort press [MENU].
Door 1 Name Dr1
Door Override is OFF,
To turn ON, Press ON.
To Go Back, Press OK
U = Door Unlocked
O = Override
- = Disabled or Not Available
1) Enter [MENU] + [4] + [0] + [4] and use the up and
down arrows to select the door group to view. The
keypad will display the following output array
information for outputs 1 to 16.
0000000001111111
1234567890123456
LLLLL---UUUUO--Press  OK or MENU
In the above example screen,
L = Doors 01 to 05 are Locked
O = Door 13 has a Override condition
U = Doors 09 to 12 area Unlocked
- = Doors 06 to 08 and Doors 14 to 16 are Disabled or
Not Available
2) When finished press [OK] or [MENU] to exit.
Outputs > Commands >
Door Override
-
MENU 4-0-5
This menu allows you to manually override a door in the
event you wish to place the door in a manually open or
closed condition.
The first state is to select the door which you wish to
override keeping in mind that you will only be presented
with a list of doors that you are authorised to access and
secondly, that you are a master code holder.
1) Enter [MENU] + [1] + [0] + [1].
2) Use the arrow keys to highlight the door you wish
to override, then press [OK].
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
8-3
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Output Programming
OUTPUT PROPERTIES
Outputs > Properties >
Output Name
O u t p u t
1
-
MENU 4-1-0
N a m e
This menu allows you to program the name for each
output. Output names can be up to 16 characters long.
1) Press [MENU] + [4] + [1] + [0] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the Output in the list
then press [OK]. Alternatively, you can enter the
output number directly and press [OK].
2) Use the arrow and number keys to move and
change text. When the Output Name is complete,
press [OK]. At any time you can press the [OFF] key
to clear the text from the current cursor position to
the end of the line. .
Output Name Op1
External Siren
Press  OK to SAVE
See Alpha Text Programming in Section 4 —
Programming Overview for further detail on entering
Note alpha text.
i
Outputs > Properties >
Event Type

MENU 4-1-1
0
0
0
This menu allows you to set the output event type. See the
Output Event Type Table and Event Type Descriptions in
this section for more information on the available options.
1) Press [MENU] + [4] + [1] + [1] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the Output in the list
then press [OK]. Alternatively, you can directly
enter the output number and press [OK].
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to select the Event
Type required then press [OK] to save and exit or
press [MENU] to exit without saving. It is also
possible to directly enter the Event Type number
then press [OK].
Event Type Op1
36 - External Audible
Press  0-9 OK to Save
01 - Battery Trouble
This event type will cause the output to operate when
the panel detects a low or missing stand-by battery
and will reset once a successful battery test has been
performed.
and when the system is armed. A manual test can also be
requested at any time while the system is disarmed. See
MENU 7-9-1 — Battery Test
02 – AC Trouble
This event type will cause the output to operate when
the panel detects that the AC mains power has been
missing for 1 minute and will reset when the power has
been restored for 1 minute.
03 – Telco Line Fail
This event type will cause the output to operate
when the panel detects that the telco line has been
disconnected for 30 seconds and will reset when the line
has been restored.
04 – Comm Fail
This event type will cause the output to operate if the
panel fails to report to destination1 or 2 or both. The
panel will try to send the report as many times as set in
the call attempt counter before registering a comm fail.
The output will restore as soon as a successful report has
been sent to the destination that has previously failed to
report. If both Destination 1 and Destination 2 had failed
to report then successful report to both destinations will
need to be made before the output will reset. See MENU
5-2-0 — Call Attempt Count
05 – 3rd Dial Attempt
This event type will cause the output to operate when
the panel has made 3 unsuccessful call attempts to the
base station. The output will reset when all pending
messages have been sent or when the maximum number
of call attempts have been made.
06 – Dest Reporting
This event type will cause the output to operate when
the panel is communicating via Destination 1 or 2 and
will reset when the transmission ends.
07 – Reserved
08 – Dest Kiss Off
This event type will cause the output to operate when
the panel receives an kiss-off acknowledgment from the
receiving party while communicating via destination 1
or 2. It is recommended that this output is programmed
with a one-shot timer.
09 – User Keyfob Func 1
This event type will cause the output to operate when
Key X is pressed on the Keyfob. This output type is user
specific and requires a 4 button keyfob.
Battery tests are performed automatically every 4 hours
8-4
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Output Programming
10 – User Keyfob Func 2
This event type will cause the output to operate when
Key Y is pressed on the Keyfob. This output type is user
specific and requires a 4 button keyfob.
11 – Dialler Disabled
This event type will cause the output to operate if the
panel reporting functions are manually disabled and
will reset when reporting is enabled. See MENU 5-2-1 —
Dialer Options.
12 – Output Device Missing
This event type will cause the output to operate when
the panel detects that a horn speaker is missing. The
output will reset when the horn speaker is reconnected.
Only output 1 and 2 can be programmed as a horn
speaker outputs. See MENU 4-1-3 — Output Polarity for
information on configuring an output to drive a horn
speaker
13 – Output Trouble
This event type will cause the output to operate when
the panel detects that an output device is missing or in
an overload condition. The output will reset when all
failed outputs have restored or the overload condition
has been removed.
14 – Panel On Line
This event type will cause the output to operate when
the panel seizes the phone line and will reset when the
phone line is released.
15 – Incoming Call
This event type will cause the output to operate when
the panel detects an incoming call on the phone line and
will reset when the ring signal stops.
16 – System Trouble
This event type will cause the output to operate when
the panel detects a system trouble condition and will
reset when the condition is cleared.
17 – Box Tamper
This event type will cause the output to operate when
the panel detects that the onboard cabinet tamper
circuit is open. The output will reset when the tamper
circuit is closed. No EOL resistor is required on this input.
18 – Zone Trouble
This event type will cause the output to operate when
the panel detects that a zone has a trouble condition and
will reset when the trouble condition has cleared.
19 – Zone Mirror
This event type will cause the output to operate when a
specific zone is open or unsealed and will reset when the
zone closes.
See MENU 4-1-2 — Event Assignment for infomation on
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
how to set the zone to mirror.
20 – Zone Alarm
This event type will cause the output to operate when a
specific zone has triggered an alarm and will reset when
the corresponding area is disarmed. For a non 24hour
zone to trigger an alarm the area must be armed. See
MENU 4-1-2 — Event Assignment for infomation on how
to set the zone to monitor.
21 – Area Disarmed
This event type will cause the output to operate as soon
as the corresponding area is disarmed and will reset
when the area is armed in either the All On or Part On
modes.
If the output event assignment for this output is set to
zero (all areas), then all areas must be disarmed for the
output to operate. The output will reset as soon as any
area is armed in either the All On or Part On modes.
22 – Area Part Or All On
This event type will cause the output to operate when
the selected area is armed in either All On or Part On
mode. The output will reset when the area is disarmed.
If the event assignment for this output has been set to
zero (all areas) then the output will only operate when all
areas have been armed in All On or Part On mode. The
output will reset as soon any area is disarmed.
23 – Area All On
This event type will cause the output to operate as soon
as a specific area is armed All On mode and will reset
when the area is disarmed.
If the event assignment for this output has been set to
zero (all areas), then the output will only operate when
all areas have been armed in the All On mode and will
reset as soon as any area is disarmed.
24 – Area Part On
This event type will cause the output to operate as soon
as a specific area is armed Part On mode and will reset
when the area is disarmed.
If the event assignment for this output has been set to
zero (all areas), then the output will only operate when
all areas have been armed in the Part On mode and will
reset as soon as any area is disarmed.
25 – Area Part 2 On
This event type will cause the output to operate as soon
as a specific area is armed Part 2 On mode and will reset
when the ares is disarmed.
If the event assignment for this output has been set to
zero (all areas), then the output will only operate when
all areas have been armed in the Part 2 On mode and will
reset as soon as any area is disarmed.
8-5
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Output Programming
26 – Entry Timing
This event type will cause the output to operate while
either Entry Timer 1, Entry Timer 2 or the Part Mode Entry
Timer is active. The output will reset when the entry
timer expires or the corresponding area is disarmed.
32 – Ready To Arm All On
This event type will cause the output to operate when
the area is disarmed and all zones in the area are sealled.
The output will reset when the area is armed or when a
zone becomes unsealed.
27 – Exit Timing
This event type will cause the output to operate while
Exit Timer is active. The output will reset when the exit
timer expires or the corresponding area is disarmed.
If the event assignment for this output is set to zero (all
areas), then the output will only operate if all areas are
disarmed and all zones are sealed. The output will reset if
any area is armed or if any zone becomes unsealed.
28 – End Of Exit Time
This event type will cause the output to operate
when the Exit Time expires and will reset when the
corresponding area is disarmed.
29 – Chime On
This event type will cause the output to operate when
Chime Mode is activated and will reset when Chime
Mode is turned off.
If the event assignment for this output is set to zero (all
areas), then the output will operate as soon as Chime
Mode is activated in any area and will reset when Chime
Mode is turned off in all areas.
30 - Chime Zone Trigger
This event type will cause the output to operate when
a specific Chime Zone is triggered and reset when the
Chime Zone reseals.
If the event assignment for this output is set to zero (all
areas), then the output will operate as soon as any chime
zone is triggered provided that Chime Mode is on in
those areas. The output will reset when all Chime Zones
are resealed. For this event type to work Chime Mode
must be turned on. See MENU 2-0-5 — Chime On/Off
It also allows the output to reset when chime mode
is turned off by the user even if the chime zone is still
Note faulted. It also allows if one or more chime zones
remain faulted after the one shot timer has expired,
the output programmed for chime will operate or
retrigger if another chime zone becomes faulted.
i
31 – Auto Arm Pre Alert
This event type will cause the output to operate when
the Auto Arm Pre-Alert Timer is active and will reset
when the Pre-Alert Timer expires or a valid user code is
entered.
i
Note
The output will also reset when the auto arm prealert time has been delayed by by the user .
33 – Ready To Part Arm
This event type will cause the output to operate when
the area is disarmed and all zones in the area which are
to be monitored in Part On mode are sealed. The output
will reset when the area is armed or when a Part On zone
becomes unsealled.
If the event assignment for this output is set to zero (all
areas), then the output will only operate if all areas are
disarmed and all Part On zones are sealed. The output
will reset if any area is armed or if any Part On zone
becomes unsealed.
34 – Ready To Part 2 Arm
This event type will cause the output to operate when
the area is disarmed and all zones in the area which
are to be monitored in Part 2 On mode are sealled. The
output will reset when the area is armed or when a Part 2
On zone becomes unsealed.
If the event assignment for this output is set to zero (all
areas), then the output will only operate if all areas are
disarmed and all Part 2 On zones are sealed. The output
will reset if any area is armed or if any Part 2 On zone
becomes unsealed.
35 – Close Sent OK
This event type will cause the output to operate when
the Closing report has been acknowledged (Kissed-Off )
by the control room receiver. The output will reset when
the area is disarmed. If the output has been assigned to
multiple areas then it will only reset when all areas have
been disarmed.
36 – External Audible
This event type will cause the output to operate when
any audible alarm occurs. The output will reset when the
system or area is disarmed.
This event type will also generate speaker beeps
when the system or area is armed via a RF Keyfob, the
Programmable Input Terminal or Keyswitch zone.
™™ 1 beep when the area is disarmed
™™ 2 beeps when the area is armed All On
™™ 3 beeps when the area is armed Part On
8-6
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Output Programming
37 – Internal Audible
This event type will cause the output to operate when
any audible alarm occurs. The output will reset when
the system or area is disarmed. No speaker beeps are
generated for this event type.
38 – Any Zone Alarm
This event type will cause the output to operate when
any silent or audible alarm occurs. The output will reset
when the system or area is disarmed
39 – Fire Alarm
This event type will cause the output to operate when
any audible fire zone or keypad emergency fire alarm
occurs. The output will reset when the system or area is
disarmed.
40 – Burglary Alarm
This event type will cause the output to operate when
any audible burglary alarm (including keypad emergency
panic, medical and tamper alarm) occurs. The output will
reset when the system or area is disarmed.
41 – Silent Alarm
This event type will cause the output to operate when
any silent alarm occurs (including silent fire and silent
keypad emergency alarms). The output will reset when
the system or area is disarmed.
42 – Duress Alarm
This event type will cause the output to operate when a
user initiates a Duress alarm.
43 – Keypad Medical
This event type will cause the output to operate when a
silent or audible medical alarm has been initiated from
the keypad. The output will reset when the system or
area is disarmed.
To initiate a medical emergency via the keypad,
simultaneously press and hold the [7] and [9] keys for 2
seconds.
44 – Keypad Fire
This event type will cause the output to operate when
a silent or audible fire alarm has been initiated from the
keypad. The output will reset when the system or area is
disarmed.
To initiate a panic emergency via the keypad,
simultaneously press and hold [1] and [3] keys.
46 – Device Tamper
This event type will cause the output to operate when
the tamper circuit on the rear of the keypad is triggered.
The output will reset when a valid user PIN is entered.
47 – Access Denied
This event type will trigger if you attempt to enter an
incorrect code more times than programmed in the pin
retry count location. The event assignment will be the
area number for this event type.
48 – Strobe
This event type is used to operate a stobe warning light.
The output can be made to operate when any of the
following events occur. At leaset one strobe event must
be selected for this output type to operate. See MENU
2-1-5 — Strobe Trigger option.
Strobe trigger options include:
™™ = Audible Burglary Alarm
™™ = Silent Burglary Alarm
™™ = Fire Alarm
™™ = Arm/Disarm Flash Via RF Keyfob
™™ = Arm/Disarm Flash Via Keyswitch or PGM Input
™™ = 24-Hour Alarm
49 – Smoke Sensor GND
This output is used to allow smoke detectors to be
automatically reset when the system is disarmed. You
should connect the GND terminal of all smoke detectors
in the system to outputs which are set to this event type.
For this output type to perform correctly you should
program the output polarity as type 11 - Normally
Low One Shot Open and program the output time
parameter to be 5 seconds. The smoke sensor needs to
be connected to a zone input programmed as fire.
If fire alarm verification is required, we recommend that
you program the zone pulse count tor 2 pulses and the
pulse count time to 90 seconds for each fire zone.
To initiate a fire emergency via the keypad,
simultaneously press and and hold the [4] and [6] keys
for 2 seconds.
50 – Sensor Watch
This event type will cause the output to operate when
a zone sensor watch fault has occured. The output will
reset when the system or area in armed. See MENU 3-18 — Zone Options in Section 7 - Input Programming for
more information on Sensor Watch.
45 – Keypad Panic
This event type will cause the output to operate when a
silent or audible panic alarm has been initiated from the
keypad. The output will reset when the system or area is
disarmed.
51 – Senior Watch
This event type will cause the output to operate when
a Senior Watch fault has occured. See MENU 2-1-2 —
Input Options in Section 6 - Area Programming for more
information on Senior Watch.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
8-7
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Output Programming
52 – Exit Error
This event type will cause the output to operate when a
Entry/Exit Delay zone becomes unsealed during exit time
and remains unsealed when the exit time expires. The
output will reset when the system is disarmed.
61 - Door Open Too Long
This output will turn on when the control panel has
detected that the zone assigned to the door has not
returned to normal before the end of the door open too
long time.
53 – Keyfob Function 1
This event type will cause the output to operate when
Key X is pressed on the Keyfob. This output type is area
specific and requires a 4 button keyfob.
71 - CLI Trigger
The output will turn on when the control panel has
detected an incoming call with a telephone number
programmed in Trigger Table 1 or Trigger Table 2.
54 – Keyfob Function 2
This event type will cause the output to operate when
Key Y is pressed on the Keyfob. This output type is area
specific and requires a 4 button keyfob.
71 - GSM Signal Lost
The output is triggered whenever the radio is
not registered on the GSM network and restores
automatically on exiting programming mode or when
the radio resumes its connection with the network.
55 – Output In PreDelay
This event type will cause the output to operate when a
pre-delay timer is active on a different output set with a
polarity type of 01 (Normally Open, Going Low With Pre
Delay) or polarity type 08 (Normally Low, Going Open
With Pre Delay).
56 – Follow PIN Code
This event type will cause the output to operate when a
specified user PIN is entered via the keypad or when the
corresponding user’s keyfob or token is used.
73 - GPRS Failure
The output is triggered when communication to
the GPRS network is lost and data can no longer be
transferred between the radio and the APN (Access Point
Name). It restores automatically on exiting programming
mode or once data transmission resumes between the
radio and the APN.
74 - Ethernet Fail
You should program the User whose PIN is to be followed
into the Event Assignment for this output.
57 – Part Entry Time
This event type will cause the output to operate when
the Part Entry timer is active and will reset when Part
Entry time expires.
58 – TimeZones
This event type will cause the output to operate when a
specific time zone occurs. The output event assignment
programs which time zone to follow.
59 – Temperature Hi/Lo
This event type will cause the output to operate when
the keypad temperature increases above the maximum
or falls below the minimum set temperature. The output
will reset when the temperature reads between the
maximum and minimum values.
See MENU 7-7-3 — Keypad Hi/Lo Temp in Section 11 System Programming
60 – Door
This event type will cause the output to operate when a
user assigned to the same door swipes their token. The
prox reader must be assigned to the same door group as
the output and user.
The Event Assignment is the Access Group Number.
8-8
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Output Programming
Outputs > Properties >
Event Assignment

MENU 4-1-2
0
(A) =
0
(P) = Control Panel
Output Assignment
Assign to Output 1 to 40 (0 = Any Output)
(Z) =
Zone Assignment
Assign to Zone 1 to 144 (0 = Any Zone)
(U) =
User Assignment
Assign to User 1 to 255 (0 = Any User)
TimeZone Assignment
(TZ) =
Assign to TimeZone 1 to 16 (0 = Any TimeZone)
(Dr) =
Door Assignment
(Assign to Door 1 to 16 (0 = Any Door)
Keypad Assignment
(K) = Assign to Keypad/LAN Reader 1 to 16 (0 = Any Keypad/
LAN Reader)
(T) =
CLI Table Assignment
Assign to CLI Table 1 to 2 (0 = Any CLI Table)
Reporting Destination Assignment
(D) =
Assign to Destination 1 or 2 (0 = Any Destination)
CLI Trigger Table
(CLI)
Assign to CLI Trigger Table 1 or 2 (0 = Both Tables)
(Mac)
Macro
Assign to Macro
This menu allows you to assign the output event to an
individual area, user, zone or door etc. Programming a
zero will assign the output event to follow any area, user,
zone or door etc depending on the event type.
Refer to Output Event Type Table for a complete listing of
available options.
1) Press [MENU] + [4] + [1] + [2] and select the output
you want to operate from the list then press [OK].
Alternatively, you can directly enter the output
number then press [OK]. The keypad will display
the current Event Assignment.
Event Assignment Op1
00 - All Areas
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to select the
Output Event Assignment then press [OK] to save
and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI

MENU 4-1-3
0
0
Area Assignment
Assign to Area 1 to 8 (0 = Any Area)
(O) =
Outputs > Properties >
Output Polarity
00 - Open To Low
01 - Open To Low + Pre
02 - Open Latching Low
03 - Open Pulsing Low
04 - Open 1 Shot Low
05 - 1 Shot Low+Retrigger
06 - 1 Shot Low + Reset
07 - Low To Open
0
08 - Low To Open + Pre
09 - Low Latching Open
10 - Low Pulsing Open
11 - Low 1 Shot Open
12 - 1 Shot Open+Retrigger
13 - 1 Shot Open + Reset
14 - Speaker Output
15 - Toggle
The output polarity programs how the output will operate.
Only one option (0 – 15) can be programmed per output.
See the Output Polarity description for more detailled
information.
1) Press [MENU] + [4] + [1] + [3] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the output in the list and
press [OK]. The keypad will display the current
output polarity.
Output Polarity Op1
14 - Speaker Output
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to select the
Output Polarity required then press [OK] to save
and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
Open To Low
Output is normally open circuit and switches to GND
when the event occurs. The output will reset when the
output event restores. Time parameters do not apply to
this polarity type.
Open To Low + Pre
Output is normally open circuit and switches to GND
when the event occurs provided the time parameter has
expired. The output will reset when the output event
restores. Time parameters will only set the Pre Delay
when this polarity is selected.
Open Latching Low
Output is normally open circuit and will switch to zero
volts when the event occurs. The output can only be
reset manually using the Output Command Menu.
Open Pulsing Low
Output is normally open circuit and will pulse LOW when
the event occurs. The output will reset when the output
event restores. Use the Time Parameter to set the pulse
duration.
8-9
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Output Programming
Open 1 Shot Low
Output is normally open circuit and switches to GND
when the event occurs. The output will only reset
when the time specified in the Time Parameter expires.
The output will run for the full duration and cannot be
manually reset.
1 Shot Low+Retrigger
Output is normally open circuit and switches to GND
when the event occurs. The output will retrigger each
time the event occurs. The output will reset when the
one shot time has expired.
This polarity is ideally suited for security lighting control.
A sensor can be used to trigger an output event and then
each time the sensor triggers, the output will operate.
The light will turn off when the one shot timer expires.
1 Shot Low + Reset
Output is normally open circuit and will switch to GND
when the event occurs. The output will reset when the
one shot timer expires or when the event has restored.
This means the operation of the output can be shortened
based on the event and or the programmed time
parameter.
Low To Open
Output is normally GND and will switch to open circuit
when the event occurs. The output will reset when the
output event restores. Time parameters do not apply to
this polarity type.
Low To Open + Pre
Output is normally GND and will switch to open circuit
when the event occurs provided the time parameter has
expired. The output will reset when the output event
restores. Time parameters will only set the Pre Delay
when this polarity is selected.
Low Latching Open
Output is normally GND and will switch to open circuit
when the event occurs. The output can only be reset
maually usning the output Command Menu.
Low Pulsing Open
Output is normally LOW and will pulse OPEN when the
event occurs. The output will reset when the output
event restores. Use the Time Parameter to set the pulse
duration.
Low 1 Shot Open
Output is normally LOW and will switch to open circuit
when the event occurs. The output will only reset
when the time specified in the Time Parameter expires.
The output will run for the full duration and cannot be
manually reset.
8-10
1 Shot Open+Retrigger
Output is normally LOW and will switch to open circuit
when the event occurs. The output will retrigger each
time the event occurs. The output will reset when the
one shot time has expired.
1 Shot Open + Reset
Output is normally LOW and will switch to open circuit
when the event occurs. The output will reset when the
one shot timer expires or the event has restored. This
means the operation of the output can be shortened
based on the event and or the programmed time
parameter.
Speaker Output
This polarity can only be used for Output 1 and Output 2
when a horn speaker has been connected.
Toggle
This polarity allows the output to turn on when the event
occurs. The output will toggle off when the event occurs
again. This polarity does not follow any time parameters.
TIMED OUTPUTS
Outputs > Properties >
Time Parameter
0
0 0
Hour

0 0 0
Minute
0 0 0
Seconds
MENU 4-1-4
0 0 0
10th Sec
The time base parameter is only applicable for output
types that are programmed as one shot or pulsing.
Program 0 to 255 for each of the units (Hour, Minute,
Seconds and 10th of a Second) for the time parameter. If
required, add the units together to give the total one shot
time or pulsing on/off time.
1) Press [MENU] + [4] + [1] + [4] and select the output
you want to program from the list then press [OK].
Alternatively, you can directly enter the output
number then press [OK].
2) Using the numeric keys, enter the length of time for
each parameter. If required, use the [←] and [→]
keys to move the cursor left and right between
each time parameter.
Output Timing Op1
Hrs
Mins
Sec
Tenth
000
005
000
000
Press  OK to SAVE
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Output Programming
One Shot Mode
The time base is the length of time that the output will
operate. For Example you may want a strobe output
to operate for 1 hour, Either of the examples below will
achieve the 1 hour time.
Total Time
Hour
Minute
Seconds
10th Sec
60 Minutes
001
000
000
000
60 Minutes
000
060
000
000
Table 22: Example - Output One Shot Timer
Pulsing Mode
The time base is the unit of time that the output will pulse
on and off. If the time base is programmed for 60 seconds,
the output will pulse on for 60 seconds and then off for 60
seconds (repeat) until the output is reset.
Outputs > Properties >
Output Options

MENU 4-1-5
1
Off On Low Battery
Y
2
Guest Control
N
3
Reserved
N
4
Monitor Overload
Y
5
Monitor Device Fail
Y
6
Alarm On Device Fail
N
7
Block If All On
N
8
Show Status On Keypad
N
1) Press [MENU] + [4] + [1] + [5] and select the output
you want to program from the list then press [OK].
Alternatively, you can directly enter the output
number then press [OK].
view and alter the state of the output without the need
of a PIN. To simply turn on or off guest control outputs,
press the [←] key.
Monitor Overload
Monitor Overload when selected will monitor the output
for an overload condition and display as well as report if
an overload condition occurs. The event will always be
logged regardless if enabled or not.
Monitor Device Fail
Monitor device fail when selected will monitor the
output for a disconnection condition and display as well
as report when a disconnection occurs.
Alarm On Device Fail
This option causes the panel to sound an alarm when
the output device becomes missing (armed or disarmed
state).
Block If All On
This option prevents the output from turning on when
the corresponding area is turned All On. When the area
is off, Part On or Part 2 On, the output can again operate
when the output event occurs.
Show Status On Keypad
This option allows the keypad to display the output that
is currently active on the keypad.
Outputs > Properties >
Macro Group

MENU 4-1-6
Reserved
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
 Off On Low Battery
Guest Control
Reserved
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Off On Low Battery
This option forces the control panel
not to operate the output when a low battery or missing
battery condition is in effect. Once the low battery
condition restores, the output will return to normal
operation.
Guest Control
Guest control when enabled allows the output to be
controlled from the quick select menu on the keypad
which is a simple pull down menu. This allows you to
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
8-11
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Output Programming
D O O R CO N T R O L
Outputs > Door Properties >
Outputs > Door Properties >
Door Name
Unlock TimeZone
D o o r
1
-
MENU 4-2-0
N a m e
This menu allows you to program the name for each
output. Door names can be up to 20 characters long.
1) Press [MENU] + [4] + [2] + [0] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the door in the list then
press [OK]. Alternatively, you can enter the door
number directly and press [OK].
2) Use the arrow and number keys to move and
change text. When the door name is complete,
press [OK]. At any time you can press the [OFF] key
to clear the text from the current cursor position to
the end of the line. .
Door Name Dr1
Door 1 Name
Press  OK to SAVE
See Alpha Text Programming in Section 4 —
Programming Overview for further detail on entering
Note alpha text.
i

MENU 4-2-2
0
00 - Disabled
01 - 24 Hour TimeZone
02 - TimeZone 2 Name
03 - TimeZone 3 Name
04 - TimeZone 4 Name
05 - TimeZone 5 Name
06 - TimeZone 6 Name
07 - TimeZone 7 Name
08 - TimeZone 8 Name
0
09 - TimeZone 9 Name
10 - TimeZone 10 Name
11 - TimeZone 11 Name
12 - TimeZone 12 Name
13 - TimeZone 13 Name
14 - TimeZone 14 Name
15 - TimeZone 15 Name
16 - TimeZone 16 Name
The unlock timezone is used to control the output which
is assigned to operate the door lock. When the timezone
is true, the output assigned to the corresponding door will
be activated. Options area provided to stop the door from
automatically operating if an area is armed or no users on
site. The list of doors will appear, move the cursor over the
door you wish to select and press the OK key.
1) Enter [MENU] + [4] + [2] + [2]. The list of doors will
appear, move the cursor over the door you wish to
select and press the [OK] key.
Unlock TimeZone Dr1
00 - Disabled
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Use the arrow or number keys to select the time
zone that you want the door to follow, then press
[OK] to save and exit.
8-12
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Output Programming
Outputs > Door Properties >
Door Options
OUTPUT TESTING

MENU 4-2-3
1
Hold Off If Area Armed
Y
2
Hold Off Auto Unlock
N
3
Reserved
N
4
Report Door Forced
N
5
Alarm Door Forced
N
6
Reserved
N
7
Reserved
N
8
Reserved
N
1) Press [MENU] + [4] + [2] + [3] and select the door
you want to program from the list then press [OK].
Alternatively, you can directly enter the door
number then press [OK].
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option, then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
 Hold Off If Area Armed
Hold Off Auto Unlock
Release On Fire Alarm
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
Outputs > Output Testing >
External Siren Test
-
MENU 4-9-0
This menu allows you to test the operation of any output
programmed as event type 36 (External Audible) or Event
Type 36 (Fire Alarm) for 5 seconds.
1) Enter [MENU] + [4] + [9] + [0] and select the area
you want to test the external sirens in from the list
then press [OK].
A1 Security System
A2 Area 2 Name
A3 Area 3 Name
Press  OK or MENU
2) Any outputs programmed for event type 36 or 39 in
the chosen area will now operate. The keypad will
display the following during the siren test.
External Audible Testing
Press any key to abort
Press OK or MENU
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Hold Off If Area Armed
This option when enabled and used in conjunction with
a timezone assigned under the door control menu will
stop the door from unlocking if the area behind the door
is armed. This is very useful in cases where the holiday
list may not have been kept up to date.
Hold Off Auto Unlock
This option when selected will delay the automatic
unlocking until a valid user has presented his card after
the timezone unlocking (gate opening) time..
3) When the siren test is complete, the keypad will
display the following:
Testing Complete. Press
OK to continue
Press OK or MENU
4) Press [OK] to exit.
Report Door Forced
This option when turned on will enable the Door Forced
Open event to be reported as an access event. It will
also appear in the keypad display as an alarm condition
identifying the door 'ALARM Door 1 Name'.
Alarm Door Forced
This otpion when turned on will enable the Door Forced
Open event to cause an alarm condition and sound the
alarm sirens. It will also appear in the keypad display as
an alarm condition identifying the door 'ALARM Door 1
Name'. To silence this alarm, you must enter a valid PIN at
the keypad.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
8-13
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Output Programming
Outputs > Output Testing >
Internal Siren Test
-
MENU 4-9-1
This menu allows you to test any output programmed
as event type 37 (Internal Audible) or event type 39 (Fire
Alarm) for 5 seconds.
1) Enter [MENU] + [4] + [9] + [1] and select the area
you want to test the internal sirens in from the list
then press [OK].
A1 Security System
A2 Area 2 Name
A3 Area 3 Name
Press  OK or MENU
2) Any outputs programmed for event type 37 or 39 in
the chosen area will now operate. The keypad will
display the following during the siren test.
Internal Audible Testing
Press any key to abort
Outputs > Output Testing >
Fire Siren Test
-
MENU 4-9-3
This menu allows you to test any output programmed as
event type 39 (Fire Alarm) for 5 seconds.
1) Enter [MENU] + [4] + [9] + [3] and select the area
you want to test the internal sirens in from the list
then press [OK].
A1 Security System
A2 Area 2 Name
A3 Area 3 Name
Press  OK or MENU
2) Any outputs programmed for event type 39 in the
chosen area will now operate. The keypad will
display the following during the siren test.
Fire Audible Testing
Press any key to abort
Press OK or MENU
3) When the bell test is complete, the keypad will
display the testing complete message.
Testing Complete. Press
OK to continue
Press OK or MENU
3) When the bell test is complete, the keypad will
display the testing complete message.
Testing Complete. Press
OK to continue
Press OK or MENU
Press OK or MENU
4) Press [OK] to exit.
Outputs > Output Testing >
Strobe Test
3) Check and verify that the strobe lights are working
correctly then press [OK] to end the test.
4) Press [OK] to exit.
-
MENU 4-9-2
This menu allows you to test the any outputs programmed
as event type 48, Strobe light. This test is not timed and
needs to be manually stopped when testing is completed.
1) Enter [MENU] + [4] + [9] + [2] and select the area
you want to test the strobe lights in from the list
then press [OK].
A1 Security System
A2 Area 2 Name
A3 Area 3 Name
Press  OK or MENU
2) Any outputs programmed for event type 48 in the
chosen area will now operate. The keypad will
display the following during the strobe test.
Strobe Activated. Will
reset on exit
Press OK or MENU
8-14
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Output Programming
O U T P U T E V E N T T Y P E TA B L E
00 - Disabled
01 - Battery Trouble
02 - AC Trouble
03 - Telco Line Fail
04 - Comm Fail
05 - 3rd Dial Attempt
06 - Dest Reporting
07 - Disabled
08 - Dest Kiss Off
09 - User Keyfob Func 1
10 - User Keyfob Func 2
11 - Dialler Disabled
12 - Output Device Missing
13 - Output Trouble
14 - Panel On Line
15 - Incoming Call
16 - System Trouble
17 - Box Tamper
18 - Zone Trouble
19 - Zone Mirror
20 - Zone Alarm
21 - Area Disarmed
22 - Area Part Or All On
23 - Area All On
24 - Area Part On
25 - Area Part 2 On
(Ma) = Macro
(P) = Panel Event Assignment
(Ur) = User Event Assignment
(Kp) = Keypad
P
P
P
P
Rr
Rr
Rr
Rr
Ur
Ur
P
P
Op
P
P
P
Zn
Zn
Zn
A
A
A
A
A
A
26 - Entry Timing
27 - Exit Timing
28 - End Of Exit Time
29 - Chime On
30 - Chime Zone Trigger
31 - Auto Arm Pre Alert
32 - Ready To Arm All On
33 - Ready To Part Arm
34 - Ready To Part 2 Arm
35 - Close Sent OK
36 - External Audible
37 - Internal Audible
38 - Any Zone Alarm
39 - Fire Alarm
40 - Burglary Alarm
41 - Silent Alarm
42 - Duress Alarm
43 - Keypad Medical
44 - Keypad Fire
45 - Keypad Panic
46 - Device Tamper
47 - Access Denied
48 - Strobe
49 - Smoke Sensor GND
50 - Sensor Watch
51 - Senior Watch
Legend:
(CLI) = CLI Trigger Table
(Op) = Output Event Assignment
(Tz) = TimeZone Event Assignment
(Rr) = Reporting Destination
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
52 - Exit Error
53 - Keyfob Function 1
54 - Keyfob Function 2
55 - Output In PreDelay
56 - Follow PIN Code
57 - Part Entry Time
58 - TimeZones
59 - Temperature Hi/Lo
60 - Door
61 - Door Open Too Long
71 - CLI Trigger
72 - GSM Signal Lost
73 - GPRS Failure
74 - Ethernet Fail
75 - Macro
A
A
A
Op
Ur
A
Tz
Kp
Dr
Dr
CLI
P
P
P
Ma
(A) = Area Event Assignment
(Zn) = Zone Event Assignment
(Dr) = Door Group Event Assignment
Table 23: Output Event Types
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
8-15
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Output Programming
OUTPUT ASSIGNMENTS
Output Assignment
Address Setting
Module
Number SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5
Output Number
Control Panel
1 to 5
Virtual Outputs
6 to 8
1=
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
9 to 12
2=
ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
13 to 16
3=
OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
17 to 20
4=
ON
ON OFF OFF OFF
21 to 24
5=
OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
25 to 28
6=
ON OFF ON OFF OFF
29 to 32
7=
OFF ON
ON OFF OFF
33 to 36
8=
ON
ON OFF OFF
37 to 40
ON
Table 24: Address Configuration and Output Assignments
O U T P U T D E FAU LT TA B L E
The table below list the default values for all Output parameters in the Solution 144. Outputs 1 to 4 are High current
digital outputs and Output 5 is the onboard relay output. Outputs 9 to 40 are only available if the optional Output Relay
Expander Boards (CM710B) are fitted. Options marked N/A = Not Applicable.
Programming Option
Output Name
Event Type
Event Assignment
Output Polarity
Time Parameter
N° Of Hours
N° Of Minutes
N° Of Seconds
N° Of 1/10 Seconds
Output Options
Off On Low Battery
Guest Control
Reserved
Monitor Overload
Monitor Device Fail
Alarm On Device Fail
Block If All On
Show Status On Keypad
Output 1
Output 2
External
Siren
36
(External
Siren)
0
14
Speaker
Output
Strobe
Light
Output 3
Output 4
Output 5
Smoke Sensor
Internal
PWR
Siren
49
37
48
(Smoke Sensor
(Internal
(Strobe)
GND)
Siren)
0
0
0
11
6
6
1 Shot Low +
Low 1 Shot
1 Shot Low +
Reset
Open
Reset
Output 9 - 40
On Board
Output x Name
Relay
54
00
(Keyfob
(Not Used)
Function 2)
0
0
4
0
Open
Open 1 Shot
Low
To Low
000
005
000
000
008
000
000
000
000
000
010
000
000
005
000
000
000
000
002
000
000
000
000
000
Y
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
Y
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
N
Y
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Table 28: Output Default Table
8-16
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI

S EC TIO N 9
Comms Programming
T
he control panel has a built in dialler that connects
directly to a standard PSTN telephone line. To program
the dialler you must set the telephone number to dial and
then the reporting format to send the information in.
CO M M S P R O G R A M M I N G CO M M A N D S
The command menu allows you to set the Domestic
Numbers, initiate a Solution Link Upload / Download
session, turn on/off call forwarding.
This command allows you to initiate a modem call
to an off-site computer for programming changes or
updates. The off-site computer must be connected to
the telephone line that is programmed in the call back
telephone number and be set to wait for an incoming call
from the same customer that initiates the modem call.
There are two independent reporting routes that define
where a reportable event should be sent, by default all
events will report through route 1. Reportable events in
the system are categorised into Alarm, System, Emergency,
Open/Close and Test. This means that you are able to steer
these different event categories to different report routes.
A report route is just like an independent dialler, it has
its own primary and secondary telephone numbers and
reporting format.
Example: Route 1 = CID, Route 2 = SMS
If you set the reporting route for Open/Close as Route 2
and all other events to Route 1, then all reports will be sent
to route 1 in Contact ID format and then all open close
reports will be sent through SMS. This is very handy if you
want to monitor what time your children come home
from school or cleaners entering or leaving your premises.
Telephone numbers can be 32 digits long and characters
0-9 * # and , are supported with the comma representing a
2 second pause. Destination route 1 and route 2 both have
their own Primary and Secondary telephone numbers,
Domestic reporting has 3 telephone numbers and remote
access has one call back number.
There are two back to base monitoring formats called CID
and SIA, both formats are all predefined so the system will
always send the same reporting code for the same event.
The type of zone selected under zone type automatically
determines the reporting code to the base station. If a
zone is defined as Medical then when it goes into alarm
the report will be Medical Alarm, if a zone is programmed
as a Fire zone then the report will automatically be Fire
Alarm.
Comms > Commands >
Call/Answer RAS
--
MENU 5-0-1
If the phone is ringing and this command is enetered,
then the panel will answer the call and attempt to start a
Solution Link RAS session.
Comms > Commands >
Call Forward On/Off
-
MENU 5-0-2
This command allows you to turn on and off the call
forward feature. When you turn on call forwarding, the
panel will automatically activate and de-activate the call
forward on and call forward off sequence accordingly
when you turn Area 1 All On and Off (arm and disarm).
1) Enter [MENU] + [5] + [0] + [2]. If the call forward
status is OFF, the keypad will display:
Call Forward On/Off
Call Forward is OFF
To turn ON, Press ON.
To Go Back Press OK
If the call forward status is ON, the keypad will
display:
Call Forward On/Off
Call Forward is ON.
To Turn OFF, Press OFF.
To Go Back Press OK
2) To toggle call forward on, press the [ON] key or
press the [OFF] key to turn call forward off.
3) Press [OK] to save and exit, or press [MENU] to
cancel.
See MENU 5-1-6 and MENU 5-1-7 to program the
Call Forward ON and Call Forward OFF number
Note sequence.
i
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
9-1
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Comms Programming
Comms > Commands >
Check Web Email
-
MENU 5-0-3
Reserved
Comms > Commands >
Email System Log
-
MENU 5-0-4
Reserved
Comms > Commands >
Start Direct Link
-
MENU 5-0-5
This menu allows the installer or master user to start a
direct link session without the need to press and hold the
default button on the control panel.
1) Enter [MENU] + [5] + [0] + [5]. The keypad will
display the following:
Waiting for Direct Link
Attempt!
Press OK or MENU
Once the computer and control panel establishes a
connection, the command will automatically exit.
2) Press [OK] or [MENU] to exit.
Comms > Commands >
Voice Setup
-
MENU 5-0-6
This menu allows the master user to record their own
customised greeting and zone description message that
will be played back to users that are programmed to
receive domestic telephone calls from the alarm system.
These messages should be clear enough so that the user
receiving the telephone call from the control panel can
then take the appropriate action.
This feature requires an optional voice module to be
fitted to the control panel by your installer. Additional
programming information is included with the voice
module.
When answering an incoming voice call, the operations
are as follows:
[#]
[*] [*]
Acknowledge single message
Acknowledge all messages, hang up and leave in
cue for next person.
[*]
Acknowledge message and leave in the cue for
next person
PIN
[OFF]
Disarm the system and abort all pending voice
messages (except Open/Close)
Solution 144 Control Panel
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [0] + [6] + [OK].
Enter the telephone number of the mobile phone
you are using to record the messages from. (eg.
0411123456), then press the [OK] key. The alarm
system will now call the programmed number.Answer
the incoming call on the mobile telephone and you
will hear the following message;
Press 1 to play a message,
2 to record a message
or 3 to end.
2) The alarm keypad will display the available options
on the display awaiting your selection. Using the
alarm keypad enter the number corresponding to
the operation you want to perform.
Play Message
Record Message
Exit
PRESS  OK or MENU
3) Press [1] on the alarm keypad to playback and
listen to a message, or press [2] to record a new
message.
9-2
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Comms Programming
Playing Back A Message
Recording New Messages
4) The system will then prompt you to Enter the
message number followed by the [OK] key. Enter
the message number on the alarm keypad and
press the [OK] key.
To record a new message, follow the instructions in steps
1 to 3 above and then,
Zone 1 Message
Zone 2 Message
Zone 3 Message
Press  OK or MENU
Alternatively, you can use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys
to scroll to the message required, then press [OK] to
select.
For
the
best
results
when
recording
messages speak loudly and clearly into
Note the
mobile
phone
and
reduce
as
much
background
noise
as
possible.
We do not recommend recording using hands free
operation.
i
4) The system will then prompt you to Enter the
message number followed by the [OK] key. Enter the
message number on the alarm keypad and press
the [OK] key.
Refer to the voice module instruction sheet
for a complete list of the message numbers.
Zone 1 Message
Zone 2 Message
Zone 3 Message
Press  OK or MENU
The keypad will display the following below whilst
playing the current recorded message via the
telephone.
Playing
Zone 1 Message
Press OK or MENU
5) After the message has been played, the system will
automatically return to the main menu as shown in
step 5 above.
Alternatively, you can use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys
to scroll to the message required, then press [OK] to
select.
Refer to the voice module instruction sheet
for a complete list of the message numbers.
5) On the mobile phone you will hear a short beep
indicating that recording has begun. You should
now speak clearly into the mobile phone to record
the new message as required and press [OK] when
finished.
Recording
Zone 1 Message
Press OK or MENU
If the message duration expires before you finish
recording you will hear a long beep indicating that
recording has finished. If this happens you may need
to speak a little faster when recording or shorten the
actual message to fit in the available message space.
6) You should now follow the instructions to playback
the message. When you are happy with the newly
recorded message repeat the steps to customise
the remaining messages. If you would like to
overwrite or re-record the same message again
simply repeat the appropriate steps until you are
satisfied.
Currently it is not possible to
programmable
messages
back
Note factory default settings.
i
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
reset
to
the
the
9-3
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Comms Programming
Comms > Commands >
-
Register Customer
MENU 5-0-8
Comms > Telephone Numbers >
Destination 1
-
MENU 5-1-1
1
Digits
32
1
Digits
32
1
Digits
32
1
Digits
32
1
Digits
32
Phone 1
Reserved
Comms > Commands >
Register Installer

MENU 5-0-9
Phone 2
Phone 3
Reserved
Phone 4
PHONE NUMBER PROGRAMMING
Comms > Telephone Numbers >
Number Prefix
1

MENU 5-1-0
Digits
32
The number prefix allows you to program the customer
account number and pass code (PIN) to access the
telephone line exchange when using a pre-paid telephone
account (e.g. Telstra Communic8 Pre-Paid Home account),
or when a number followed by a pause is required to get
an outside line on a PABX system.
The number prefix is global for all telephone numbers
programmed in both Destination 1 and Destination 2
(including the domestic telephone numbers and call
forward sequences). the prefix will be dialled immediately
before the number.
1) Enter [MENU] + [5] + [1] + [0]. The keypad will
display the current Telco Number Prefix.
Number Prefix
Press  OK to SAVE
2) Using the numeric keys, enter all the digits of the
telephone number prefix. You can change a single
digit by scrolling the cursor left or right. For special
characters including, pause, * or #, use the up and
down arrow keys.
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Phone 5
This menu sets the primary telephone number for Report
Destination 1. This will typically be the primary base
station receiver number. The master code user can only
change telephone numbers when the destination is set to
report in domestic format, voice format or SMS format.
1) Enter [MENU] + [5] + [1] + [1].
If the control panel is not programmed to report using
one of the self monitoring formats, the keypad will
display the following:
Reporting format does
not allow user changes.
Contact installer for
further information
2) If the control panel has been configured to report
via a self monitoring format, the keypad will
display information for telephone number 1.
Phone
Phone
Phone
Press
1= 0453287306
2=
3=
 OK or MENU
3) Use the [] and [] keys to select the phone number
to add or change, then press [OK] to select.
The keypad will display the following:
Destination 1 Phone 1
0453287306_
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
4) Use the [] and [] keys to scroll the cursor left
and right across the phone number. Use the []
and [] keys to change the individual digit in the
number or press the [OFF] key to clear the whole
number and then enter the new number using the
[0]-[9] keys.
9-4
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Comms Programming
5) Press [OK] to save and exit, or press [MENU] to
cancel.
Comms > Telephone Numbers >
Destination 2
1
-
Digits
MENU 5-1-2
4) Use the [] and [] keys to scroll the cursor left
and right across the phone number. Use the []
and [] keys to change the individual digit in the
number or press the [OFF] key to clear the whole
number and then enter the new number using the
[0]-[9] keys.
32
Phone 1
1
Digits
32
1
Digits
32
1
Digits
32
Phone 2
Phone 3
5) Press [OK] to save and exit, or press [MENU] to
cancel.
Comms > Telephone Numbers >
Call Forward On
1
•
Phone 4
1
Digits
32
Phone 5
This menu sets the primary telephone number for Report
Destination 2. This will typically be the primary base
station receiver number. The master code user can only
change telephone numbers when the destination is set to
report in domestic format, voice format or SMS format.
1) Enter [MENU] + [5] + [1] + [2].
If the control panel is not programmed to report using
one of the self monitoring formats, the keypad will
display the following:
Reporting format does
not allow user changes.
Contact installer for
further information
2) If the control panel has been configured to report
via a self monitoring format, the keypad will
display information for telephone number 1.
Phone
Phone
Phone
Press
1= 0453287306
2=
3=
 OK or MENU
3) Use the [] and [] keys to select the phone number
to add or change, then press [OK] to select.
The keypad will display the following:
Destination 2 Phone 1
0453287306_
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
-
MENU 5-1-6
Digits
6
1
,
*
2
0
32
#
The panel is able to activate certain Telco services such
as Call Forwarding when the system is armed. Call
forwarding means that your customer will no longer need
to remember to manually activate the Call Forward On
feature via the telephone before leaving.
MENU 5-1-6 allows you to program the Call Forward
On number sequence. When armed the panel will
automatically seize the phone line and dial the number
sequence and then hang up.
In Australia, a typical sequence for activating the CallForward On feature (All Calls) might be:
*61 0416123456 *20 #
*61 diversion type - Call Forward On Immediate.
0416123456 Telephone number that you want calls
to be diverted to. Example shows mobile
number.
*20 20 second delay
# end of sequence
1) Enter [MENU] + [5] + [1] + [6]. The keypad will
display any current Call Forward sequnces.
Call Forward On
*61,*20#
Press  OK to SAVE
2) Using the numeric keys, enter all digits for the
sequence. You can change a single digit by scrolling
the cursor left or right. For special characters
including, pause, * or #, use the up and down
arrow keys.
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
9-5
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Comms Programming
Comms > Telephone Numbers >
Call Forward Off
1
#
CO M M S P R O P E R T I E S
-
MENU 5-1-7
Digits
6
1
32
Comms > Properties >
Call Attempt Count

MENU 5-2-0
0
#
The panel is also able to deactivate certain Telco services
such as Call Forwarding when the system is disarmed.
This means that your customer will no longer need to
remember to manually deactivate Call Forwarding when
they disarm the system.
MENU 5-1-7 allows you to program the Call Forward
Off number sequence. When disarmed the panel will
automatically seize the phone line and dial the number
sequence and then hang up.
In Australia, a typical sequence for deactivating the CallForward On feature (All Calls) might be:
6
This menu programs the maximum number of call
attempts the panel will make per destination in order to
deliver the report signal.
At factory default, the maximum number of call attempts
per event is 6 when reporting to a single destination and
12 attempts when reporting to 2 destinations. (6 attempts
per destination)
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [2] + [0]. The keypad will
display the current number of call attempts per
destination. (Default = 6).
Call Attempt Count
#61 #
#61 = diversion type - Call Forward On Immediate - Disable.
# = end of sequence
1) Enter [MENU] + [5] + [1] + [7]. The keypad will
display any current Call Forward Off sequences.
Call Forward Off
#61#
Press  OK to SAVE
6
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Using the numeric keys, enter the required number
of call attempts per destination.Valid entries are 1
to 10. 0 = reporting disabled
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
i
Note
Setting the Call Attempt count to zero will disable all
reporting for Destination 1 and Destination 2
2) Using the numeric keys, enter all digits for the
sequence. You can change a single digit by scrolling
the cursor left or right. For special characters
including, pause, * or #, use the up and down
arrow keys.
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
9-6
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Comms Programming
Comms > Properties >
Dialler Options

MENU 5-2-1
1
Dialler Enabled
Y
2
Pulse Dialling
N
3
Dial Tone Detect
Y
4
Busy Tone Detect
N
5
Mirror Report To Web
Y
6
Extend H/S To 1min
N
7
Reserved
N
8
Abort Failed Reports
Y
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [2] + [1]. The keypad will
display the current Dialler Options.
 Dialler Enabled
Pulse Dialling
 Dial Tone Detect
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Dialler Enabled
This option enables the dialler reporting function. When
disabled, all dialler reporting will stop.
Pulse Dialling
This option will configure the panel to use pulse or
decadic dialling rather than tone or DTMF dialling. DTMF
dialling should always be used unless the telephone
network you are communicating on does not support it.
Dial Tone Detect
This option configures the panel to start dialling as soon
as it detects dial tone on the line. This can speed up the
dialing process by up to 3 seconds. If no tone is detected
the panel will blind dial after 4 seconds.
If this option is disabled the panel will blind dial.
Busy Tone Detect
This option configures the panel to detect busy tone. If a
busy tone is detected during the dialling sequence, the
panel will immediatly hang up and move on to the next
number in the sequence in an attempt to get the report
through as quickly as possible.
If this option is disabled, the panel will wait for a period
of 30 seconds before dialling the next telephone number
in the sequence. The 30 second timer starts when the
first digit of the first telephone number is dialled.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Mirror Report WEB
Reserved.
Extend H/S To 1min
This option sets the panel to wait for up to 60 seconds
to receive a valid handshake signal from the base station
receiver. The handshake tone indicates to the panel
that it has reached the security company’s base station
receiver and can now send it’s pending reports.
If this option is disabled the handshake wait time will
default to 30 seconds.
Abort Failled Reports
Setting this option will cause a failled report to be
flagged in the log and no further reports will be made for
that event.
i
Note
A report will be failled if the number of programmed
dial attempts has been reached .
Comms > Properties >
Phone Line Options

MENU 5-2-2
1
Display Line Fail
Y
2
Report Line Fail
Y
3
Alarm L/Fail If On
Y
4
Alarm L/Fail If Off
N
5
Reserved
N
6
Reserved
N
7
Reserved
N
8
Display On Line
N
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [2] + [2]. The keypad will
display the current Phone Line Options.
 Display Line Fail
 Report Line Fail
 Alarm L/Fail If On
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Display Line Fail
This option sets the panel to display a trouble signal on
the keypad display when the panel detects a teleco line
fail condition.
Report Line Fail
This option sets the panel to send a line fail report
when it detects a telco line fail condition. If configured,
9-7
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Comms Programming
the panel is able to report this signal via an alternative
reporting method such as the GSM cellular network.
Comms > Properties >
Country
If no alternative route exists then the panel will send the
signal and restore when the PSTN line is reconnected.
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
Ln1 AUSTRALIA
Ln9 CZECH REPUBLIC
Alarm L/Fail If On
This option sets the panel to trigger an alarm when the
telco line fails provided that the area is turned All On or
Part On. In a multi-area system this option is global and
will be triggered if only one area in the system is in the
armed state. The alarm will continue to sound until a
valid PIN is entered or the siren timer expires.
Ln2 NEW ZEALAND
Ln10 POLAND
Ln3 ITALY
Ln11 TURKEY
Ln4 GREECE
Ln12 CHINA
Ln5 CYPRUS
Ln13 HONG KONG
Ln6 SPAIN
Ln14 MALAYSIA
Ln7 PORTUGAL
Ln15 BRAZIL
Alarm L/Fail If Off
This option sets the panel to trigger an alarm when the
telco line fails provided that the area is turned OFF or
disarmed. In a multi-area system this option is global and
will be triggered if only one area in the system is in the
disarmed state. The alarm will continue to sound until a
valid PIN is entered or the siren timer expires.
Display On Line
This option allows the keypad to display Phone In Use
when the telephone line has been looped by the control
panel for either incoming or outgoing calls. If this option
is disabled, no indication is provided on the keypad.
The dialler status indicator LED located on the main
panel will always show the status of the dialler. See
Note Section 3 - Wiring Diagrams for more information.
i

MENU 5-2-3
0
1
Ln8 HUNGARY
This menu automatically sets the dialling parameters
including dial and busy tones etc. for the country the
panel is working in.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [2] + [3]. The keypad will
display the currently selected country. The default
country is Australia.
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to select the
appropriate country then Press [OK].
Ln1 AUSTRALIA
Ln2 NEW ZEALAND
Ln3 ITALY
Press  OK or MENU
3) Press [OK] to confirm and save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
WARNING: Press OK to set
dialler to
AUSTRALIA
For correct dialler operation, you must make sure
that the correct country selection is made for your
Note location. If your country is not listed here please
contact your distibutor.
i
9-8
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Comms Programming
Comms > Properties >
Set SMS Password
p
a
s
s
w

MENU 5-2-7
Comms > Remote Access >
Call Back Number
1
d
This menu sets the SMS password which is required
whenever SMS reporting is selected. The password will
typically be defined by the service provider or Telco carrier
who you are using to route the message.

MENU 5-3-0
Digits
32
By default the SMS password is set to suit the Telstra
Network in Australia.
This menu sets the call back telephone number which can
be used to establish a Solution Link RAS connection to the
panel for remote programming. The remote computers
modem should be connected to this number and Solution
Link should be set to wait for an incomming call.
1) Enter [MENU] + [5]+[2]+[7]. The keypad will display
the current SMS password.
The installer or customer can force the panel to dial this
number by entering MENU 5-0-1.
2) Use the arrow and number keys to move and
change text. When the password is complete, press
[OK]. At any time you can press the [OFF] key to
clear the text from the current cursor position to
the end of the line.
SMS Pager Password
passwd
Press  OK to SAVE
For higher security the panel can be configured to always
use this number for callback verification when establishing
a Solution Link remote access connection. The following
steps outline the callback procedure.
Step 1) Use Solution Link RAS to call panel from remote
computer.
Step 2) Panel will answer, acknowledge the request and
then hang up.
Step 3) Panel will then dial the callback number.
See Alpha Text Programming in Section 4 Programming Overview for further detail on entering
Note alpha text.
i
Step 4) Solution Link will answer the call and establish a
RAS session.
i
Note
See MENU 5-3-4 to force Callback Verification for
every RAS Session.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [3] + [0]. The keypad will
display the current Call Back telephone number if
programmed.
Call Back Number
Press  OK to SAVE
2) Using the numeric keys, enter all the digits of the
Call Back number. You can change a single digit by
scrolling the cursor left or right. For special
characters including, pause, * or #, use the up and
down arrow keys.
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
You must add any area codes or other special access
numbers which are required to be able to dial the
Note remote computer from the panel phone line. Simply
add these numbers before the Call Back number.
i
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
9-9
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Comms Programming
Comms > Remote Access >
RAS Security PIN

1
2
3
4
MENU 5-3-1
5
6
7
8
The RAS security PIN programmed here must match
the security PIN programmed in the customer file of the
Solution Link RAS upload/download database otherwise
a connection to the panel cannot be established.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [3] + [1]. The keypad will
display the current RAS Security PIN. The default =
12345678.
RAS Security PIN
Each time a Solution Link RAS session is established
with the panel, the log information will be uploaded
Note to the Solution Link database where it can be
reported on or archived for later use
i
Comms > Remote Access >
Ring Count

MENU 5-3-3
2
00 - No Answer
01 to 30 - Answer Ring Count
0
This menu sets the number of rings the panel will wait
until answering an incoming call. Programming a zero will
stop the panel from answering any incoming calls.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [3] + [3]. The keypad will
display the current ring count.
12345678
Press  OK to SAVE
Ring Count
2) Using the numeric keys, enter all the digits of the
new RAS security PIN. You can change a single digit
by scrolling the cursor left or right.
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Comms > Remote Access >
Log Threshold

MENU 5-3-2
7
0 %
The control panel can store up to 256 system events in its
built in history log. A newly installed panel will have 100%
of its log space available for new events (0% full). As the
panel starts to store events in the log, the capacity for new
events is reduced. The history log is 100% full when event
256 is stored in memory. Event 257 will start to overwrite
the oldest events in the log.
When the Log Threshold option is programmed, the panel
will send a ‘Log Threshold’ report to the base station when
the event log reaches the percentage as set since the last
Solution Link session.
If the event log reaches 100% capacity before a Solution
Link RAS session is established then the system will send a
‘Log Overflow’ report. The panel will also log these events
in its memory.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [3] + [2]. The keypad will
display the current threshold limit. The default is
70% full.
Log Threshold
070 Percents
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Using the numeric keys enter the new threshold
limit, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving. There is no need to
enter the % symbol.
9-10
20-20 Rings
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to select the
required ring count then Press [OK] to save and exit
or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
If answering machine bypass is required to allow a
Solution Link connection to be made without the
Note answering machine answering the call, see MENU
5-3-4 — Solution Link RAS Options
i
Comms > Remote Access >
RAS Options

MENU 5-3-4
1
RAS Allowed
Y
2
Callback Verify
N
3
Abort RAS On Alarm
Y
4
Answer Bypass
Y
5
Answer Only If Armed
N
6
Tone Bypass
Y
7
Allow User Functions
Y
8
Report RAS Sessions
Y
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [3] + [4]. The keypad will
display the current RAS options.
 RAS Allowed
Callback Verify
 Abort RAS On Alarm
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Comms Programming
RAS Allowed
This option allows you to configure the panel via the
Solution Link RAS upload/download software using a PC.
software and when the panel recognises them, it will
immediately seize the line away from the answering party
and the programming session will commence.
There are two different methods of connection avialable;
Allow User Functions
1) Direct Connect – via serial cable.
Setting this option allows access to user functions via
the RAS upload/download software. If this option is not
programmed, user functions will be disabled.
2) Remote Connect – via telephone line.
See Direct Link and Solution Link RAS Upload/
Download programming in Section 5 —
Note Programming Overview for more information.
i
Callback Verify
Setting this option will force the panel to use call back
verification for all remote Solution Link RAS sessions. See
MENU 5-3-0 — Call back Number for more information.
Abort RAS On Alarm
If this option is programmed, the remote RAS connection
between the panel and the remote upload / download
computer will be terminated if panel registers an alarm
that needs to be reported.
Answering Bypass
Answering machine bypass allows you to establiish a
RAS connection to a panel when there is an answering
machine or facsimile machine connected on the same
telephone line.
1) Using Solution Link call the paneland let the phone
ring no more than 4 times before hanging up.
2) Wait a minimum of 8 seconds (but no more than 60
seconds) before calling the panel again. This time
the panel will answer the incoming call as soon as it
registers the first ring and the connection will be
established.
Answer Only If Armed
Setting this option will prevent the panel from answering
an incoming call unless at least one area on the system
is armed. If all areas are off the panel will not answer the
call. This option would be useful in a busy office when
due to the large volume of incomming calls answering
machine bypass may not be effective.
Tone Bypass
It is often difficult to establish a remote connection to
a panel if the customer picks up the phone or if a fax or
answering machine answers the call before the panel
does.
While the ultimate solution to this problem is the use the
CLI Intelliconnect method, this requires the customer to
enable CLI via their telco provider.
When enabled, the new Tone Bypass option (MENU 5-3-4)
tells the panel to listen to every answered call and to look
for a specific sequence of DTMF tones.
The tone sequence will be sent by the remote programming
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Report RAS Sessions
Setting this option will cause the panel to report the
start and end of RAS programming sessions to the base
station and the history log.
Comms > Remote Access >
DTMF Options

MENU 5-3-5
1
DTMF Arming
Y
2
DTMF Disarming
N
3
DTMF User Functions
N
4
DTMF Quick Arming
Y
5
Reserved
N
6
Reserved
N
7
Reserved
N
8
Reserved
N
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [3] + [5]. The keypad will
display the current DTMF options.
 DTMF Arming
DTMF Disarming
DTMF User Functions
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
DTMF Arming
Setting this option enables user to remotely arm one or
more areas on the panel using their PIN and a touch tone
phone.
DTMF Disarming
Setting this option enables users to remotely disarm one
or more areas on the panel using their PIN and a touch
tone telephone.
DTMF User Functions
Setting this option enables access to user DTMF
functions using their PIN and a touch tone telephone.
DTMF Quick Arming
Setting this option allows users and control room
operators to remotely arm the system using a touch tone
9-11
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Comms Programming
phone without the need for a PIN.
To arm the system call the number which the panel is
connected to and when the panel answer you will here
3 beeps in accending frequency if the panel is in the
disarmed condition. Press [0] + [#] to arm. You will hear 3
beeps in decending order when the panel arms.
All areas on the system will be armed regardless of
there condition when using the DTMF quick arm
Note function. These functions follow both timer groups
and access groups.
i
Unlike other systems, no additional hardware or modules
are required for DTMF control.
1) Once the panel answers the incoming call, if either
option 1, 2, 3 or 4 in MENU 5-3-5 is enabled, then
the panel will play a short welcome jingle. You now
have approximately 5 seconds to enter a valid PIN
and log onto the panel.
2) Enter PIN followed by the [#] key. If the PIN is valid
the system will respond with two short beeps. If the
PIN is invalid then a single long beep will be heard.
3) If a valid PIN is not entered in time, the panel will
attempt to establish a modem connection as if
connecting to the Solution Link software.
If this happens you will need to hang up for
approximately 60 seconds before trying again.
Once validated, the following commands can be
performed. See the table below. If no keys are pressed
for 20 seconds then the panel will play the exit jingle
before terminating the session and hanging up. Pressing
[#][#] at any time while connected will cause the panel to
terminate the session.
DTMF CONTROL FUNC TIONS
Operation
Command
Tone
Response
Quick Arm
All Areas
[0] + [#]
High,
Medium,
Low
Log In
OK
[PIN] + [#]
Low, High
Error
Incorrect Entry
Long Beep
Turn Area
ON
[1] + [Area No] + [#] + [1]
Low, High
Turn Area
OFF
[1] + [Area No] + [#] + [2]
High, Low
Turn Output
ON
[2] + [Output No] + [#] + [1]
Low, High
Turn Output
OFF
[2] + [Output No] + [#] + [2]
High, Low
End
Session
[#] + [#]
High,
Medium,
Low
Table 25: DTMF Remote Control Functions
DT M F EXA M P L ES
Each example below shows the log on step for clarity. In
practise is only necessary to log on once per DTMF control
session.
To turn Area 1 ON enter the following
[2] [5] [8] [0] [#] = Log ON
[1] + [1] + [#] + [1] = Arm Area 1
To turn Output 10 ON enter the following
[2] [5] [8] [0] [#] = Log ON
[2] + [1] [0] + [#] + [1] = Turn Output 10 ON
To turn Output 12 OFF enter the following
[2] [5] [8] [0] [#] = Log ON
[2] + [1] [2] + [#] + [2] = Turn Output 12 OFF
If the DTMF Quick Arm option is enabled
then it is possible to remotely arm all
Note areas
without logging onto the panel.
Simply enter [0] + [#] following the welcome jingle.
i
Make sure that the phone being used to remotely
control the panel is set to transmit DTMF tones
when keys are pressed during the call. This option is
disabled by default on some phones.
Comms > Remote Access >
Voice Access Code

MENU 5-3-6
9
#
This option sets a 2 digit code which is used to access the
panel from any internal phone connected to the same
telco line as the panel. For this option to work, a CM101B
Voice Module must be connected to the panel.
This default number may need to be changed depending
9-12
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Comms Programming
on the country and or telco exchange / PABX system
being used. Make sure that when the code is entered, no
external phone services are selected or activated. If they
are, then change the code to something else.
It is important to realise that this code is only used to start
the connection process. Once a connection is established,
the voice module will ask the user to enter their PIN before
they will be able to control the panel. The Voice Access
Code is shared by all users who need this type of access to
the panel. See the CM101B documention for more details.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [3] + [6]. The keypad will
display the current DTMF options.
Third
Number
Comms > Remote Access >
MENU 5-3-8
User RAS PIN
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [3] + [8]. The keypad will
display the current Transmission Format for
Destination 2.
2) Using the numeric keys enter the new Voice Access
Code then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Second
Number
i
Use keys 0 - 9 to program user RAS PIN + [OK] tosave.
9#
Press  OK to SAVE
First
Number
Up to 3 Phone numbers can be entered for CLI Call
Line Identification for remote access detection. You
Note must enter STD code plus the compete number for
this option to work. Press [OK] after each telephone
number is entered to save and move to the next
number.
0
Voice Access Code
Comms > Remote Access >
CLI Numbers
4) Press [OK] to save and return to the MENU.

MENU 5-3-7
1
Digits
32
1
Digits
32
1
Digits
32
User RAS PIN
00000000
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Use the numeric keys to program the user RAS PIN
required, then press [OK] to save and exit, or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
CLI Numbers (Call Line Identification) allows the control
panel to answer an incoming call only when the control
panel identifies that the incoming call is from any one of
the three CLI numbers programmed. Up to three different
CLI telephone numbers can be programmed, each having
a maximum of 32 digits.
1) Enter [MENU] + [5] + [3] + [7]. The keypad will
display the following:
Phone
Phone
Phone
Press
1=
2=
3=
 OK or MENU
2) Highlight the telephone number that you want to
program for CLI number, then press [OK] to select.
CLI Numbers Phone 1
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
3) Using the numeric keys, enter the telephone
number that you wish to program.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
9-13
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Comms Programming
REPORTING OPTIONS
Comms > Reporting >
TX Format Dest 1
00 - Disabled
01 - Contact ID
02 - SIA
03 - Reserved
04 - Reserved
05 - Reserved
06 - SMS

MENU 5-4-0
0
07 - Domestic
08 - Voice
09 - SIA +
10 - GSM SIA +
11 - GSM Contact ID
12 - GSM SMS
1
13 - Ethernet
14 - GPRS
15 - Reserved
This menu allows you to program the transmission format
or language the panel will use to send event reports to
Destination 1. The panel has two separate destinations
that reports can be sent to and each one can be set to
use a different transmission format depending on the
application.
At factory default, all reports are routed to Destination 1.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [4] + [0]. The keypad will
display the current Transmission Format for
Destination 1.
1
13 - Ethernet
14 - GPRS
15 - Reserved
This menu allows you to program the transmission format
or language the panel will use to send event reports to
Destination 2.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [4] + [1]. The keypad will
display the current Transmission Format for
Destination 2.
TX Format Dest 2
0
00 - Log Events Only
01 - Dest 1 + Log
02 - Dest 2 + Log
03 - Dest 1 & 2 + Log
04 - Dest 2 If 1 Fails
1
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
This menu programs which destination will be used to
send both manual and automatic test reports.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [4] + [2]. The keypad will
display the current Test Route.
Comms > Reporting >
System Route
MENU 5-4-1
0
07 - Domestic
08 - Voice
09 - SIA +
10 - GSM SIA +
11 - GSM Contact ID
12 - GSM SMS
MENU 5-4-2
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to select the Test
Route required then Press [OK] to save and exit or
press [MENU] to exit without saving.
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to select the
Transmission Format required then Press [OK] to
save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
00 - Disabled
01 - Contact ID
02 - SIA
03 - Reserved
04 - Reserved
05 - Reserved
06 - SMS

01 - Dest 1 + Log
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
01 - Contact ID
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE

Comms > Reporting >
Test Route
Test Route
TX Format Dest 1
Comms > Reporting >
TX Format Dest 2
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to select the
Transmission Format required then Press [OK] to
save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.

MENU 5-4-3
0
00 - Log Events Only
01 - Dest 1 + Log
02 - Dest 2 + Log
03 - Dest 1 & 2 + Log
04 - Dest 2 If 1 Fails
1
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
This menu sets the report destination that will be used to
send all system event reports.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [4] + [3]. The keypad will
display the current Status Report route.
System Route
01 - Dest 1 + Log
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to select the Test
Route required then Press [OK] to save and exit or
press [MENU] to exit without saving.
01 - Contact ID
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
9-14
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Comms Programming
Comms > Reporting >
Emergency Route

MENU 5-4-4
0
00 - Log Events Only
01 - Dest 1 + Log
02 - Dest 2 + Log
03 - Dest 1 & 2 + Log
04 - Dest 2 If 1 Fails
1
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
This menu programs the destination that all Keypad
emergency alarms are reported.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [4] + [4]. The keypad will
display the current Emergency Route.

(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
MENU 5-4-6
0 0 0
Seconds
This menu programs how long the panel will delay
reporting Burglary alarm reports. Only burglary (nonfire) zones that have been programmed for Delay Report
in MENU 3-1-7 — Report Option will follow the Burglary
Report Delay time.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [4] + [6]. The keypad will
display the current burglary report delay time.
Burg Report Delay
Emergency Route
000 Seconds
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
01 - Dest 1 + Log
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to select the
Keypad Emergency route required then Press [OK]
to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
Comms > Reporting >
Swinger Dialler
Comms > Reporting >
Burg Report Delay

MENU 5-4-5
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
0
2) Using the numeric keys, enter the new report delay
time then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving. Valid entires are 0
to 255 seconds
Comms > Reporting >
Fire Report Delay
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
6

MENU 5-4-7
0 0 0
Seconds
Swinger Dialler can be used to prevent a faulty or runa-way PIR from continually re-triggering the zone and
reporting to the base station.
This menu programs how long the panel will delay
reporting fire zone alarm reports. Only fire zones that
have been programmed for Delay Report in MENU 3-1-7
— Report Option will follow the Fire Report Delay time.
The Swinger Dialler count sets the maximum number of
times an individual zone can trigger an alarm during the
current arming cycle before it is locked out.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [4] + [7]. The keypad will
display the current Fire Report Delay time.
If this option is not programmed, the panel will continue
to report the alarm signal until the system or area is
disarmed.
Only zones that have been programmed for Lockout
Dialler in MENU 3-1-7 — Report Options will follow the
Swinger Dialler count.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [4] + [5]. The keypad will
display the current Swinger Dialler count.
Fire Report Delay
000 Seconds
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Using the numeric keys, enter the new report delay
time then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving. Valid entires are 0
to 255 seconds.
Swinger Dialler
6
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Using the numeric keys, enter the new Swinger
Dialler count then press [OK] to save and exit or
press [MENU] to exit without saving. Valid entries
are 0 - 15 / 0 = disabled.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
9-15
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Comms Programming
M YA L A R M
Comms > MyAlarm >
MyAlarm Options
Comms > MyAlarm >
IP Address
1
0
0
0
MENU 5-5-0

0
0
Digits
0
0
0
0
0
12
0 0
This menu programs the 12 digit MyAlarm IP Address.
MENU 5-5-0 should be left at the factory default
settings unless you are advised otherwise by the
Note manufacturer.
i
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [5] + [0]. Use the arrow keys to
select the IP address to program, then press the
[OK] key. The keypad will display the current IP
address.
Primary IP Address
000000000000
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Using the numeric keys, enter the IP address
required, then press [OK] to save and exit, or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Comms > MyAlarm >
IP Port

0
MENU 5-5-1
7
7
0
3
This menu programs the 5 digit MyAlarm Port number.
Range must be programmed within 0 to 65535.
MENU 5-5-1 should be left at the factory default
settings unless you are advised otherwise by the
Note manufacturer.
i
1) Enter [5] + [5] + [1] + [OK]. Use the arrow keys to
select the IP port to program, then press the [OK]
key. The keypad will display the current MyAlarm
Port number.
Primary IP Port
07703
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Using the numeric keys, enter the IP address
required, then press [OK] to save and exit, or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
9-16

MENU 5-5-2
1
Reserved
N
2
Reserved
N
3
Reserved
N
4
Reserved
N
5
Reserved
N
6
Reserved
N
7
Reserved
N
8
Reserved
N
This location is a Bit option field.
Comms > MyAlarm >
Gateway Numbers
MENU 5-5-7

SMS Primary
1
1 8 3 2
Digits
1 3 4
5
0
6
4
1
SMS Secondary
1
1 8 3 2
1
Digits
3 4
5
1
8
2
5
Email
1
1 8
2
1
Digits
3 4
5
2
5
0
5
2
Digits
1 3 4
3
MyAlarm
1
1 8 3
32
32
32
32
5
2
5
0
5
This menu allows the installer to program the gateway
telephone numbers for both SMS and email reporting.
The MyAlarm gateway telephone number is currently not
used.
When SMS reporting, the control panel will call the SMS
primary number first. If the control panel fails to report
via the SMS primary number, the control panel will then
use the SMS secondary number until all current event
reports are sent. The next time the control panel needs
to report, the control panel will revert back to the SMS
primary number.
1) Enter [MENU] + [5] + [5] + [7].
SMS Primary
SMS Secondary
Email
Press  OK or MENU
2) Highlight the gateway telephone number to
change and press [OK]. The keypad will display the
current gateway telephone number.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Comms Programming
Gateway Numbers SMS Pri
Comms > MyAlarm >
Email Options
183213450641
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
3) Using the numeric keys, enter all the digits of the
gateway telephone number. You can change a
single digit by scrolling the cursor left or right. For
special characters including, pause, * or #, use the
up and down arrow keys.
4) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Comms > MyAlarm >
Email Address
Email
Address
1
-
MENU 5-5-8
Characters
80
This menu allows the master user to program an email
address that the system will send email reports to. A
maximum of 80 characters can be used to program the
email address.
1) Enter your Master PIN + [MENU].
2) Enter [5] + [5] + [8] + [OK].
The keypad will display the current email address.
Email Address
Press  OK to SAVE
3) Use the numeric, [0] to [9], [] and [] keys to enter
or change the email address as required.
At any time you can use the [] and [] keys to scroll
through the complete list of available characters.
To clear all characters from the cursor position to the
right, press the [OFF] key.
4) When the email address is complete, press [OK] to
save and exit, or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
To stop email reporting simply remove the email
address or disable all of the email options in MENU
5-5-9.
When entering an email address the @ symbol is
on the keypad display as
.
i Torepresented
enter this character press the 1 key repeatedly until
Note
the symbol appears in the display.
-
MENU 5-5-9
1
Open Close
Y
2
Zones
Y
3
System
Y
4
Access
Y
5
Reserved
N
6
Reserved
N
7
Reserved
N
8
Reserved
N
This menu allows the master user to select which event
types will be reported using the email reporting function.
By default the first 4 options are set to report via email.
Follow the procedure below to configure the required
options.
1) Enter your Master PIN + [MENU].
2) Enter [5] + [5] + [9] + [OK].
The keypad will display the list of current options.
Options with a preceeding tick mark are selected.
Open Close
 Zones
 System
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
3) Use the [] and [] keys to highlight the feature that
you want to program, then use the [ON] and [OFF]
keys to turn on and off the features as required.
4) When all email options are programmed, press [OK]
to save and exit, or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
Open Close
This option allows the control panel to report ‘open’ and
‘close’ reports via email.
Zones
This option allows the control panel to report zone ‘alarm’
and ‘trouble' reports via email.
System
This option allows the control panel to report via email
numerous system reports (e.g. AC Fail, Low Battery etc)
via email.
Access
This option allows the control panel to report via email
when a valid token has been swiped eg. ‘Access Granted’
or ‘Access Denied’.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
9-17
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Comms Programming
Comms > IP Reporting >
Comms > IP Reporting >
Receiver IP
Dest Nº 1
1
0
Dest Nº 2
1
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Digits
0
0
0
Digits
0
0
0
0
0
0
MENU 5-6-0
0
12
0 0
0
12
0 0
This menu allows the installer to program the TCP IP
address for Destination 1 and/or Destination 2 so that
the control panel can communicate to the base station
receiver.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [6] + [0]. The keypad will
prompt you to select which destination
(destination 1 or 2) that you want to program the
base staion IP addrress.
Rr1 Dest 1
Rr2 Dest 2
Exit
Press  OK or MENU
Receiver Port
MENU 5-6-1

Dest Nº 1
0
7
7
0
0
Dest Nº 2
0
7
7
0
0
This menu allows the installer to program the TCP IP port
number for Destination 1 and/or Destination 2 so that
the control panel can communicate to the base station
receiver. The port number must be 5 digits long within
the range - to 65535.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [6] + [1]. The keypad will
prompt you to enter which destination (destination
1 or 2) that you want to program the base staion
port number.
Rr1 Dest 1
Rr2 Dest 2
Exit
Press  OK or MENU
2) Highlight the destination number (1 or 2) required,
then press [OK]to select.
2) Hightlight the destination number (1 or 2) required,
then press [OK]to select.
3) The keypad will display the first six digits of the
base station IP address.
3) The keypad will display the current base station
port number.
Receiver IP Rr1
Receiver Port Rr1
000000000000
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
07700
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
4) Use the numeric keys [0] to [9] + [←] and [→] keys
to program the new MyAlarm IP Address, then
press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
9-18
4) Use the numeric keys [0] to [9] to program the new
MyAlarm IP Address, then press [OK] to save and
exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Comms Programming
Comms > IP Reporting >
Poll Rate

MENU 5-6-2
0 0 3 0
Seconds x 10
This menu allows the installer to program how often the
control panel sends a signal to the base station receiver
via Destination 1 and/or Destination 2. The poll interval
programmed in seconds and then multiplied by 10 (eg.
0009 = 90 sec's / 0360 = 1 hr / 4320 = 12 hrs and 8640 =
24 hrs). This should be set so that the control panel sends
a poll to the base station receiver at least once within the
polling time required.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [6] + [2]. The keypad will
prompt you to select which destination
(destination 1 or 2) that you want to program the
poll rate.
Rr1 Dest 1
Rr2 Dest 2
Exit
Press  OK or MENU
2) Highlight the destination number (1 or 2) required,
then press [OK]to select.
3) The keypad will display the current poll rate.
3) The keypad will display the current acknowledge
wait time.
Ack Wait Time Rr1
010 Seconds
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
4) Use the numeric keys [0] to [9] to program the new
acknowledge wait time in seconds (000 to 255),
then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to
exit without saving.
Comms > IP Reporting >
IP Format

MENU 5-6-4
00 - Conettix
01 - Conettix NNC (Anti Replay)
02 - CSV IP ALARM
03 - Suretek (TBA)
04 - Permacom (TBA)
05 - Direct Wireless (TBA)
06 - MyAlarm CID (TBA)
0
1
This menu allows the installer to program which IP format
the control panel will report to the base station receiver.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [6] + [4]. The keypad will
prompt you to select which destination
(destination 1 or 2) that you want to program the
acknowledge wait time.
Poll Rate Rr1
0030 Seconds
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
4) Use the numeric keys [0] to [9] to program the new
poll rate in seconds (0000 to 9999 seconds x 10),
then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to
exit without saving.
Comms > IP Reporting >
ACK Wait Time
2) Highlight the destination number (1 or 2) required,
then press [OK]to select.

MENU 5-6-3
0 1 0
Seconds
This menu allows the installer to program the
acknowledge wait time in seconds for both Destination 1
and/or Destination 2. The acknowledge wait time can be
programmed between 1 and 255 seconds (0 = Disabled).
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [6] + [3]. The keypad will
prompt you to select which destination
(destination 1 or 2) that you want to program the
acknowledge wait time.
Rr1 Dest 1
Rr2 Dest 2
Exit
Press  OK or MENU
2) Highlight the destination number (1 or 2) required,
then press [OK]to select.
3) The keypad will display the current IP format.
IP Format Rr1
01 - Conettix NNC
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
4) Use the numeric keys [0] to [9] to program the new
IP format required, then press [OK] to save and exit
or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
Rr1 Dest 1
Rr2 Dest 2
Exit
Press  OK or MENU
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
9-19
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Comms Programming
Comms > IP Reporting >
Retry Count

MENU 5-6-5
0
3
This menu allows the installer to program the number of
attempts that the system will try to communicate via TCP/
IP to the base station receiver for both Destination 1 and/
or Destination 2. The retry count can be programmed
between 01 and 15 (00=Disabled).
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [6] + [5]. The keypad will
prompt you to select which destination
(destination 1 or 2) that you want to program the
acknowledge wait time.
Rr1 Dest 1
Rr2 Dest 2
Exit
Press  OK or MENU
3
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
Comms > IP Reporting >
Encryption Key
Dest Nº 2
1
0
0
0
MENU 5-6-7

Dest Nº 1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Dest Nº 2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
The NCC number is used to prevent anti-replay attacks
when reporting in Connetix format. The NNC number will
be assigned by the control room at the time the account
is setup. Like the account number, the NNC will always be
unique.
Conettix NNC Rr1
00000000
Press  OK to SAVE
MENU 5-6-6

0
3) Use the numeric keys [0] to [9] + [←] and [→] keys
to program the 32 digitencryption key, then press
[OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [6] + [7]. The keypad will
display the first 6 digits of the current NNC number.
3) Use the numeric keys [0] to [9] to program the new
retry count, then press [OK] to save and exit or
press [MENU] to exit without saving.
0
0000000000000000000
Press  OK to SAVE
Conettix NNC
Retry Count Rr1
Dest Nº 1
Encryption Key Rr1
Comms > IP Reporting >
2) Highlight the destination number (1 or 2) required,
then press [OK]to select.
The keypad will display the current retry count.
1
0
2) Highlight the destination number (1 or 2) required,
then press [OK]to select.
The keypad will display the current encryption key.
0
Digits
0 0 0
0
0
0
0
32
0 0
0
0
Digits
0 0
0
0
0
0
0
32
0
2) Use the numeric keys [0] to [9] + [←] and [→] keys
to program the 8 digit NNC number, then press
[OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
The encryption key must match the encryption key on the
base station receiver for communication to take place. To
remove encryption, set MENU 6-6-4 as all zero’s.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [6] + [6]. The keypad will
prompt you to select which destination
(destination 1 or 2) that you want to program the
acknowledge wait time.
Rr1 Dest 1
Rr2 Dest 2
Exit
Press  OK or MENU
9-20
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Comms Programming
Comms > IP Reporting >
SIA IP Prefix
MENU 5-6-8

Digits
Account
Dest Nº 1
1
0
0
0
0
0
Account
Dest Nº 2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
16
0
0
0
16
0
Digits
0
0
Digits
Account Prefix
Dest Nº 1
1
0
Account Prefix
Dest Nº 2
1
0
Receiver Prefix
Dest Nº 1
1
0
0
Receiver Prefix
Dest Nº 2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
0
0
6
0
0
6
0
0
6
0
Digits
0
0
0
Digits
0
0
Digits
0
0
Account Number
The account number is the most specific token and is
always programmed into the premises equipment to
identify it. The account token appears both in the header
of the message (which is never encrypted) and in the
data of the message (which may be encrypted).
This element consists of an ASCII "#", followed by 3 to 16
ASCII characters representing hexadecimal digits for the
account number. There is no corresponding element in
the DC-07 protocol.
In certain special applications, the information provided
in the #acct element may not match the account number
contained within the message data. For example, a
manufacturer may choose to transmit a MAC address as
an identifier.
Account Prefix
The account prefix can be programmed into the PE
to extend the identification provided by the account
number.
This element is required and consists of an ASCII "L",
followed by 1-6 HEX ASCII digits for the account prefix.
When the PE does not need to transmit an account prefix,
"L0" shall be transmitted for this element. This element
corresponds with the receiver line number element in
the DC-07 protocol.
Receiver Prefix
In some cases, the PE may be programmed to futher
extend the identification provided by the account
number and account prefix by providing a receiver
number. This element is optional and consists of an
ASCII "R", followed by 1-6 HEX ASCII digits for the receiver
number. When the PE does not need to transmit a
receiver number, nothing shall by transmitted for this
element (ie. "R" or "R0" are not to to be transmitted in this
case).
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [6] + [8]. The keypad will
prompt you to select which option that you want to
program.
SIA IP Account
SIA IP Account Prefix
SIA IP Receiver Prefix
Press  OK or MENU
2) Highlight the option required, then press [OK] to
select.
Rr1 Dest 1
Rr2 Dest 2
Exit
Press  OK or MENU
3) Highlight the destination that you want to
program, then press [OK] to select.
SIA IP Account Rr1
Press  OK to SAVE
4) Use the numeric keys [0] to [9] to program the
parameter, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Comms > IP Reporting >
User Name/Password

MENU 5-6-9
1
Digits
16
1
Digits
16
Username
Password
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [6] + [9]. The keypad will
prompt you to select which option to program
(username or password) that you want to program.
Username
Password
Exit
Press  OK or MENU
2) Highlight the option required, then press [OK] to
select.
Rt1 Dest 1
Rt2 Dest 2
Exit
Press  OK or MENU
3) Highlight the destination that you want to
program, then press [OK] to select.
9-21
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Comms Programming
Comms > IP Remote Access >
Username Rr1
-
IP Port
MENU 5-7-1
Press  OK to SAVE
4) Use the [0] to [9] and [] and [] keys to program
the parameter, then press [OK] to save and exit or
press [MENU] to exit without saving.
Comms > IP Remote Access >
-
IP Address
1
Installer
0
Digits
0
0
0
0
1
User
0
MENU 5-7-0
0
0
12
0
0
0
0
Digits
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
12
0
0
0
0
0
This menu allows the installer or master user the ability to
program the Solution Link IP address.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [7] + [0]. The keypad will
prompt you to enter which Solution Link IP address
(IP 1 = Installer or IP 2 = User) that you want to
program.
Installer
User
Exit
Press  OK or MENU
The installer can now select either the installer
Solution Link IP address or the user Solution Link IP
address by using the up and down arrow keys. If the
Master user programs this menu, the keyapd will only
display the option to program the user IP address:
Installer
0
7
7
0
1
User
0
7
7
0
1
This menu allows the installer or master user the ability to
program the Solution Link IP port number. The Solution
Link IP port number must be 5 digits in length and
programmed within the range of 0 to 65535.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [7] + [1]. The keypad will
prompt you to enter which Solution Link IP port
number (IP 1 = Installer or IP 2 = User) that you
want to program..
Installer
User
Exit
Press  OK or MENU
The installer can now select either the installer
Solution Link IP port number or the user Solution Link
IP port number by using the up and down arrow keys.
If the Master user programs this menu, the keyapd will
only display the option to program the user IP port
number:
2) Select the which IP port number that you want to
change (installer or user, then press [OK] to enter.
3) The keypad will display the first six digits of the
Solution Link IP port number.
RAS IP Port
2) Select the which IP address that you want to
change (installer or user, then press [OK] to enter.
3) The keypad will display the first six digits of the
Solution Link IP address.
RAS IP Address
000000000000
07701
Press  OK to SAVE
4) Use the numeric keys [0] to [9] + [←] and [→] keys
to program the IP Address, then press [OK] to save
and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
Press  OK to SAVE
4) Use the numeric keys [0] to [9] + [←] and [→] keys
to program the IP Address, then press [OK] to save
and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
9-22
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Comms Programming
Comms > IP Remote Access >
IP RAS Options

MENU 5-7-2
1
IP RAS Allowed
Y
2
IP RAS Only If Disarmed
N
3
Report IP Session
Y
4
Report IP Lockout
Y
5
UDP Installer RAS
Y
6
UDP User RAS
N
7
Reserved
N
8
Reserved
N
This menu allows the installer to select which IP options
are allowed.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [7] + [2].
The keypad will display the current options which are
selected or enabled.
 IP RAS Allowed
RAS Only If Disarmed
 Report Session
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
2) Use the numeric keys [1] to [8] to turn on and off the
features as required. When the corresponding
number on the keypad is on then the option is
selected.
3) When all email options are programmed, press [OK]
to save and exit, or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
IP RAS Allowed
This option allows the control panel to connect with
Solution Link via the optional ethernet module.
IP RAS Only If Disarmed
This option allows a RAS connection via TCP IP
connection only when the system is disarmed.
If this option is not programmed, the control panel will
use the TCP IP protocol.
UDP User RAS
This option allows the control panel to communicate
using the UDP internet protocol (User Datagram
Protocol) when the user remotely connects via Solution
Link software.
If this option is not programmed, the control panel will
use the TCP IP protocol.
Comms > IP Remote Access >
RAS Lockout Time

MENU 5-7-3
0 6 0
Seconds
This menu allows the control panel to lockout and prevent
the ability for anyone to remotely connect to the system
using the RAS IP connection method. During the lockout
time, (1 to 255 seconds / 0 = No Lockout), the system
will not respond to any TCP IP connection requests. The
lockout count is set at 6 failed attempts (fixed) over a 60
second period)
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [7] + [3]. The keypad will
display the current IP RAS Lockout time.
RAS Lockout Time
060 Seconds
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Using the numeric keys, enter the new IP RAS
Lockout Time, then press [OK] to save and exit or
press [MENU] to exit without saving. Valid entires
are 0 to 255 seconds
Report IP Session
This option allows the control panel to report a RAS Start
and RAS End session to the security base station when a
remote TCP IP connection was made and ended.
Report IP Lockout
This option allows the control panel to report when the
maximum number of incorrect attempts has been made
to remotely connect to the panel using the IP connection
method.
UDP Installer RAS
This option allows the control panel to communicate
using the UDP internet protocol (User Datagram
Protocol) when the installer remotely connects via
Solution Link software.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
9-23
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Comms Programming
CO M M S T E S T I N G
Comms > IP Remote Access >
IPRS Address
1
2
0

2
1
2
Digits
9
0
8
MENU 5-7-5
3
0
12
5 8
This menu is reserved for factory use. Do not change
unless requested to do so.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [7] + [5]. The keypad will
display the current IPRS address.
--
MENU 5-9-0
This menu allows you to test the reporting functions of
the control panel by manually sending a Test report to the
receiving party (i.e. security company monitoring station,
mobile telephone etc).
1) Enter [MENU] + [5] + [9] + [0]. The keypad will
prompt that it is in the process of sending a test
report.
DNS Address
202129083058
Press  OK to SAVE
Comms Testing In
Progress ..Please Wait..
2) Use the numeric keys [0] to [9] + [←] and [→] keys
to program the 12 digit IPRS address, then press
[OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Press OK or MENU
2) If the test is successful, the keypad will prompt:
Comms Test Successful
Comms > IP Remote Access >
IPRS Port
Comms > Comms Test >
Send Test Report
MENU 5-7-6

0
7
7
0
3
This menu is reserved for factory use. Do not change
unless requested to do so. This menu must be 5 digits set
with the range of 0 to 65535.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [7] + [6]. The keypad will
display the current IPRS port.
Press OK or MENU
3) If the test fails, the keypad will prompt:
Test Report Failed..
Please Call For Service
Press OK or MENU
IPRS Port
4) Press [OK] or [MENU] to exit.
07703
Press  OK to SAVE
2) Use the numeric keys [0] to [9] + [←] and [→] keys
to program the 32 digitencryption key, then press
[OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Comms > Comms Test >
Test Report Time
MENU 5-9-1

Test Time
0
2
:
0
0
H
H
:
M M
This menu programs the time of the day that the panel
will send the automatic Test Report to the base station
receiver. Automatic test reports are used to verify the
panels ability to report events via the telephone line on
an ongoing basis.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [9] + [1]. The keypad will
display the current Test Report Time.
Test Report Time
02:00am
Press  OK to SAVE
9-24
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Comms Programming
2) Use the left, right, up and down arrow keys to
select the Test Report time required then Press [OK]
to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
i
Note
Scroll through the hours using the up and down
arrow keys to change the time from am to pm.
Comms > Comms Test >
Test Report Period

MENU 5-9-2
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
00 - No Test Report
08 - Reserved
01 - Every Day
09 - Reserved
02 - Every Week
10 - Reserved
03 - Every Month
11 - Reserved
04 - Every 2 Days
12 - Reserved
05 - Every 3 Days
13 - Reserved
06 - Every 4 Days
14 - Every Hour
07 - Every 5 Days
15 - Every 12 Hours
0
1
This menu programs how often the control panel will
send a test report. Only one option can be programmed.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [9] + [2]. The keypad will
display the current Test Report Period.
Test Report Period
01 - Every Day
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to select the Test
Report Period then Press [OK] to save and exit or
press [MENU] to exit without saving.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Comms > Comms Test >
Test Report Options

MENU 5-9-3
1
Test If No Other Rpt
N
2
Test On Siren Reset
Y
3
Reserved
N
4
Reserved
N
5
Reserved
N
6
Reserved
N
7
Reserved
N
8
Reserved
N
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [9] + [3]. The keypad will
display the current Test Report Options.
Test If No Other Rpt
 Test On Siren Reset
Reserved
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Test If No Other Rpt
Setting this option will cause the system to only send its
automatic Test report if no other area report has been
sent within the test report time period as programmed in
MENU 5-9-2.
Test On Siren Reset
Setting this option will delay the Automatic Test Report if
the sirens are running when the test report time expires.
This effectively keeps the telco line free to make any
further alarm reports which may be triggered while the
sirens are running. The panel will send the cued Test
Report as soon as the siren run-time has expired.
9-25
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Comms Programming
Comms > Comms Test >
Test Route

MENU 5-9-4
0
00 - Log Events Only
01 - Dest 1 + Log
02 - Dest 2 + Log
03 - Dest 1 & 2 + Log
04 - Dest 2 If 1 Fails
1
The panel will make only one attempt to call this
number per activation. To perform multiple tests
Note repeat the sequence. There is no need to answer the
test call.
i
» » E N D
O F
S E C T I O N « «
This menu programs which destination will be used to
send both manual and automatic test reports.
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [9] + [4]. The keypad will
display the current Test Route.
Test Route
01 - Dest 1 + Log
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to select the Test
Route required then Press [OK] to save and exit or
press [MENU] to exit without saving.
Comms > Comms Test >
Dial Number Test

MENU 5-9-5
This option provides a quick and easy way for the Installer
to test the communication path for the panel while they
are onsite without the need to trigger test reports and then
verify them with the base station. Once the telco wiring
has been completed, enter your mobile phone or another
test number into this location and press [OK]. The panel
will then seize the phone line and dial the programmed
number.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [9] + [5], then select either
PSTN or GMS communication to test the dialler if
an optional GSM module has been fitted.
GSM
PSTN
Exit
Press  OK or MENU
2) Use the numeric keys to enter the the test number.
You can change a single digit in the number by
scrolling the cursor left or right. For special
characters (eg. , = pause * or # etc), use the up and
down arrow keys. To clear all text from the cursor
position to the right, press the [OFF] key.
Enter Digits To Dial
Press  OK to SAVE
3) Press [OK] when finished to start the test.
9-26
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI

S E C TIO N 10
Device Programming
T
his chapter covers the different device types and the
numerous programmable options which can be used
to control how a device operates.
The commands menu allows you to view the status of any
device in the system and will display its condition as well
as the temperature and voltage where available.
Keypads are the most common device used in the system
and must be assigned to a home area if they are to operate
correctly in a system. You are also able to set the contrast,
backlight and beeper volume to your own personal
preference.
RF Devices can also be connected to the system and from
this menu you are able to set supervision times, receiver
jamming, tamper options and more.
D E V I C E CO M M A N D S
Devices > Commands >
Device Status
--
MENU 6-0-0
Keypad 1 Name Kp1
Graphic + Prox V2.05
Voltage = 13.87
Press OK or MENU
3) Press [OK] or [MENU] to exit when finished.
Devices > Commands >
LAN Secure

MENU 6-0-1
If the LAN network is secure, this will prevent the system
detecting additional LAN devices when the system has
been powered down, additional devices connected and
powered back up again. If the LAN network is not secured,
the system will automatically detect any additional
devices added when the system has been powered down
and then powered back up again.
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [0] + [1]. If the system LAN is
not secured, the keypad will display the following.
This command will allow you to view the status of any
device connected to the system (except CM195 Multi RF
Receiver Module). The following information is available:
LAN is not Secured
To Secure, Press ON
™™ Line 1 = LAN Device and Number
Press OK or MENU
™™ Line 2 = Firmware Version
™™ Line 3 = Voltage, Temperature & Area Assignment.
2) Use the ON and OFF keys to toggle LAN secure on
or off.
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [0] + [0] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the device in the list and
press [OK]. The display will show the device status.
3) Press [OK] to exit.
Kp1 Keypad 1 Name
Op1 OutputX Exp 2
Ux1 UniExpander 1
Press  OK or MENU
2) The status line will scroll the keypad voltage,
temperature and area while the device type and
firmware version number are continuously
displayed.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
10-1
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Device Programming
Devices > Commands >
LAN Scan

MENU 6-0-2
Devices > Commands >
Keypad Volume
-
MENU 6-0-7
This menu allows the installer to rescan a non-secured
LAN network when adding or removing LAN expansion
devices (eg. keypads, input modules, output modules
etc), without the need to power down the control panel.
This menu allows you to adjust the volume of the keypad’s
speaker to suit the application or customer preference.
Each keypad on the system can be adjusted separately.
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [0] + [2]. If the system LAN is
not secured, the keypad will display the following.
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [0] + [7] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the keypad in the list
then press [OK].
Keypad 001 Volume
L
LAN scan has been
requested. This will end
your login session
....Please Wait
Press
Scanning LAN for Devices
Please Wait ... /
Found Output Exp 2

MENU 6-0-3
This menu allows the installer to view the number of
retry packets that are being sent out on the bus on a per
module basis.
The menu list is structured with the Packet Retry Count
followed by Device ID then the Device Name. Simply
scroll through the list with the arrow keys to view the
devices.
Move the cursor to the device of interest and press the
OFF key to reset the Packet Retry Count or press and hold
down the OFF key to reset the Packet Retry Count for all
devices.
The packet retry count is also reset on power up and
continues to count upwards on an ongoing basis
and once reaches the maximum of 255 will stop until
manually reset.
Under normal circumstances a device should not have a
large retry count but over time this is possible.
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [0] + [3] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the device in the list.
001 Fp2 Keypad 1 Name
017 Kp1 Keypad 3 Name
010 Kp1 Keypad 5 Name
Press  OK or MENU
2) Press [OK] or [MENU] to exit.
10-2
OK to SAVE
2) Use the arrow keys to set the required volume level.
Each time a key is pressed, you will hear a beep
indicating the new volume level. When finished
press [OK].
Devices > Commands >
LAN Watch
H
To completely silence the keypad speaker, simply
move the slider all the way to the left. This will disable
Note the keypad speaker for all functions including key
press beeps.
i
Devices > Commands >
Keypad Contrast
-
MENU 6-0-8
This menu allows you to adjust the contrast of the keypad’s
LCD display to suit the application or customer preference.
Each keypad on the system can be adjusted separately.
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [0] + [8] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the keypad in the list
then press [OK].
Keypad 001 Contrast
L
Press
H
OK to SAVE
2) Use the arrow keys to set the required contrast
level. Each time a key is pressed the contrast will
adjust to the new level. When finished press [OK].
Devices > Commands >
Keypad Backlight
-
MENU 6-0-9
This menu allows you to adjust the brightness of the
backlight on the keypad’s LCD display. Each keypad can
be adjusted separately to suit the customers needs.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Device Programming
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [0] + [9] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the keypad in the list
then press [OK].
Keypad 001 Backlight
L
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
 All On Arming Allowed
 Part On Arming Allowed
 Disarming Allowed
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
H
OK to SAVE
Press
2) Use the arrow keys to set the required backlight
level. Each time a key is pressed the backlight will
adjust to the new level. When finished press [OK].
K E Y PA D & R E A D E R O P T I O N S
Devices > Keypads & Readers >
-
Name
K e y p a d
1
MENU 6-1-0
N a m e
This menu allows you to program the name or location
description of the keypad or LAN reader.
1) Enter [MENU] + [6] + [1] + [0] and select the keypad
or LAN reader from the list and press [OK].
Name Kp1
Keypad 1 Name
Press  OK to SAVE
See Alpha Text Programming in Section 4 Programming Overview for further detail on entering
Note alpha text.
i

MENU 6-1-2
1
All On Arming Allowed
Y
2
Part On Arming Allowed
Y
3
Disarming Allowed
Y
4
Single Button Control
Y
5
All User Areas
N
6
Zero Exit Time
N
7
PIN To Change Area
N
8
Home Area Only
N
1) Enter [MENU] + [6] + [1] + [2] and select the keypad
or LAN reader from the list then press [OK].
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
All On Arming Allowed
Selecting this option allow the user to turn the area All
On that the keypad or LAN reader is assigned to when
a valid PIN, token or fingerprint is presented. The user
must have access to the area that the keypad or LAN
reader has been assigned to. See MENU 1-6-1 — Reader
Area Assignment.
Part On Arming Allowed
Selecting this option allows the user to turn the area Part
On or Part 2 On that the keypad or LAN reader is assigned
to when a valid PIN, token or fingerprint is presented.
To Turn Area All On Via Token/Fingerprint
From the disarmed state, present the token or fingerprint
once to turn the area All On.
To Turn Area Part On Via Token/Fingerprint
Present the token or fingerprint twice within 5 seconds
and the area will turn Part On.
2) Use the arrow and number keys to move and
change text. When the Reader Name is complete,
press [OK]. At any time you can press the [OFF] key
to clear the text from the current cursor position to
the end of the line.
Devices > Keypads & Readers >
Area Options
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
To Turn Area Part 2 On Via Token/Fingerprint
Present the token or fingerprint three times within 5
seconds and the area will turn Part 2 On.
Disarming Allowed
Selecting this option allows the user to turn off (disarm)
the area that the keypad or LAN reader is assigned to
when a valid PIN, token or fingerprint presented. The
user must have access to the area that the keypad or LAN
reader has been assigned to. See MENU 1-6-1 — Reader
Area Assignment.
Single Button Control
This option allows single key arming (All On or Part On)
and single key disarming (from Part On or Part 2 On)
when using the keypad. Refer to programming areas for
respective options set per area.
All User Areas
This option allows the user to turn on or off all areas that
the user has been assigned to at the same time when
they swipe their token or fingerpint. At the keypad, the
user would simply enter their PIN and then press and
hold the [ON], [PART] or [OFF] keys to turn on or off all
areas they belong to.
10-3
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Device Programming
Zero Exit Time
Selecting this option allow the user to turn the area All
On or Part On/Part 2 On from the keypad or LAN reader
with no exit time.
PIN To Change Area
Setting this option will prevent a user from switching
between different areas on the keypad unless they enter
a valid user PIN.
When this option is not set, users will be able to
change the keypad view to all other areas in the system
regardless of whether or not they have access to those
areas.
Home Area Only
Setting this option will force the keypad to display only
it’s assigned home area information. Therefore a user
cannot toggle (or move) the keypad display to show that
of a different area when the system has been partitioned.
Devices > Keypads & Readers >
Home Area

MENU 6-1-3
0
1
00 - No Area
01 - Security System
05 - Area 5 Name
02 - Area 2 Name
06 - Area 6 Name
03 - Area 3 Name
07 - Area 7 Name
04 - Area 4 Name
08 - Area 8 Name
This menu allows you to assign each keypad or LAN reader
to a default home area (Area 1 to 8). Only 1 home area can
be programmed for each keypad or LAN reader.
If a user toggles the keypad display to view a different
area, the keypad will automatically timeout and move
back to the home area if no key is pressed for a period of
60 seconds.
To prevent users from viewing areas which they do
not have access to, you will need to enable the PIN
To Change Area option. Setting this option will set
the system to request a user’s PIN before allowing
them to view another area. The system will only
allow a user to view the areas they have access to.
See MENU 6-1-4 — Keypad General Options.
4) Press [MENU] + [6] + [1] + [3] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the keypad in the list
then press [OK]. Use the up and down arrow keys
to select the Home Area required then press [OK] to
save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
Home Area Kp1
01 - Security System
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
Each keypad must be set to a unique address via the
DIP switches on the keypad and each keypad must
Note have a home area programmed to operate correctly.
Area 1 is the default home area for all keypads.
i
10-4
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Device Programming
Devices > Keypads & Readers >
General Options

MENU 6-1-4
1
Enable Rear Tamper
N
2
Report Temperature
Y
3
Installer PIN Allowed
Y
4
Show Alarm When Armed
N
5
Reader Area Control
Y
6
Reader Badging
N
7
Enable Egress Input
N
8
Log Egress Events
N
If the option is programmed, the keypad will display as
below:
Security System
ALARM
Alarm Zone 1 Name
If the option is not programmed, the keypad will display
as below:
The above options can be configured independantly for
each keypad fitted to the system.
Security System
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [1] + [4] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the keypad in the list
then press [OK].
Sat 06-Jan-2012 7:03pm
Enable Rear Tamper
Report Temperature
 Installer PIN Allowed
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
ALARM
Reader Area Control
This option allows the user to control the alarm area as
well as access at the same time. Turning this option off
would make the console a pure access only device.
Reader Badging
This option allows the user to unlock a door (via Doors)
and also turn on or off an area from the same LAN reader
independently.
No Badging
Area Is All On
Swipe Token Once
Enable Rear Tamper
This option allows the tamper circuit located on the back
of the LAN device to function. As soon as the LAN device
has been removed from the wall, the control panel will
register an alarm event..
For this option to work, the keypad model being used
must have the on-board tamper switch fitted.
Report Temperature
This option allows the control panel to report
temperature high and low alarm reports when the
temperature at the LAN device falls below or increases
outside the global temperature settings in MENU 7-7-3.
Installer Allowed
This option allows the installer to access to the the
system menus or to turn the aea (or system) on or off at
LAN device.
Show Alarm When Armed
This option allows the keypad to display which zone
registered an alarm. If multiple zones have registered an
alarm, the keypad will scroll each zone one at a time.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Badging Required
Open Door +
Disarm Area
Open Door +
Disarm Area
Open Door +
Turn Area All On
Open Door
Area Is Off
Swipe Token Once
Swipe Token 3
Times Within 5
Seconds
Open Door +
Turn Area All On
Swipe Token 4
Times Within 5
Seconds
Open Door +
Turn Area All On,
Switches To Part On
Table 26: Badging Examples
Enable Egress Input
this option when selected will enable the egress input
on the rear of the control console. Where the console is
then assigned to a door triggering this input will then
trigger the door to operate for the programmed time
thus allowing access.
Log Egress Events
There can be many Egress events per day on an access
control system which can clutter the history log over
time. If you enable the Log Egress Events option then the
egress events are recorded into the history log for later
review.
10-5
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Device Programming
Devices > Keypads & Readers >
Indicator Options

MENU 6-1-5
1
Extinguish
N
2
Greetings
Y
3
Display Temperature
N
4
Display Area Icons
N
5
Trouble Alert Beeps
Y
6
Entry Exit Warning
Y
7
Part Exit Warning
N
8
Chime Tone
Y
This menu allows you to program various options for
each LAN keypad, LAN reader or LAN fingerprint reader.
Keypads that have an in-built proximity reader, the
parameters set when selecting the keypad is common for
both the keypad and in-built reader.
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [1] + [5] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the keypad in the list
then press [OK].
Extinguish
 Greetings
Display Temperature
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
when turning an area off from All On, Part On or Part 2 On, the
greeting message will by displayed on the top line along with their
user name on the second line.
The following greeting messages are as follows:
™™ Good Morning Greeting = 00:00 to 11:59
™™ Good Afternoon Greeting = 12:00 to 17:59
™™ Good Evening Greeting = 18:00 to 23:59
Good Morning
Mary Smith
Security System OFF
Display Temperature
This option allows the keypad to display the reading of
the keypad temperature when a keypad idle screen has
been programmed. Each keypad can display its own
temperature.
Display Area Icons
TThis option allows the keypad to display the area icons
1 to 8. This allows the users to determine which areas are
turned All On or Part On from a single keypad without
the need to either move the keypad display to view each
area or walk to each area keypad.
Security System
DISARMED
Thu,Jan,05 11:22 am
22ºC
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Extinguish
This option allows the LAN device (eg. keypad, proximity
reader or fingerprint reader) to automatically turn off
all key backlighting and status LED's when there is no
activity for approximately 4 minutes. As soon as an
alarm occurs or user activity on the LAN device, the
backlighting and/or status LED's will return to normal.
Greetings
This option allows the keypad to breifly display on the
top line the greeting message when a user turns an area
on or off.
When turning an area All On, Part On or Part 2 On, the
greeting message 'Goodbye' along with their user name
on the second line will be displayed:
Goodbye
Mary Smith
Security System ON
10-6
Trouble Alert Beeps
This option allows the LAN device (keypad, proximity
reader or fingerprint reader) to sound a trouble tone
when the system has detected a trouble condition.
Entry Exit Warning
This option allows the LAN device (keypad, proximity
reader or fingerprint reader) to sound the entry warning
tone or sound the exit warning tone when a user turns
an area All On.
Part Exit Warning
This option allows the LAN device (keypad, proximity
reader or fingerprint reader) to sound the exit warning
tone when a user turns the area Part On or Part 2 On.
If this option is not programmed, the keypad will only
sound a single beep at the end of the part exit time.
Chime Tone
This option allows the LAN device (keypad, proximity
reader or fingerprint reader) to sound the chime tone
when a a zone set to be monitored when chime mode is
turned on is faulted. If this option is not programmed,
the LAN device will not sound the chime tone when a
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Device Programming
chime zone is faulted.
Devices > Keypads & Readers >
Emergency Keys

MENU 6-1-6
1
Audible Keypad Fire
Y
2
Report Keypad Fire
Y
3
Audible Keypad Medical
Y
4
Report Keypad Medical
Y
5
Audible Keypad Panic
Y
6
Report Keypad Panic
Y
7
Reserved
N
8
Reserved
N
The above options can be configured independantly for
each keypad fitted to the system.
Audible Kpad Panic
Setting this option allows the panel to sound an audible
alarm when a Keypad Panic Emergency Alarm has been
triggered via the keypad. To initiate a panic emergency
via the keypad, press and hold the [1] + [3] keys or the
[→] + [↑] keys down for two seconds. Enter a valid user
PIN to reset the alarm condition.
If this option is disabled, a keypad panic alarm will
not be visible on the keypad display (i.e. Invisible
Note Panic Alarm).
i
Report Keypad Panic
Setting this option allows the panel to send a Panic
report to the base station when a Keypad Panic
Emergency Alarm has been triggered via the keypad.
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [1] + [6] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the keypad in the list
then press [OK].
 Audible Keypad Fire
 Report Keypad Fire
 Audible Keypad Medical
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Audible Keypad Fire
Setting this option allows the panel to sound an audible
alarm when a Keypad Fire Emergency Alarm has been
triggered via the keypad. To initiate a fire emergency via
the keypad, press and hold the [4] + [6] keys or the [←] +
[→] keys down for two seconds. Enter a valid user PIN to
reset the alarm condition.
Figure 26: Keypad Emergency Keys
Labelling can be applied to the keypad to further simplify
operation.
KEYPAD EMERGENC Y AL ARM TRIGGER ’S
Key Sequence
Event Triggered
[←] + [→] Hold for 2 seconds
Keypad Fire Alarm
[→] + [↑] Hold for 2 seconds
Keypad Panic Alarm
[↑] + [↓] Hold for 2 seconds
Keypad Medical Alarm
Table 27: Keypad Emergency Keys
Report Keypad Fire
Setting this option allows the panel to send a Fire report
to the base station when a Keypad Fire Emergency Alarm
has been triggered via the keypad.
Audible Kpad Medical
Setting this option allows the panel to sound an audible
alarm when a Keypad Medical Emergency Alarm has
been triggered via the keypad. To initiate a medical
emergency via the keypad, press and hold the [7] + [9]
keys or the [↑] + [↓] keys down for two seconds. Enter a
valid user PIN to reset the alarm condition.
Report Kpad Medical
Setting this option allows the panel to send a Medical
report to the base station when a Keypad Medical
Emergency Alarm has been triggered via the keypad.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
10-7
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Device Programming
Devices > Keypads & Readers >
Door Assignment

MENU 6-1-7
0
00 - No Door Assignment
01 - Door 1 Name
02 - Door 2 Name
03 - Door 3 Name
04 - Door 4 Name
05 - Door 5 Name
06 - Door 6 Name
07 - Door 7 Name
08 - Door 8 Name
0
Devices > Keypads & Readers >
Lockout Time
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)

MENU 6-1-8
0
6 0
Seconds
09 - Door 9 Name
10 - Door 10 Name
11 - Door 11 Name
12 - Door 12 Name
13 - Door 13 Name
14 - Door 14 Name
15 - Door 15 Name
16 - Door 16 Name
This menu allows the installer to assign each keypad to a
single door group. 16 different door groups are available.
Programming a door group of zero (disabled) allows a
user from any access group to operate the keypad.
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [1] + [7] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the keypad or LAN reader
in the list then press [OK]. Alternatively, you can
enter the keypad or LAN reader number directly
and press [OK]. The keypad will display the current
door assignment setting.
This menu programs how long a keypad will be
quarantined if the PIN retry count value is exceeded.
See MENU 1-5-1 — PIN Retry Count. The PIN retry counter is
reset when any area is armed or disarmed using a valid PIN.
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [1] + [8]. The keypad will
display the current keypad lockout time.
Lockout Time
060 Seconds
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Use the numeric keys to program the number of
seconds the keypad will be locked out for. Valid
entries are 0 - 255, 0 = No Lockout.
3) Press [OK] to save and exit, else press [MENU] to
exit without saving.
Door Assignment Kp1
00 - No Door Assignment
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Use the up and down arrows to select the door
assignment that you want to assign the keypad or
LAN reader to.
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
10-8
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Device Programming
RF RECEIVER OPTIONS
Devices > RF Devices >
Receiver Options

MENU 6-2-0
1
Display RF Rcvr Trouble
Y
2
Alarm RF Rcvr Tamper
Y
3
Report RF Rcvr Tamper
Y
4
Alarm RF Rcvr Jamming
N
5
Report RF Rcvr Jamming
N
6
Alarm Rcvr Comms Fail
Y
7
Report Rcvr Comm Fail
Y
8
Reserved
N
This menu option allows you to configure the various RF
receiver functions. Only one RF reciever can be fitted per
panel.
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [2] + [0]. The keypad will
display the current receiver options.
 Display RF Rcvr Trouble
 Alarm RF Rcvr Tamper
 Report RF Rcvr Tamper
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Display RF Rcvr Trouble
Setting this option allows the panel to display a trouble
condition on the keypad when an RF receiver fail
condition occurs.
Alarm RF Rcvr Tamper
Setting this option allows the panel to trigger an alarm
when the RF receiver tamper circuit is tripped.
Report RF Rcvr Tamper
Setting this option allows the panel to send an RF
Receiver Tamper report to the the base station when the
RF receiver tamper circuit is tripped. A restore report will
be sent when the tamper circuit is resealled.
Alarm Rcvr Comm Fail
Setting this option allows the panel to sound an alarm
when it is unable to communicate with the RF Receiver.
Report Rcvr Comm Fail
Setting this option allows the panel to send an RF
Receiver Comms Fail report to the base station when the
panel is unable to communicate with the RF Receiver. A
restore report will be sent as soon as communication is
restored between the panel and the RF receiver.
Device > RF Devices >
Supervision Time
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)

MENU 6-2-1
0
2
4
HOURS
This menu sets the global RF supervision time for all RF
devices connected to the system.
RF transmitters (sensor devices) will send a supervisory
test signal approximately once every hour. The RF receiver
expects to receive this supervisory signal from every
transmitting device within the supervision time period.
The panel will send a Missing report to the base station for
any RF device that fails to report within the supervision
time.
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [2] + [1]. The keypad will
display the current RF supervision time.
Supervision Time
024 Hours
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Using the numeric keys, enter the number of hours
for the RF supervision time. Valid times are 0 - 255
hours, 0 = No Supervision.
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Alarm RF Rcvr Jammming
Setting this option allows the panel to sound an
alarm when the RF Receiver detects a jamming signal.
This signal may not be provided by all compatible RF
Receivers.
Report RF Rcvr Jamming
Setting this option allows the panel to send an RF
Receiver Jam report to the base station when the RF
Receiver detects a jamming signal. A restore report will
be sent as soon as the jamming signal stops.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
10-9
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Device Programming
Device > RF Devices >
RF Device Options

MENU 6-2-2
1
Display RF Tamper
Y
2
Report RF Tamper
Y
3
Report RF Low Battery
Y
4
Report Lost RF Devices
Y
5
Open Zone On Lost RF
N
6
Audible Keyfob Panic
Y
7
Report Keyfob Panic
Y
8
Keyfob Func Part On
Y
This menu option allows you to configure various options
and functions for RF devices connected to the system.
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [2] + [2]. The keypad will
display the current RF Device Options.
 Display RF Tamper
 Report RF Tamper
 Report RF Low Battery
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
Report Keyfob Panic
Setting this option will cause the panel to send a Panic
report to the base station when a panic alarm has been
initiated via a key fob.
Keyfob Func Part On
Setting this option will allow keyfob users to arm an area
or all areas of the system using function key 1 on the
keyfob.
Devices > RF Devices >
Add RF Keypad

MENU 6-2-3

MENU 6-2-4

MENU 6-2-5
Reserved for future use.
Delete RF Keypad
Reserved for future use.
View RF Device ID
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
This command allows you to trap and view a transmitters
I.D. number when it has been forgotten or it is no longer
legible on the transmitter label. The device being tested
must be compatible with the RF receiver fitted to the
panel.
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [2] + [5]. The system will then
begin waiting for a valid trigger signal.
Display RF Tamper
Setting this option will cause the keypad to display the
RF zone when a tamper condition occurs.
Waiting for Trigger!
Press OK or MENU
Report RF Tamper
Setting this option will cause the panel to send an RF
Device Faulted report to the base station when the
devices tamper curcuit is tripped. A restore report will be
sent when the tamper circuit is resealled.
Report RF Low Battery
Setting this option will cause the panel to send a report
to the base station when the RF device signals to the
panel that it has a low battery condition.
Report Lost RF Devices
Setting this option will cause the panel to send a report
to the base station if the panel detects that an RF device
is missing.
2) Trigger the transmitter by pressing any button on
the keyfob or by triggering the tamper switch on
any sensor.
Type = Keyfob
Ur1 User 1 Name
RFiD = 123456789
Press OK or MENU
3) To test another transmitter, repeat step 2. A beep
will be heard each time a new RFID is received and
the new number will be displayed.
Open Zone On Lost RF
Setting this option will cause the panel to show a zone
fault on the keypad for any RF devices that are missing
Audible Keyfob Panic
Setting this option allows users who have RF keyfobs to
trigger an audible panic alarm via the keyfob.
10-10
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Device Programming
SERIAL DEVICE OPTIONS
Devices > Serial Device >
Device Type
Devices > Serial Device >
Flow Control

MENU 6-3-0
0 0
00 - Disabled
01 - Serial Printer
02 - Computer
This menu sets the type of serial device that the panel will
be connected to.
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [3] + [0]. The keypad will
display the current device type.
MENU 6-3-2

0 0
00 - No Handshake
01 - Hardware
02 - Xon/Xoff
This menu sets the appropriate flow control for the device
you are connecting the serial board to. The flow control
method must be the same on both devices for a serial
connection to be established.
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [3] + [2]. The keypad will
display the current flow control setting.
Device Type
Flow Control
00 - Disabled
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
00 - No Handshake
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to select the
Device Type required then press [OK] to save and
exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
Devices > Serial Device >
Baud Rate
00 - No Device Conn
01 - 300 Baud
02 - 600 Baud
03 - 1200 Baud

2) Use the up and down arrow keys to select the Flow
Control required then press [OK] to save and exit or
press [MENU] to exit without saving.
MENU 6-3-1
0
0
04 - 2400 Baud
05 - 9600 Baud
06 - 19200 Baud
This menu sets the baud rate or speed that the panel will
send data to the serial device. This should be set to the
same baud rate as the serial device.
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [3] + [1]. The keypad will
display the current baud rate.
Devices > GSM/GPRS Module >
GSM/GPRS Status
-
MENU 6-5-0
This command interrogates the GSM module and
displays infomration about the radio and the SIM
installed. The first line is a heading which indicates the
GSM module type that is installed. Typical information
available is details on the installed radio, the SIM provider
and signal strength of the currently active SIM. Is should
be noted that the use of SIM 2 is restricted to reporting
protocols that utilise the dual sim where SIM 2 is a
backup.
Baud Rate
GSM/GPRS 2G Module Gi1
00 - No Device Conn
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to select the Baud
Rate required then press [OK] to save and exit or
press [MENU] to exit without saving.
<Scroll Parameters Hers>
Press  OK or MENU
The following parameters will be scrolled one at time
through the display.
IEMI=19327130710103097
Radio Model=SL6087
Radio Firmware=Rev 1.96
Radio S/N=If this is available not sure
Provider=Sim1 YES Optus or Sim2 YES Optus
Signal Strength= Sim1 10dB or Sim2 11 dB
Dual Sims Detected
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
10-11
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Device Programming
Devices > GSM/GPRS Module >
GSM/GPRS Options
Devices > GSM/GPRS Module >

MENU 6-5-1
1
Auto Forward SMS
N
2
Forward SMS To Mail
Y
3
Reserved
N
4
Reserved
N
5
Reserved
N
6
Reserved
N
7
Reserved
N
8
Reserved
N
-
CLI Trigger Table 1
MENU 6-5-5-0
1
Digits
16
1
Digits
16
1
Digits
16
1
Digits
16
1
Digits
16
1
Digits
16
1
Digits
16
1
Digits
16
1
Digits
16
1
Digits
16
Phone 1
Phone 2
Phone 3
Phone 4
This menu option allows you to configure various options
and functions for GSM or GPRS devices connected to the
system.
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [5] + [1]. The keypad will
display the current RF Device Options.
Auto Forward SMS
 Forward SMS To Mail
Reserved
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Auto Forward SMS
Any SMS received by the GSM module will be
automatically forwarded to the mobile telephone
number programmed in MENU 6-5-7.
Forward SMS To Mail
Any SMS received by the GSM module will be
automatically forwarded to the keypad (brings up
Main icon). SMs commands will be filtered (eg. ,PIN.,
AREA1,ON).
Phone 5
Phone 6
Phone 7
Phone 8
Phone 9
Phone 10
GSM MODULE REQUIRED) The CLI trigger table allows
you to program up to 10 telphone numbers that the
control panel will automatically identify when you call
the control panel to operate an output - see Output Event
type 71. Program the output event assignment as 1 so
that the output follows CLI trigger table 1.
1) Enter [MENU] + [6] + [5] + [5] + [0]. The keypad will
display the following:
Phone
Phone
Phone
Press
1=
2=
3=
 OK or MENU
2) Highlight the telephone number that you want to
program for CLI trigger, then press [OK] to select.
Trigger Table 1 Phone 1
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
3) Using the numeric keys, enter the telephone
number that you wish to program.
4) Press [OK] to save and return to the CLI table,
otherwise press [MENU] to exit without saving.
10-12
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Device Programming
Devices > GSM/GPRS Module >
-
CLI Trigger Table 2
1
Devices > GSM/GPRS Module >
MENU 6-5-5-1
Digits
16
Phone 1
-
SMS Control
MENU 6-5-6
1
Digits
16
1
Digits
16
1
Digits
16
1
Digits
16
1
Digits
16
1
Digits
16
1
Digits
16
1
Digits
16
1
Digits
16
1
Digits
16
Phone 1
1
Digits
16
Phone 2
Phone 2
1
Digits
16
Phone 3
Phone 3
1
Digits
16
Phone 4
Phone 4
1
Digits
16
Phone 5
Phone 5
1
Digits
16
Phone 6
Phone 6
1
Digits
16
Phone 7
Phone 7
1
Digits
16
Phone 8
Phone 8
1
Digits
16
Phone 9
Phone 9
1
Digits
16
Phone 10
Phone 10
(GSM MODULE REQUIRED) The CLI trigger table allows
you to program up to 10 telphone numbers that the
control panel will automatically identify when you call
the control panel to operate an output - see Output Event
type 71. Program the output event assignment as 2 so
that the output follows CLI trigger table 2.
1) Enter [MENU] + [6] + [5] + [5] + [1]. The keypad will
display the following:
Phone
Phone
Phone
Press
1=
2=
3=
 OK or MENU
2) Highlight the telephone number that you want to
program for CLI trigger, then press [OK] to select.
(GSM MODULE REQUIRED) The SMS control table allows
you to program up to 10 telphone numbers that the
control panel will automatically identify when you send
SMS commands to operate the control panel.
1) Enter [MENU] + [6] + [5] + [6]. The keypad will
display the following:
Phone
Phone
Phone
Press
1=
2=
3=
 OK or MENU
2) Highlight the telephone number that you want to
restrict for SMS control, then press [OK] to select.
SMS Control Phone 1
Trigger Table 2 Phone 1
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
3) Using the numeric keys, enter the telephone
number that you wish to program.
4) Press [OK] to save and return to the CLI table,
otherwise press [MENU] to exit without saving.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
3) Using the numeric keys, enter the telephone
number that you wish to program.
4) Press [OK] to save and return to the restrict SMS
control table, otherwise press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
10-13
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Device Programming
Devices > Ethernet Module >
Devices > Ethernet Module >
Module IP Address
1
0
0
0

0
0
Digits
0
0
0
0
MENU 6-6-0
0
Default Gateway
12
0 0
1
0
0
MENU 6-6-2

0
0
Digits
0
0
0
0
0
0
12
0 0
This is the IP address of the TCP/IP module on the
customer’s internal local area network.
The can be found by running IPCONFIG on a PC connected
to the clients network.
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [6] + [0]. The keypad will
display the current IP address.
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [6] + [2]. The keypad will
display the current gateway number.
Module IP Address
Default Gateway
000000000000
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
000000000000
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Use the numeric keys [0] to [9] + [←] and [→] keys
to program the IP Address, then press [OK] to save
and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
2) Use the numeric keys [0] to [9] + [←] and [→] keys
to program the 12 digit gateway number, then
press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Devices > Ethernet Module >
Subnet Mask
1
0
0

0
0
0
Digits
0
0
0
0
MENU 6-6-1
0
12
0 0
The can be found by running IPCONFIG on a PC
connected to the clients network. Typical subnet mask is
255.255.255.0.
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [6] + [1]. The keypad will
display the current subnet mask.
Devices > Ethernet Module >
Module MAC Address
0
0
0
0
MENU 6-6-3

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
This is the hardware machine address of the module and
can be found on the bar-coded sticker.
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [6] + [3]. The keypad will
display the current MAC address.
Module MAC Address
Subnet Mask
000000000000
Press  OK to SAVE
000000000000
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Use the numeric keys [0] to [9] + [←] and [→] keys
to program the 12 digit subnet mask number, then
press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
2) Use the numeric keys [0] to [9] + [←] and [→] keys
to program the MAC address, then press [OK] to
save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving. This is the hardware machine address of the
module and can be found on the bar-coded sticker.
Devices > Ethernet Module >
Ethernet Options

MENU 6-6-9
1
Display Faults
Y
2
Report Cable Lost
Y
3
Report IP Conflict
Y
4
Report Poll Fail
Y
5
Reserved
N
6
Reserved
N
7
Reserved
N
8
Reserved
N
This menu option allows you to configure the various RF
receiver functions. Only one RF reciever can be fitted per
panel.
10-14
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Device Programming
1) Enter your Installer PIN + [MENU].
2) Enter [6] + [6] + [9] + [OK].
The keypad will display the current options which are
selected or enabled.
 Display Faults
 Report Cable Lost
 Report IP Conflict
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
3) Use the numeric keys [1] to [8] to turn on and off
the features as required. When the corresponding
number on the keypad is on then the option is
selected.
4) When all options are programmed, press [OK] to
save and exit, or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
Display Faults
This option allows the keypad to display a trouble
condition if the control panel detects when the ethernet
module is missing, the module IP is changed, there is no
connection, there is an IP lockout or there is an IP conflict.
Report Cable Lost
This option allows the control panel to report when it
detects that the LAN cable is missing via the dialler.
Report IP Conflict
This option allows the control panel to report an IP
conflict via the dialler when it detects two computers
on the LAN or internet have been assigned the same IP
address.
Report Poll Fail
This option allows the control panel to report via the
dialler when the ethernet module fails to send a poll to
the base station.
» » E N D
O F
S E C T I O N « «
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
10-15
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Device Programming
This page left intentionally blank
10-16
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI

S E C TIO N 11
System Programming
T
his section contains the different parameters required
that are system related features.
The commands menu will allow you to view the panel
status, system troubles, history log, factory default and
entering service mode.
Some of the key parameters in these menus are the setting
of the date/time under Clock and Schedules which control
all the automated time functions of the system.
S YS T E M CO M M A N D S
System > Commands >
Panel Status
--
MENU 7-0-0
This command displays the following panel related
information on the keypad display.
Line 1 Displays:
The panel number that you are getting information
from (eg. Node 1 = Panel 1 etc). The Solution 144 is only
configured to work with one panel.
Line 2 Displays:
The panel name and firmware version number.
Line 3 Displays:
The current panel temperature, panel power supply
voltage and any system troubles which are in effect. This
line scrolls all events continiously
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [0] + [0] to view the panel
status.
Panel 1
Solution 144 Ver 2.00.00
Temperature = 33
Press OK or MENU
2) Press [OK] to exit when finished.
System > Commands >
System Trouble
--
MENU 7-0-1
This command lists any system troubles which are
currently in effect on the system. Information is diplayed
in a list format allowing you to select a paticular event and
then drill down to view more specific information.
System trouble events such as Failure To Comminicate or
Telco Line Fail are grouped under System Trouble in the
list while open zones are displayed individually one per
line.
When the keypad is in standby mode, system troubles
and open zones will be displayed on the status line of the
keypad. From this mode you can access the list of troubles
by pressing the down arrow.
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [0] + [1] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the trouble event in the
list then press [OK].
System Trbl
Zn1 Zone 1 Name
Zn2 Zone 2 Name
Press  OK or MENU
2) Selecting System Trouble from the list will show the
specific panel version information to be displayed
in the first two lines while the third line of the
display will scroll all current system trouble events.
Panel 1
Solution 144 Ver 2.00.00
Date and Time
Press OK or MENU
3) Selecting a Zone from the list will show the currrent
zone state.
Zone 1 Zame Zn1
EOL=Open 53020 ohms
Press OK or MENU
4) If no System Troubles are in effect the keypad will
display.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
11-1
Solution-144  Installation Manual  System Programming
There are no
System troubles
Press 
OK or MENU
5) Press [OK] or [MENU] when finished.
i
Note
When in stand-by mode keypads will display system
trouble events on the third line of the display.
S YS T E M T R O U B L E M E S S AG E S
The following list shows the systems trouble messages
including a description of what has caused the trouble
event to occur. System Trouble events are also recorded in
the System Event Log.
Power Missing
This trouble message will display when the AC mains
power supply to the panel is disconnected or failled and
will clear when the power is reconnected. The Mains
Power Icon in the keypad will also flash when the power
is missing.
AC Missing
The control panel has detected that the AC mains supply
has failed or is disconnected on an optional universal
expander or LAN power supply module.
Battery Low
This trouble message will display if the panel’s backup
battery voltage has dropped below 11.5 volts DC during
a battery test and will clear when the voltage is above
12.5 volts during a subsequent battery test.
Battery Missing
This trouble message will display if the panel detects
that the system’s backup battery is missing or has been
disconnected.
Low Battery
The control panel has detected that an RF sensor has a
low battery condition. Replace the RF sensor battery and
transmit an RF signal to clear the low battery condition.
Box Tamper
The control panel has detected that the tamper circuit on
the LAN power supply module is faulted. Place a shunt
across the tamper input pins or close the tamper circuit
to clear the box tamper trouble condition.
Temperature Alert
The control panel has detected that the console (eg.
keypad, LAN reader or fingerprint reader) has exceeded
the global temperature high or temperature low settings.
11-2
Receiver Missing
This trouble message will display if the panel detects the
RF receiver is missing or disconnected. The trouble will
clear when the receiver is reconnected.
Case Tamper
This trouble message will display if the panel detects that
the tamper circuit on the RF receiver is faulted.
Receiver Jam
This trouble message will display if the connected RF
receiver detects RF noise levels that may prevent it from
working correctly.
Comms Fail Route1
This trouble message will display if the panel has failed
to send pending reports to Report Destination 1. All
possible call attempts will be made before the trouble
message is displayed.
Comms Fail Route2
This trouble message will display if the panel has failed
to send pending reports to Report Destination 2. All
possible call attempts will be made before the trouble
message is displayed.
Sensor Watch Alert
The control panel has detected a zone has failed to
detect a change of state within the sensor watch period.
Comms BUSS Trble
This trouble message will display if the panel failed to
communicate to a system device which is connected to
the LAN bus (e.g. keypad etc).
Default PIN Trble
This trouble message will display if the panel detects
that either the Installer PIN or User 1 PIN is still set to the
factory default PIN. Change the PIN to clear the fault.
Date & Time
This trouble message will display if the system date and
time has not been set. Program the correct date and time
to clear the fault.
Cabinet Tamper
This trouble message will display if the panel detects that
it’s cabinet tamper input is faulted. Close the tamper
switch to clear the fault.
Connection Trouble
The control panel has detected that an output device (eg.
external siren etc) has failed or has been disconnected
from the system.
Overload Condition
The control panel has detected that an output has an
over current condition.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  System Programming
Zone Was In Alarm
A zone was previously in alarm and requires alarm memory reset to clear. Turn the area on and then off again to clear alarm
memory.
Telco Line Fail
This trouble message will display if the panel detects that
the telephone line has failed or been disconnected for a
minimum of 30 seconds. The trouble will clear once the
line has been restored for at least 1 minute.
LAN+ Overload
This trouble message will display if the panel detects
that the current load on the LAN+ power terminal has
exceeded it’s maximum rating of 1Amp DC. See MENU
7-3-2 — Fuse Options.
COMM+ Overload
This trouble message will display if the panel detects that
the current load on the COMM+ terminal has exceeded
it’s maximum rating of 3Amp DC. See MENU 7-3-2 —
Fuse Options.
ACC+ Overload
This trouble message will display if the panel detects that
the current load on the +12V accessory power terminal
has exceeded it’s maximum current rating of 1Amp D.C.
See MENU 7-3-2 — Fuse Options.
Service Required
This trouble message will display when the Service
Interval Timer expires. To clear the message the installer
must enter and exit programming mode. See MENU 2-92 — Service Interval.
Memory Checksum
This occurs if the memory checksum is corrupted. To
try and correct this, enter programming mode and
make a programming change like a user name then exit
programming mode. If this problem still persists you
must do a full system default.
Phone Line In Use
This trouble message will display while the panel is using
the phone line. The message will clear when the line is
released. This message can be prevented from displaying
in MENU 5-2-2 — Phone Line Options.
Battery Trouble
The control panel has detected that the real time clock
module has a low or missing backup battery.
System > Commands >
History Log
--
MENU 7-0-2
This menu allows you to review the last 1000 recorded
history events on your system. The information for each
event may be displayed over a number of pages or screens
depending on the actual event recorded.
When you enter this menu the system will show you
the most recent event first. Once the log reaches the
maximum event capacity each new event will replace the
oldest event in the log in a first in , first out fashion.
To move from one log event to the next use the [] and []
keys or if you know the event number you are looking for
simply enter the number followed by the [OK] key and the
system will display that event.
A left [] and right [] arrow will may be displayed at the
end of the first line on each log screen. These indicate
that the history log contains more than one page for the
current event. To view these pages use the [] and []
keys.
To review the History Log enter programming mode (PIN
+ MENU) then,
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [0] + [2].
2) The keypad will display the most recent event
stored in the history log.
E001 Mon,01Apr 02:00:00 
Manual Test Report
Panel 1
E001 Dest= SLL----PSTN Ph-96561234

3) Use the [] and [] keys scroll between history
events and use the [] and [] keys to view the
pages within the event.
4) Press [OK] or [MENU] to exit.
Some other examples of the log are as follows:
1)
E202 Sun,01Apr 03:41:45 
Disarmed by User
Area 1 Name
Ur1 User 1 Name
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
11-3
Solution-144  Installation Manual  System Programming
E202 Dest= SLL----
Kp1 Keypad 1 Name
Panel 1
Dest 1 at 01-Apr 03:41:57
2)
E405 Sun,01Apr 06:41:45 
Burglary Zone Bypassed
Area 1 Name
Zn3 Zone 3 Name
System > Commands >
Domestic Default
The following letters will be displayed in the eight
destination locations indicating the status of the report.
The log will also show the actual time a report was sent.
The following table list the changes that will occur when
you select domestic default using MENU 7-0-3.
Program Option
Domestic Default Value
All Trouble Reports
Disabled
All Bypass Reports
Disabled
All Restore Reports
Disabled
Destination 1 TX Format
Domestic Reporting
Access Route
Log Only
Open / Close Reports
Log Only
Test Route
Log Only
System Route
Log Only
Table 28: Domestic Default Settings
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [0] + [3]. The keypad will
display:
Dest =
S = Sent
L = Logged
P = Pending
F = Failed
A = Aborted
MENU 7-0-3
This command will configure the control panel for
Domestic format reporting (eg. mobile telephones
etc). All alarm restore reports and open/close reporting
options will be automatically disabled. Therefore, only
emergency, burglary and fire reports will be sent.
E405 Dest= SLL----
Ur1 User 1 Name
Panel 1
Dest 1 at 01-Apr 06:41:57
The Dest= field displays the various reporting route
information for up to eight different reporting
destinations. Your installer will have configured these
during installation.

To RECONFIGURE all panel
dialler programming to
DOMESTIC, Press OK. or To
Cancel,Press MENU.
2) Press [OK] to start the default process or press
[MENU] to cancel and exit.
3) The keypad will display the following message
during the default process and will exit back to the
menu when finished.
Defaulting System
..Please Wait..
System > Commands >
Factory Default

MENU 7-0-4
This command will erase ALL programmable data and
return the control panel to factory default settings.
Defaulting the panel will NOT erase any history events
that are currently stored in the panel.
During a factory default both the Status and Dialler
LED indicators on the panel will flash very quickly to
Note indicate defaulting is still in progress.
i
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [0] + [4]. The keypad will
display:
11-4
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  System Programming
This command will ERASE
all panel programming. To
Continue press OK, or
MENU to cancel
System > Commands >
Service Mode
2) Press [OK] to start the default process or press
[MENU] to cancel and exit.
3) The keypad will display the following message
during the default process and will exit back to the
menu when finished.

MENU 7-0-8
This command allows the installer to put the panel into
service mode before performing system maintenance or
upgrades. When in service mode, the following functions
are disabled. By default, service mode will automatically
terminate after 2 hours if not terminated sooner by the
installer.
™™ Zone Tamper
™™ Alarm Outputs
Defaulting System
..Please Wait..
™™ Dialler
™™ Panel Tamper
System > Commands >
Template Default

MENU 7-0-5
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [0] + [8]. The keypad will
display the current service mode status.
This command is RESERVED.
System > Commands >
TimeZone Array
Service Mode
Service Mode is OFF,
To turn ON, Press ON.
Press OK or MENU
-
MENU 7-0-6
This menu allows the master user and installer to view
the true/false status of all 16 timezones at the same time.
The timezone status will continuously be updated on the
display so that real time status can be seen. The top two
rows of the display show the timezone number, the third
row displays the timezone status.
T = TimeZone is True
2) To turn service mode on, press [ON], or press [OFF]
to turn service mode off.
3) Press [OK] or [MENU] to exit when finished.
i
Note
Service mode will automatically exit after 2 hours if
set to do so in MENU 7-7-4 — Installer Options.
F = TimeZone is False
- = Disabled or Not Available
1) Enter [MENU] + [7] + [0] + [6] and use the up and
down arrows to select the timezone to view. The
keypad will display the status of all 16 timezones.
0000000001111111
1234567890123456
TTTTT---FFFF---Press  OK or MENU
In the example above,
T = TimeZones 01 to 05 are true
F = TimeZones 09 to 12 are false
- = TimeZones 06 to 08 and Doors 13 to 16 are
Disabled or Not Available
2) When finished press [OK] or [MENU] to exit.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
11-5
Solution-144  Installation Manual  System Programming
S YS T E M C LO C K
System > Clock >
Summertime Off
System > Clock >
Set Date And Time
-
MENU 7-1-0
At 2:00am
This menu allows you to program and or adjust the date
and time stored in the control panel. The time is entered
in 24Hr format.
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [1] + [0]. The keypad will
display the current date and time.

-
-
Month
-
Week
-
MENU 7-1-2
-
-
-
Day
This menu allows you to program when day light
savings end during the year. This will allow the panel to
automatically adjust it’s built in clock accordingly. In
Australia, daylight savings moves backwards one hour at
3:00 am on the last Sunday of March.
To program Summertime Off, you will need to program
the month of the year (Jan to Dec), the week of the month
(1 to 5) and the day of the week (Sun to Sat) that daylight
saving ends.
Set Date And Time
01-Jan-2012 04:37
Press  OK to SAVE
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
2) Use the left, right, up and down arrow keys to set
the day, month, year, hour and minute. Use left and
right keys to scroll the cursor left and right to
between the month, day, year, hour and minute.
3) When the time is set correctly press [OK] to save
and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
System > Clock >
Summertime On

-
At 2:00am
-
-
Month
-
Week
-
MENU 7-1-1
-
-
-
Day
This menu allows you to program when day light
savings start during the year. This will allow the panel
to automatically adjust it’s built in clock accordingly. In
Australia, daylight savings moves forward one hour at
2:00 am on the last Sunday of October.
To program Summertime On, you will need to set the
month of the year (Jan to Dec), the week of the month
(1 to 5) and the day of the week (Sun to Sat) that daylight
savings starts.
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [1] + [1]. The keypad will
display the current Summertime on.
Summertime On
Month Week Day
----- --Press  OK to SAVE
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [1] + [2]. The keypad will
display the current Summertime off.
Summertime Off
Month Week Day
----- --Press  OK to SAVE
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to toggle the
month, week and year. Use the left and right keys
to move the cursor between the month, week and
year.
3) When finished press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Australian Daylight Savings Times
From 2008, the ACT, NSW, South Australia, Victoria and
Tasmania will all start daylight savings on the first Sunday
in October and end on the first Sunday in April. This will
result in an extra month of daylight savings for the ACT
and introduces common start and finish dates in these
states.
Daylight Saving Begins
Daylight Saving Ends
Turn Clock Ahead 1 hr
Turn Clock Back 1 hr
Sunday 2 October 2011
Sunday 1 April 2012
Sunday 7 October 2012
Sunday 7 April 2013
Sunday 6 October 2013
Sunday 6 April 2014
Table 29: Daylight Savings Dates - Australia
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to toggle the
month, week and year. Use the left and right keys
to move the cursor between the month, week and
year.
3) When finished press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
11-6
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  System Programming
System > Clock >
Locale

MENU 7-1-3
00 - Disabled
01 - SYDNEY
04 - ADELAIDE
02 - MELBOURNE
05 - PERTH
03 - BRISBANE
06 - HOBART
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
This menu programs the Locale in Australia. It will
update the time from a central server every month. Call
Charges will apply.
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [1] + [3]. The keypad will
display the current locale time.
Locale
00 - Disabled
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Use [] and [] keys to select the locale required,
then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to
exit without saving.
S YS T E M P O W E R O P T I O N S
System > Power >
AC Options

MENU 7-3-0
1
Display AC Fail
Y
2
Report AC Fail
Y
3
Sync Clock To AC
Y
4
Random AC Report 2hr
N
5
AC Fail After 1hr
N
6
Reserved
N
7
Reserved
N
8
Display Clock Trouble
Y
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
This menu option allows you to configure the AC Mains
Power system options.
Display AC Fail
Setting this option will cause the panel to flash the
Mains Power icon as soon as the AC power supply has
failed. If the power remains missing continiously for 1
minute then a system trouble will be registered on the
keypad. When the AC power supply returns to normal the
Mains Power icon will remain on steady. If this option is
disabled then the system will not flash the Mains Power
icon and no system trouble will occur.
Report AC Fail
Setting this option will cause the panel to report an
AC Fail to the base station if the mains power has been
missing for a period of 1 minute. A restore report will be
sent once the mains power has been restored for one
minute.
Sync Clock to AC
Setting this option allows the panel to syncronise its
internal clock with the mains frequency (50hz). This
option should be set unless the panel is being used in an
area where the mains power is unreliable.
Random AC Reporting 2hr
Setting this option allows the panel to randomly delay
(up to 2 hours) the AC Fail report. This option is used
to prevent multiple panels from reporting AC fail at the
same time.
AC Fail After 1 Hour
Setting this option will cause the panel to only send an
AC Fail report to the base station if the power has been
missing continuously for one hour. The Mains Power icon
will operate as normal.
Display Clock Trouble
Setting this option will cause the panel to show a
Date and Time System trouble if the power is removed
from the system for any period of time such as when
performing a system upgrade or service work. If this
option is disabled then no system trouble will appear
and you will need to remember to set the correct time
when you re power the system.
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [3] + [0]. The keypad will
display the current AC Options.
 Display AC fail
 Report AC Fail
 Sync Clock To AC
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
11-7
Solution-144  Installation Manual  System Programming
System > Power >
Battery Options

MENU 7-3-1
1
Display Battery Fail
Y
2
Report Battery Fail
Y
3
Battery Test On Arming
Y
4
OK To Arm Low Battery
Y
5
Reserved
N
6
Reserved
N
7
Reserved
N
8
Reserved
N
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
This menu option allows you to configure the standby
Battery system options. The system is constantly
monitoring the battery condition with a dynamic battery
test carried out every 4 hours.
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [3] + [1]. The keypad will
display the current Battery Options.
 Display Battery Fail
 Report Battery Fail
 Battery Test On Arming
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Display Battery Fail
Setting this option will cause the keypad to display
a Trouble condition when the panel detects that the
standby battery is disconnected or that its voltage is low.
The trouble condition will clear as soon as the panel has
measured the battery voltage is 12.5 volts or greater.
Report Battery Fail
Setting this option will cause the panel to send a Low
Battery report to the base station when it measures
the battery voltage has dropped below 11.5 volts. A
Low Battery Restore report will be sent when the panel
detects that the battery voltage is above 12.5 volts.
If the panel fails to detect the battery, or if it measures
the battery voltage below 10.2 volts, then a Battery Test
Failed report will be sent. A Battery Test restore will be
sent when the battery is re-connected or replaced.
Battery Test On Arming
Setting this option will cause the panel to perform an
additional dynamic battery test each time Area 1 is
armed All On.
OK To Arm Low Battery
Setting this option will allow the system to be armed
even though the panel currently has a low battery
condition.
When this option is disabled, the panel will not arm
if there is a low battery condition or if the battery is
missing. The user will be notified of the system trouble
on the keypad and they will need to have the fault
rectified before the system or area can be armed.
System > Power >
Fuse Options

MENU 7-3-2
1
Display COMM+ O/Load
Y
2
Report COMM+ O/Load
Y
3
Display +12v O/Load
Y
4
Report +12v O/Load
Y
5
Display LAN O/Load
Y
6
Report LAN O/Load
Y
7
Reserved
N
8
Reserved
N
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
This menu option allows you to configure the Fuse related
system options.
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [3] + [2]. The keypad will
display the current Fuse Options.
 Display COMM+ O/Load
 Report COMM+ O/Load
 Display +12v O/Load
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Display COMM+ O/Load
Setting this option allows the keypad to display a system
trouble message when the current load on the COMM +
terminal exceeds its maximum rating of 3 Amps.
Report COMM+ O/Load
Setting this option will cause the panel to send an
Overcurrent Trouble report to the base station when
the current load on the COMM + terminal exceeds its
maximum rating of 3 Amps.
11-8
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  System Programming
Display +12v O/Load
Setting this option allows the keypad to display a system
trouble message when the current load on the +12 V
terminal exceeds its maximum rating of 1Amp.
Report +12v O/Load
Setting this option will cause the panel to send an
Overcurrent Trouble report to the base station when the
current load on the +12 V terminal exceeds its maximum
rating of 1Amp.
System > Siren >
Speed
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [4] + [1]. The keypad will
display the current siren speed.
Speed
S. . . . . . . . . . . . . F
---------------------Press  OK to SAVE
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to change the
siren speed.
3) To test the new siren speed press [ON] to sound the
siren and press [OFF] to turn the siren off.
4) Repeat Steps 2 and 3 until the desired siren tone is
achieved then press [OK] to save and exit, or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
HORN SPEAKER OPTIONS
System > Siren >
Tone
MENU 7-4-1
This menu allows you to customise the speed of the siren
tone when a non-fire alarm is triggered. By changing the
tone and speed, it is possible to program a unique siren
sound for each system when you are installing a number
of them in close proximity to each other.
Display LAN O/Load
Setting this option allows the keypad to display a system
trouble message when the current load on the LAN+
terminal exceeds its maximum rating of 1Amp.
Report LAN O/Load
Setting this option will cause the panel to send an
Overcurrent Trouble report to the base station when the
current load on the LAN+ terminal exceeds its maximum
rating of 1Amp.


MENU 7-4-0
This menu allows you to customise the tone that is
emitted from the horn speaker when a non-fire alarm is
triggered. By changing the tone and speed, it is possible
to program a unique siren sound for each system when
you are installing a number of them in close proximity to
each other.
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [4] + [0]. The keypad will
display the current siren tone.
Tone
1. . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
---------------------Press  OK to SAVE
i
Note
Only outputs programmed as event type 36 and or
37 will be affected by this menu option.
System > Siren >
Volume
-
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
MENU 7-4-2
1
5
This menu allows you to program the volume level of the
radio key speeker beeps which are heard when the system
is armed and disarmed using a radio keyfob.
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [4] + [2]. The keypad will
display the current siren volume (default = 15).
Volume
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to change the the
siren tone.
15
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
3) To test the new siren tone press [ON] to sound the
siren and press [OFF] to turn the siren off.
4) Repeat Steps 2 and 3 until the desired siren tone is
achieved then press [OK] to save and exit, or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
i
Note
Only outputs programmed as Event Type 36 and or
37 will be affected by this menu option.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
2) Using the numeric keys, enter the new volume
level. Valid entries are 0 to 15 where 15 = the
loudest volume and 0 = no speeker beeps.
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Only outputs programmed as Event Type 36, horn
speaker with beeps will be effected by this menu
Note option.
i
11-9
Solution-144  Installation Manual  System Programming
System > Siren >
Siren Swinger
T I M E ZO N E S

MENU 7-4-3
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
0
3
This menu allows you to program how many times a zone
programmed for Lockout Siren can sound the siren during
each arming cycle.
At default, zones programmed for Lockout Siren will be
able to trigger the siren 3 times before being locked out.
The count will be reset when the system or area is next
disarmed.
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [4] + [3]. The keypad will
display the current Swinger Siren count.
Siren Swinger
3
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Using the numeric keys, enter the new swinger
siren count. Valid entries are 0 to 15 where 0 =
unlimited.
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
The control panel has 2 fixed timezones (Tz0 - Disabled and
Tz1 - 24 Hr TimeZone) and 15 programmable timezones.
A timezone is created by setting up a valid time period
that becomes TRUE whenever the time is equal to or after
the start time and before the end time for the selected
day.
There are 2 default timezones created within the system
that cannot be changed. These are Tz0 = Disabled - which
is FALSE 24/7 and Tz1 = 24 Hour which is TRUE 24/7 (TZ1
being the opposite of Tz0). Tz2 to 16 are configurable to
reflect any operation time and day as required to operate,
restrict, or control when something happens. Please
refer to the following table that illustrates the effect of
assigning timezones.
Assigned To Tz0 (Disabled)
Resulting Effect
Door
No access
Door Lock
Will never unlock
Door Group
No access
Egress
Will never trigger
Auto Arming
Will never arm (Same as Tz1)
Output
Will never trigger
Assigned To TZ1 (24 Hr)
Resulting Effect
Door
Full 24 hr access
Door Lock
Unlocked 24 hrs
Door Group
Full 24 hr access
Egress
Operates 24 hrs
Auto Arming
Will never arm (Same as Tz1)
Output
Always triggered
Table 30: Fixed Timezones (Tz0 & Tz1)
11-10
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  System Programming
System > TimeZones >
Name
-
T i m e Z o n e
2
MENU 7-5-0
N a m e
1) Enter [MENU] + [7] + [5] + [1] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the time zone in the list
then press [OK]. Alternatively, you can enter the
time zone number directly and press [OK].
This menu allows you to program a descriptive text name
for each timezone in the system. Each timezone name has
up to 20 characters. The timezone name will be referred
to in other timezone related programming functions.
1) Enter [MENU] + [7] + [5] + [0] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the Schedule in the list
then press [OK]. Alternatively, you can enter the
Schedule number directly and press [OK].
Tz2 TimeZone
Tz3 TimeZone
Tz4 TimeZone
Press  OK
Tz2 TimeZone
Tz3 TimeZone
Tz4 TimeZone
Press  OK
2) Using the arrow keys , select the start/stop period
required, then press [OK] to select. Each time zone
include 4 seperate start/stop periods that can be
programmed.
2 Name
3 Name
4 Name
or MENU
Period 1
Period 2
Period 3
Press  OK or MENU
2) User the arrow and number keys to move and
change text. When the Schedule Name is complete,
press [OK]. At any time you can press the [OFF] key
to clear the text from the current cursor position to
the end of the line.
3) Enter the start and stop times in 24 hour format.
Each include - Hours (HH), Minutes (MM) and
Seconds (SS).
Time Tz2 Period 1
Start Time
Stop Time
00:00:00
23:59:59
Press  OK to SAVE
Name Tz3
TimeZone 3 Name
Press  OK to SAVE
See Alpha Text Programming in Section 4 Programming Overview for further detail on entering
Note alpha text.
i
Period 1
-
Stop Time
-- : -- : --
-- : -- : --
MM
HH
MM
SS
Stop Time
-- : -- : --
-- : -- : --
i
MM
SS
HH
MM
-- : -- : --
-- : -- : --
SS
HH
MM
SS
Stop Time
-- : -- : --
-- : -- : --
MM
SS
HH
MM
SS
This menu allows you to program the start time and stop
time of each timezone period. Each timezone can have up
to 4 different periods.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
-
Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu
Period 1
Period 2
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu
Period 3
Start Time
HH
System > TimeZones >
Day
SS
Stop Time
MM
If the start time equals the stop time then the time
zone is disabled. A time of --:--:-- is not used.
Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu
Start Time
HH
Period 4
SS
Start Time
HH
Period 3
MENU 7-5-1
Start Time
HH
Period 2
4) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Note
System > TimeZones >
Time
2 Name
3 Name
4 Name
or MENU
N
N
N
N
N
Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu
Period 4
N
N
N
N
MENU 7-5-2
Fri
Sat
Hol
N
N
N
Fri
Sat
Hol
N
N
N
Fri
Sat
Hol
N
N
N
Fri
Sat
Hol
N
N
N
This menu allows you to program which days of the week
each period of the time zone will operate. To program,
use keys [1] to [8] to toggle on or off the days that the time
zone period will operate (e.g. to enable Monday press [2]
and to disable Monday press [2] again).
11-11
Solution-144  Installation Manual  System Programming
1) Enter [MENU] + [7] + [5] + [2] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the time zone in the list
then press [OK]. Alternatively, you can enter the
time zone number directly and press [OK].
Tz2 TimeZone
Tz3 TimeZone
Tz4 TimeZone
Press  OK
2) Using the arrow keys , select the start/stop period
required, then press [OK] to select. Each time zone
include 4 seperate start/stop periods that can be
programmed.
Period 1
Period 2
Period 3
Press  OK or MENU
2 Name
3 Name
4 Name
or MENU
2) Using the arrow keys , select the start/stop period
required, then press [OK] to select. Each time zone
include 4 seperate start/stop periods that can be
programmed. Each time zone period can have
different days of the week programmed.
3) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable. Repeat Step 2 until all options
are programmed as required.
Invert Period Logic
Master Edit Allowed
Reserved
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
Period 1
Period 2
Period 3
Press  OK or MENU
3) Use keys [1] to [8] to enable/disable the days of the
week that the time zone period will operate.
Invert Logic
Setting this option will invert both the start time and
stop time of the period of the selected time zone. The
programmed start time will now be the stop time and
the programmed stop time will be the start time.
Day Tz2 Period 1
S M T W T F S Hol
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Press 1-8 OK to SAVE
4) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
System > TimeZones >
TimeZone Options
-
MENU 7-5-3
1
Invert Period Logic
N
2
Reserved
N
3
Reserved
N
4
Reserved
N
5
Reserved
N
6
Reserved
N
7
Reserved
N
8
Reserved
N
This menu allows you to program what function the time
zone will perform. There are a number of options which
are explained in more detail below.
1) Enter [MENU] + [7] + [5] + [3] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the time zone in the list
then press [OK]. Alternatively, you can enter the
time zone number directly and press [OK].
Tz1 24 Hour TimeZone
Tz2 TimeZone 2 Name
Tz3 TimeZone 3 Name
Press  OK or MENU
11-12
4) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Master Can Edit
Setting this option allows a master user to edit the
timezone period. There are many instances where
altering a timezone can seriously alter the behaviour
of the system and only trained professional operators
should be allowed to perform this type of operation.
S YS T E M H O L I D AYS
The control panel has provision for up to 8 individual
holiday time periods which can be used to allow or deny
access to users or to operate outputs via timezones.
Holidays are defined by setting a start and stop date so it
is possible to create 1 system holiday that spans multiple
days. For example the holiday could start on the 1st Jan
and end on the 5th Jan.
System > Holidays >
Holiday Name
H
o
l
i
d
a
-
y
1
N
MENU 7-6-0
a m e
This menu allows you to program a 20 character text name
for each holiday.
1) Enter [MENU] + [7] + [6] + [0] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the Holiday in the list
then press [OK]. Alternatively, you can enter the
Holiday number directly and press [OK].
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  System Programming
H1 Holiday 1
H2 Holiday 2
H3 Holiday 3
Press  OK
S YS T E M O P T I O N S
Name
Name
Name
or MENU
System > System Options >
General Options
2) User the arrow and number keys to move and
change text. When the Holiday Name is complete,
press [OK]. At any time you can press the [OFF] key
to clear the text from the current cursor position to
the end of the line.
Holiday Name H1
Holiday 1 Name
Press  OK to SAVE
System > Holidays >
Start Stop Dates

MENU 7-7-0
1
Display LAN Fail
Y
2
Report LAN Fail
Y
3
Alarm On LAN Fail
N
4
Cannot Change Own PIN
N
5
Reserved
N
6
Monitor Default PINs
Y
7
PIN Always Required
N
8
Display Menu Numbers
Y
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
This menu allows you to configure the General system
options. All options are global to users, areas and keypads.
-
Start 12am
01
Jan
DD
MM
MENU 7-6-1
Stop 12am
01
Jan
DD
MM
This menu allows you to program the start and stop date
for each holiday period. Holidays can be as short as one
day or as long as 364 days.
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [7] + [0]. The keypad will
display the current General system options.
 Display LAN Fail
 Report LAN Fail
Alarm On LAN Fail
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
1) Enter [MENU] + [7] + [6] + [1] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the Holiday in the list
then press [OK]. Alternatively, you can enter the
Holiday number directly and press [OK].
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable. Repeat Step 2 until all options
are programmed as required.
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to select the
holiday that you want to change, then press [OK].
Alternatively, you can enter the holiday number,
then press [OK]. The keypad will display the holiday
start date:
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Holiday Dates H1
Start 12am
Stop 12am
01 Jan
01 Jan
Press  OK to SAVE
3) To program, use the left and right arrows to scroll
the cursor left and right between the holiday day
and month options and use the up and down arrow
keys to scroll the day and month.
4) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
If the start day and month equals the stop day
and month then no holiday exists. There must be a
Note difference between start and stop dates.
i
Display LAN Fail
Setting this option allows all connected keypads to
display a system trouble when a device connected the
the system LAN has failed to communicate to the panel.
Report LAN Fail
Setting this option allows the panel to report which LAN
device has failed to the base station.
Alarm On LAN Fail
Setting this option allows the panel to sound an
alarm when a device connected to the LAN failed to
communicate to the panel.
Cannot Change Own PIN
Setting this option prevents all users the ability to
change their own PIN.
Monitor Default PINs
Setting this option will cause the panel to monitor the
default Installer PIN and User 1 PIN which are factory set
to 1234 and 2580 respectively. If either of these codes
are left as default then the keypad will display the system
trouble Default PIN. The fault will clear once the code or
codes have been changed.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
11-13
Solution-144  Installation Manual  System Programming
PIN Always Required
Setting this option will force the system to request a
valid PIN to be entered before any menu functions can
be accessed. If this option is not set then some restricted
menu options will be available without entering a valid
PIN.
Display Menu Numbers
Setting this option causes the keypad to display
the menu numbers for all commands and menu
programming options. The menu numbers can be used
as navigation shortcuts when programming.
System > System Options >
Area Options

MENU 7-7-1
1
Area 1 Common
N
2
First Open Last Close
N
3
Reset Siren All Users
Y
4
Power Up As Down
Y
5
Fault ACK All Areas
Y
6
Delay Trouble Beeps
Y
7
Power Up Disarmed
N
8
Reserved
N
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
This menu allows you to configure the Area system
options. All options are global to users, areas and
keypads.
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [7] + [1]. The keypad will
display the current Area system options.
Area 1 Common
First Open Last Close
 Reset Siren All Users
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Area 1 Common
Setting this option will cause the system to automatically
arm Area 1 All On when all other areas have been turned
on. As soon as any area is turned off the system will
automatically turn Area 1 off. Only one common area is
available on the system. If no common area is required
then do not set this option.
Reset Siren All Users
Setting this option allows a user with a valid PIN to
silence alarm outputs from any keypad on the system
without the need to toggle the keypad to the area that
the alarm occurred.
If this option has not been programmed, the user will
need to toggle the keypad to the area the alarm occurred
in and then silence the alarm by entering their PIN
followed by the [OFF] key.
Power Up As Down
Setting this option will cause the panel to power up
in the same state as it was when it was powerd down.
For example with this option set if the panel is in the
disarmed state and all power is removed for service
work to be done. When the power is reapplied, the
panel will start in the disarmed state. Any zone that was
programmed as bypassed when the power was removed
will remain bypassed when the power supply has
restored.
If this option is not programmed, the system will always
power up in the armed All On state and any zones
bypassed prior to power loss will power up as unbypassed zones.
Fault ACK All Areas
Setting this option allow system trouble faults to be
acknowledged from any area or keypad on the system
without the need to toggle over to the area the fault
occurred in.
Delay Trouble Beeps
Setting this option will prevent any system trouble
events from sounding the keypad speaker between
the hours of 10pm until 7am. During this time, any new
trouble events will be shown in the keypad display.
If any trouble events are still in effect at 7am, the keypad
will begin sounding the trouble alert to notify the user
of the problem. The function is primarily for use in
residential installations.
Power Up Disarmed
Setting this option will allow the control panel to always
power up in the disarmed state after removing both the
battery and AC mains supply and then reapplying power.
First Open Last Close
Setting this option will cause the system to only report
an opening signal to the base station when the first area
is Disarmed and a closing signal when the last area has
been armed or turned All On.
11-14
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  System Programming
System > System Options >
Keypad Idle Screen

MENU 7-7-2
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
00 - No Idle Screen
01 - Date And Time
0
0
02 - Time
03 - Custom Screen
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
This menu allows you to select a keypad Idle Screen which
will appear on the display when there has been no activity
at the keypad for a period of 2 minutes. The keypad display
will return to normal as soon as any key has been pressed.
All keypads on the system will display the same screen
saver. See the examples below.
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [7] + [2]. The keypad will
display the current Keypad Idle Screen option.
Keypad Idle Screen
00 - No Idle Screen
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
0
-
0 0 ˚C
Hi TEMP
System > System Options >
Installer Options

MENU 7-7-4
1
Report Installer
N
2
Report Prog Change
Y
3
Restrict Installer PIN
N
4
Reserved
N
5
Auto Exit Install 2hr
Y
6
Auto Exit Service 2hr
Y
7
Multi Tenant Mode
N
8
Allow Defaulting
Y
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to select which
idle screen you want to display then press [OK] to
save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
System > System Options >
Keypad Hi/Lo Temp
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to program the
High and Low temperatures. Use the left and right
arrow keys to move between the High and Low
temperatures.
Valid range =( 000˚C to 050˚C).
MENU 7-7-3
0
0 0 ˚C
Lo TEMP
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
This menu allows you to set the keypad High and Low
temperature values which the system will monitor. Valid
temperatures are from 00 ˚C minimum to a maximum of
50 ˚C with a tolerance = +/- 1 ˚C.
This menu allows you to configure the Installer system
options.
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [7] + [4]. The keypad will
display the current Installer options.
Report Installer
 Report Prog Change
Restrict Installer PIN
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
If the temperature on the selected keypad falls below the
minimum set temperature then the keypad will display
‘Low Temp xx˚C If the temperature increases above the
maximum set temperature then the keypad will display
High temp xx˚C.
Report Installer
Setting this option will cause the panel to make a log
entry and to send a report to the base station when the
installer enters and exits Installer programming mode.
The entry/exit reports will follow the System Route.
Where xx = the set temperature to be monitored.
Report Prog Change
Setting this option will cause the panel to make a log
entry and to send a report to the base station when
the installer has changed programming data. The data
changed reports will follow the System Route.
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [7] + [3]. The keypad will
display the current temperature settings.
Keypad Hi/Lo Temp
High Temp Low Temp
000
000
Press  OK to SAVE
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Restrict Installer PIN
After power up, the installer PIN can turn on or off an
area (or multiple areas if partitioned) until a user PIN is
used to turn an area on or off. If the system is in service
mode, then the installer PIN can always silence and turn
off an area when an alarm even occurs.
11-15
Solution-144  Installation Manual  System Programming
Auto Exit Install 2hr
Setting this option will cause the panel to automatically
terminate Installer programming mode after 2 minutes
of no activity on the keypad. If this option is not set, the
panel will remain in Installer programming mode until
manually terminated.
Auto Exit Service 2hr
Setting this option will cause the panel to automatically
terminate service mode after 2 hours of no activity
on the keypad keys. If this option is not set, the panel
will remain in the service mode until it is manually
terminated.
Multi Tenant Mode
This options includes additional support for muti tenant
applications such as self storage garages or scholl
storage lockers etc.
When enabled, the option will lock the first 144 users on
the system to each of the 144 zones on the system. Each
time the users enters their PIN + [OFF], the corresponding
zone is automatically bypassed allowing them to access
the zone area. The zone is again ready to detect intrusion
when the user enters their PIN + [ON].
Users 145 to 255 continue to operate as normal users.
Allow Defaulting
Setting this option will allow the panel to be defaulted
back to the factory setting using the the on board push
button switch. See below for defaulting instructions.
If this option is not set then manual defaulting will not
function and the only way to default the panel will be by
using the current installer PIN. If the installer PIN is not
know then the panel will need to be returned to Bosch
Security for defaulting. A charge applies for this service.
Defaulting the panel does not erase all events in the
history event log. If this option has been disabled,
Note the dialler seize relay will pulse or click 4 times during
power up.
i
System > System Options >
Language

MENU 7-7-5
0 - English
1 - Alternate Language
0
This menu allows you to select the language that will be
displayed on the keypad. You have a choice between
English (default) or a second language (determined by the
country that the control panel is shipped to).
1) Enter [MENU] + [7] + [7] + [5]. The keypad will
display the following:
Language
0
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Using the numeric keys, enter the language option
as required then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
System > System Options >
Site Name
1
M y
A
-
MENU 7-7-7
Characters
l a r m
32
This menu allows the master user to program the emails
subject line to identify the alarm system (eg. site name) to
the receiving party. A maximum of 32 characters of text
can be entered in this field. Use the [] and [] keys to
scroll the cursor left and right to view the entire name.
1) Enter [7] + [7] + [7] + [OK].
The keypad will display the current Site Name.
Site Name
MyAlarm
Press  OK to SAVE
2) Using the numeric keys, enter the description of the
control panels site name. You can change a single
chanracter by scrolling the cursor left [] and right
[].
At any time you can use the [] and [] keys to scroll
through the complete list of available characters.
To clear all text from the cursor position to the right,
press the [OFF] key.
3) When the site name is complete, press [OK] to save
and exit, or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
11-16
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  System Programming
S YS T E M T E S T I N G
System > System Testing >
Walk Test All Zones
System > System Testing >
Battery Test
--
MENU 7-9-0
This menu allows you to test all zones within an area at the
same time.
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [9] + [0]. The keypad will
display a list of areas that are available to walk test
zones.
2) Using the up and down arrow keys, select the area
that you want to walk test, then press [OK].
Alternatively, you can enter the area number, then
press [OK]. The keypad will begin to scroll all zones
that need to be tested.
MENU 7-9-1
This menu allows you to test the panels standby battery.
The battery test will last about two minutes and the
keypad will display the voltage of the battery during the
test.
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [9] + [1]. The keypad will
display the battery voltage whilst under test:
Battery test in progress.
Please wait..
Voltage = 13.4V
To Go Back Press OK
To test Zn1
open then close
Zone 1 Name
Press OK or MENU
3) Open and close each zone that needs to be tested.
A zone that has been successfully tested will no
longer scroll on the keypad display. When all zones
have been tested, the keypad will display.
--
If the battery has passed the test, the keypad will
display:
Battery Test Passed
Press OK To Continue
To Go Back Press OK
If the battery has failed the test, the keypad will
display:
All zones have been
successfully tested
Battery Test Failed
Please Call For Service
Press OK or MENU
To Go Back Press OK
4) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
2) Press [OK] to exit.
» » E N D
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
O F
S E C T I O N « «
11-17
Solution-144  Installation Manual  System Programming
This page left intentionally blank
11-18
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI

S E C TIO N 12
Programming Examples
T
his section includes a number of programming
examples detailling how to implement some common
installation functionality.
Examples are provided to show;
™™ How to Open a Garage Door using a Single Digit
Code.
™™ How to Open a Garage Door using a 4 Button Keyfob.
™™ How to set Auto Arming for an Area.
™™ How to operate an Output using a Schedule
™™ How to Use a Reader to Unlock a Door.
™™ How to Use a Reader to Unlock a Door and Disarm
Area 1.
™™ How to Use a Reader to Unlock a Door and Arm/
Disarm.
™™ How to use Call Line Identification.
Opening a Garage Door Using a 4 Button RF Keyfob
The following example show how to configure the control
panel to allow control of a grage door as well as arm and
disarm functions using a 4 Button Keyfob. The example
assumes User 10 and Output 5 are being used. (Output 5
is located on the CM710B Output Expander).
Procedure
1) Set RF Receiver Type in MENU 3-5-0 = 04 - Bosch
Serial Rcvr
2) Assign Keyfob to User 10 in MENU 1-3-0
3) Set Output 5 - Event Type in MENU 4-1-1 = 54
(54 = RF Keyfob Function 2)
4) Set Output 5 - Event Assignment in MENU 4-1-2 =
01 (01 =Security System)
5) Set Output 5 - Output Polarity in MENU 4-1-3 = 4
(04 = Open 1 Shot Low)
™™ How to send SMS Reports.
6) Set Output 5 - Time Parameter in MENU 4-1-4 = 000
000 005 000 (5 seconds)
Opening a Door using a Single Digit Code
The control panel can be used to operate an electrically
controlled door using a single digit code. The example
assumes User 10 and Output 5 are being used. (Output 5
is located on the CM710B Output Expander).
7) Enable Output 5 - Output Options in MENU 4-1-5 =
Display Status Message.
Procedure
1) Set user PIN Length in MENU 1-5-0 = 00
(00 = Variable)
2) Set user 10 PIN in MENU 1-1-2 = 5
3) Set user 10 Area Assignment in MENU 1-4-1 = 0
4) Set Output 5 - Event Type in MENU 4-1-1 = 56
(56 = Follow Pin)
5) Set Output 5 - Event Assignment in MENU 4-1-2 =
10 (10 =User Number)
6) Set Output 5 - Output Polarity in MENU 4-1-3 = 04
(04 = Open 1 Shot Low)
7) Set Output 5 - Time Parameter MENU 4-1-4 = 000
000 005 000 (5 seconds)
8) Enable Output 5 - Output Options MENU 4-1-5 =
Display Status Message
Wire Output 5 to the appropriate Door Controller input.
Each time button [5] + [OK] on the keypad is pressed the
door will activate.
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Auto Arming an Area
The control panel can be configured to automatically arm
and or disarm an area automatically if required.
Procedure
To setup an Auto Arming time, select a timezone that is
not being used, and program the timezone name in MENU
7-5-0 to something convenient.
Set the timezone period start time in MENU 7-5-1 for the
arming time you require. The stop time should be set to
12:00am or --:--am, which prevents the system from auto
disarming.
Set the timezone period day in MENU 7-5-2 for the days of
the week you require the area to automatically arm.
Set the timezone that you want the area to follow in MENU
2-1-8.
12-1
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Programming Examples
Operating an Output with a TimeZone
To automatically operate an output using a timezone,
select an timezone that is not being used, and program the
timezone name in MENU 7-5-0 to something convenient.
Set the timezone period start time in MENU 7-5-1 to the
time you want the output to operate and set the stop
time to the time you want the output to turn off. Set the
timezone period day in MENU 7-5-2 for the days of the
week that you want the output to operate on. Set the
Event Type as 58 - TimeZone for the output that you want
the timezone to operate in MENU 4-1-1. Set the output
Event Assignment to follow the timezone you want the
output to follow in MENU 4-1-2. Program the Output
Polarity in MENU 4-1-3 as 00 - Open To Low or 07 - Low To
Open as required.
Unlock a Door using a LAN Reader
This example assumes LAN Reader 9, Door Assignment 4 ,
User 1 and Output 5 are being used.
Procedure
1) Assign LAN Reader 9 to Door Assignment 4 in
MENU 6-1-7.
2) Set output 5 to Event type to 60 - Door in MENU
4-1-1 and the output Door Assignment to 4 in
MENU 4-1-2. Set the output Polarity in MENU 4-1-3
and the output Time Parameter in MENU 4-1-4 as
required.
3) Assign the user to Door 4 in MENU 1-4-5. Users can
belong to multiple doors.
4) Assign the LAN Reader Home Area to 0 (All Areas)
in MENU 6-1-3 and then disable Options 1, 2, 3 & 4
in MENU 6-1-2.
5) Program the Door Assignment for User 1 in MENU
1-4-5 as 4.
6) Add a token to User 4 in MENU 1-2-0.
7) Exit programming mode and present the token to
the LAN reader to access the door.
Unlock a Door and Arm/Disarm Area 1 using a LAN
Reader
This example assumes LAN Reader 9, Door Assignment 4 ,
User 1 and Output 5 are being used.
Procedure
1) Assign LAN Reader 9 to Door Assignment 4 in
MENU 6-1-7.
2) Set output 5 to Event type to 60 - Door in MENU
4-1-1 and the output Door Assignment to 4 in
MENU 4-1-2. Set the output Polarity in MENU 4-1-3
and the output Time Parameter in MENU 4-1-4 as
required.
3) Assign the user to Door 4 in MENU 1-4-5. Users can
belong to multiple doors.
4) Assign the LAN Reader Home Area to 1 (Area 1) in
MENU 6-1-3 and then disable Options 2 & 4 in
MENU 6-1-2.
5) Program the Door Assignment for User 1 in MENU
1-4-5 as 4.
6) Add a token to User 4 in MENU 1-2-0.
7) Exit programming mode and present the token to
the LAN reader to access the door.
5) Program the Door Assignment for User 1 in MENU
1-4-5 as 4.
6) Add a token to User 4 in MENU 1-2-0.
7) Exit programming mode and present the token to
the LAN reader to access the door.
Unlock a Door and Disarm Area 1 using a LAN
Reader
This example assumes LAN Reader 9, Door Assignment 4 ,
User 1 and Output 5 are being used.
Procedure
1) Assign LAN Reader 9 to Door Assignment 4 in
MENU 6-1-7.
2) Set output 5 to Event type to 60 - Door in MENU
4-1-1 and the output Door Assignment to 4 in
MENU 4-1-2. Set the output Polarity in MENU 4-1-3
and the output Time Parameter in MENU 4-1-4 as
required.
3) Assign the user to Door 4 in MENU 1-4-5. Users can
belong to multiple doors.
4) Assign the LAN Reader Home Area to 1 (Area 1) in
MENU 6-1-3 and then disable Options 1, 2 & 4 in
MENU 6-1-2.
12-2
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Programming Examples
Using CLI to establish Upload/Download Connection
Calling Number Identification is a feature provided by
your teleco line provider that can help you identify who is
calling by displaying the caller’s phone number.
This feature is used by the control panel to identify the
telephone number that the upload download computer
is calling from. When the control panel verifies that the
calling number corresponds to any one of the three
different numbers programmed in MENU 5-3-7 — CLI
Number then the panel will answer the call immediately.
This feature is extremely helpful for remote access using
the Solution Link software to eliminate the need for
making multiple calls to fax bypass or annoying customer
calls where you have to let the number ring numerous
times to trigger the panel into answering your call.
The numbers you store into MENU 5-3-7 should include
the full STD number of the calling line you which the
panel to answer on.
Almost every telephone line will send its CLI information
when making a call however you will not receive the
callers line information if you don’t specifically request
and enable this feature with your telco line provider.
Sending SMS Alarm Reports
The control panel is capable of reporting alarm information
directly to a mobile phone using SMS messaging without
the need to add any additional hardware.
Procedure
1) Determine the required reporting destination and
set the reporting format to SMS.
2) When setting the control panel to report via SMS in
destination 1 and/or destination 2, the control
panel has been predefined to use the MyAlarm
Gateway telephone numbers in MENU 5-5-7 (SMS
Primary = 183213450641 / SMS secondary =
18321341825).
3) Program the mobile phone number that the
messages are to be sent to into MENU 5-1-1
(Destination 1) and/or MENU 5-1-2 (Destination 2).
You can send an SMS message to 5 different mobile
telephone numbers per destination for each
reporting event.
4) Program the destination route for each event type
which is required to report to SMS. By default all
event types report to Destination 1.
» » E N D
O F
S E C T I O N « «
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
12-3
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Programming Examples
This page left intentionally blank
12-4
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI

Specifications
Electrical
Voltage Input
• 16 - 22 VAC
Current Requirement
• 22 VA min plug pack adapter or transformer
Panel Current Consumption
• 110 ma standby
S E C TIO N 13
Specifications
Approvals
♦♦
EN 55022:2006
♦♦
AS/NZS CISPR 22:2006
♦♦
EN 60950-1:2001 Amdt 11:2004
♦♦
AS/NZS 60950.1:2003 Amdt 1:2006
♦♦
AS/ACIF S002:2005
♦♦
PTC200 May 2006
♦♦
ETSI TS 103 021-1, 2 & 3
Power Outputs
Continuous Power
• 1 Amp (Primary supply source only)
Secondary Source
• 5 Amp (Total with both primary and secondary source
combined)
Stand-By Battery
• 12 VDC, 7AH sealed rechargeable battery
Min Operating Voltage
• 10.2 VDC
LAN BUS
• Max total LAN length using multi strand security cable
= 300m.
• Max total LAN length using 2 pair twisted shielded data
cable (Belden 8723) = 1200m.
Telephone Connection
RJ-12 Socket or 4-way terminal.
Temperature
0o to 55oC.
Relative Humidity
5 to 85% at 30oC non-condensing.
Enclosure Dimensions
MW720 - 385mm (W), 260mm (H), 90mm (D)
MW730 - 385mm (W), 520mm (H), 90mm (D)
PCB Dimensions
235mm (W), 40mm (H), 85mm (D)
Warranty
3 years from date of manufacture
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Compatible Keypads
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
CP050B - Night Arm Station
CP150B - External Vandal Resistant Keypad
CP151B - External Vandal Resistant Keypad
CP700B - Graphic (White)
CP701B - Graphic + Prox (White)
CP710B - Graphic (Black)
CP711B - Graphic + Prox (Black)
PR109B - Internal LAN Prox Reader (Black)
PR110B - Internal LAN Prox Reader (White)
PR111B - External LAN Prox Reader (Black)
PR112B - External LAN Prox Reader (White)
Expansion Devices
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
CM101B - Voice Module
CM195B - Multi RF Receiver Interface
CM401B - LAN Translator (BPT Intercom)
CM704B - 8/16 Zone Input Expander
CM705B - Universal Expansion Module
CM707B - 8/16 Piggy Back Zone Input Expander Module
CM710 B- 4-Way Relay Output Module
CM720 B- 1 Amp Power Supply Module
CM728B - Bio Metric Reader (Black)
CM729B - Bio Metric Reader (White)
CM743B - GSM/GPRS 2G Plug On Module
CM744B - GSM/GPRS 3G Plug On Module
CM750B - TCP/IP Interface Module
CM751B - TCP/IP Interface Module
CM752B - Plug On WiFi Module
CM760B - Real Time Clock Module
CM797B - LAN Isolator Module
13-1
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Specifications
Accessories
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
♦♦
SW500B - SolutionLink Software
CM900 - Direct Link Cable
CM901 - Flash Upgrade Cable
CM255 - Default Key
MACC600BI - Solution 144 Installation Manual
The following parts are supplied with the panel
(Australian models only - content may differ in export models )
Panel Assembly Includes
Resistor Pack Includes
13-2
1 x Metal Enclosure with tamper
1 x Installer Reference Guide
1 x Panel PWA
1 x Resistor Pack
1 x User Manual
1 x Red Battery Lead
1 x Black Battery Lead
1 x 2-Way Shunt With Handle
2 x Phillips Pan Head Zinc Plate Screw
1 x Telephone Cable RJ12 6P/4C
10 x 3K3 – 0.25W +/- 1% Metal Film Resistors
10 x 6K8 – 0.25W +/- 1% Metal Film Resistors
1 x 3-Way AC Terminal Block
1 x Panel Tamper Switch
1 x Tamper Switch Bracket
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI

S E C TIO N 14
Index
A
ACCESS
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Account #
Destination 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Destination 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
AC Options
Delay Fail To 1 Hour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Display Clock Trouble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Display Fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Random Delay Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Report Fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Sync System Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Alarm On LAN Fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Alarm, PIN Retry Exceed Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Alpha Text Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Answering Machine Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Area Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
AREAS
Area Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Area Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Area Watch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Auto Arming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Chime Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Chime On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Disarming An Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Exit Time Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
General Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Input Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Move To Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Output Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Part Mode 1 Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Part Mode 2 Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Reporting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Senior Watch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Strobe Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Test Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Turn All Areas Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Turn All Areas On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Turn Area On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Arming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Auto Arm Pre-Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Auto Exit Installer Menu In 2 Min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Auto Exit Service Mode In 2 Hrs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
Automatic Arming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
B
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Basic Operations
Automatic Arming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Duress Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Remote Arming - Quick Arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Turning An Area All On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Turning An Area Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Turning An Area Part On/Part 2 On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
BASIC REPORTING REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Battery Options
Display Fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Execute Test On Arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
OK To Arm Low Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Report Fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Battery Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
Burg Report Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Bypass Allowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
C
Call / Answer RAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Call Attempt Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Call Back Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Call Back Verification Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Call Forward Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Call Forward On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Cancel Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Cannot Change Own PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
CHIME
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Tone 10-6
Turn On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
CLI Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Clock Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2, 11-6
Command Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Common Area
Area 1 = Common Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Link To Common Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Comms Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Control Panel
Dialler LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Status LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
D
Data Changed Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Date & Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Daylight Saving
Australian Daylight Savings Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Summertime Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Summertime On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Template Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
14-1
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Index
DEFAULTING THE SYSTEM
Domestic Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Factory Defaulting Allowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
Hardware Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Software Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Delay Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Delay Trouble Beeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Delete PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Destination 1
Account # . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Telephone Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
TX Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Destination 2
Account # . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Telephone Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
TX Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Device Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Dialler Enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Dialler Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Dial Number Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
DIRECT LINK
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Start Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Disarming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Display LAN Fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Display Menu Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Domestic Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3, 11-4
DOOR
Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4, 8-3
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Unlock TimeZone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
DTMF Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6, 9-12
DTMF Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Duress Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3, 4-11
Duress Allowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
E
Email Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Emergency Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Entry Time 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Entry Time 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
EOL Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Erase User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
ETHERNET MODULE
Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
MAC Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Event Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Exit Error Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Exit Error Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Exit Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Exit Time Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
F
Factory Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Allowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
Fault Acknowledge All Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Fault ACK Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Fingerprint
14-2
Add 5-12
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Fire Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Fire Report Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
First To Open / Last To Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Fuse Options
Display +12V Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Display COMM+ Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Display LAN+ Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Report +12V Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Report COMM+ Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Report LAN+ Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
G
GSM/GPRS Module
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SMS Control Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trigger Table 1 Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trigger Table 2 Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-12
10-13
10-11
10-12
10-13
H
Handover
Non Sequential Handover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Pulse Count Handover Allowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
History Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Holidays
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Start Stop Dates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Home Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Horn Speaker
RF Beep Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Tone 11-9
I
Input Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Installer Menu Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Installer Options
Auto Exit Install 2hr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Auto Exit Service 2hr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Defaulting Allowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Multi Tenant Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Report Data Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Report Installer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Restrict Installer PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Installer PIN
Arm Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Change PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Enter Programming Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Installing
Connecting Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Connecting Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
EOL Resistor Colour Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Optional MAINS Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Panels & Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
PCB Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
PCB LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Tamper Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Terminal Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Inverted Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Index
IP Remote Access
IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IP Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IP RAS Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IPRS Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IPRS Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RAS Lockout Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IP Reporting
ACK Wait Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conettix NNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Encryption Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IP Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Poll Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Receiver IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Receiver Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Retry Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SIA Prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Username & Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-22
9-22
9-23
9-24
9-24
9-23
9-19
9-20
9-20
9-19
9-19
9-18
9-18
9-20
9-21
9-21
K
KEYFOBS
Arm/Disarm Strobe Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Keyfob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete Keyfob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Keyfob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keypad
Icon Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KEYPAD
Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Idle Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Hi/Lo Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KEYPADS & READERS
All On Allowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All User Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chime Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disarming Allowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Area Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Door Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Egress Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entry Exit Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extinguish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Greetings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Home Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Home Area Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installer PIN Allowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lockout Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Log Egress Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Part Exit Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Part On Allowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PIN To Change Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reader Area Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reader Badging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Tamper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Report Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Show Alarm When Armed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single Key Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Zero Exit Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
6-6
5-6
5-6
5-6
2-6
2-6
10-2
10-2
10-7
11-15
11-15
10-2
10-3
10-3
10-6
10-3
10-6
10-6
10-8
10-5
10-6
10-6
10-5
10-6
10-4
10-3
10-5
10-8
10-5
10-3
10-6
10-3
10-4
10-5
10-5
10-5
10-5
10-5
10-3
10-6
10-3
Keyswitch Input On/Off, Flash Strobe . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Keyswitch Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Keyswitch Tamper Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
L
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
LAN Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
LAN Secure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Link To Common Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Locale 11-7
Lockout Dialler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Lockout Siren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Log Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
M
Monitor Default PIN Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Multi Tenant Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
MyAlarm
Email Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Email Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Gateway Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
IP Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
MyAlarm Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
N
Non Sequential Handover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
O
OPEN/CLOSE REPORTS
Only After Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Part On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Report Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
User Options - Always Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
OUTPUTS
Default Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Event Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Event Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Event Types Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Output Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Output Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Output Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Output Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Output Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Time Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Turn Output On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Output Testing
External Siren Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Internal Bell Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Strobe Siren Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
P
Panel Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Part 2 Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Part Entry Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
PGM Input Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Phone Line Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Phone Number Prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Phone Number Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2, 9-4
PIN
Add 5-4
14-3
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Index
Always Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change Other PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change Own PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installer PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Retry Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Retry Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Up
Disarmed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Same State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROGRAMMING
Alpha Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defaulting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering Programming Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exiting Programming Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Phone Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES
Auto Arming an Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening a Door using a Single Digit Code . . . . . . . .
Opening Garage Door Using a 4 Button Keyfob . . .
Operating an Output with a TimeZone . . . . . . . . . . .
Sending SMS Alarm Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unlock Door and Disarm Area via Reader . . . . . . . . .
Unlock Door & Arm/Disarm Area via Reader . . . . . .
Using CLI To Establish SolutionLink Connection . .
Pulse Count
Pulse Count Handover Allowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pulse Count Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-14
5-3
5-3
5-11
5-10
5-10
6-6
11-14
11-14
4-2
4-2
4-3
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-2
4-3
12-1
12-1
12-1
12-2
12-3
12-2
12-2
12-3
6-4
7-8
R
RAS Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
RAS Security PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
DTMF Quick Arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Remote Arming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
REPORTING OPTIONS
Burg Report Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Emergency Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Fire Report Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Swinger Dialler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
System Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Test Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
TX Format Dest 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
TX Format Dest 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Report LAN Fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
RF Devices
Add RF Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Delete RF Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
RF Device Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
RF Receiver Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Supervision Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Test RF Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
View RF ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
RF Receiver Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Ring Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
S
Senior Watch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Senior Watch Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Sensor Watch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
14-4
Sensor Watch Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Service Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
SERVICE MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Silencing Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Silent Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Silent Burglary Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Single Key
Arming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Off, From Part On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Part On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Siren Reset All Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Siren / Strobe When Part On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Siren Swinger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Site Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
Smart Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Smoke Sensor Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
SMS Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
SOLUTION LINK
Call/Answer RAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Call Back Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Call Back Verify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
RAS Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
RAS Security PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Start Direct Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Speaker Beeps
Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Strobe Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Summertime Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Summertime On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Supervision Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Swinger Dialler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
SYSTEM OPTIONS
Area Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
General Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Installer Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
SYSTEM POWER
AC Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Arming Allowed On Low Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Battery Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Fuse Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Synchronise System Clock to AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
System Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
System Trouble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
T
Tamper Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Telephone Number Prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Terminal Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
TESTING THE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Battery Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
Dial Number Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
External Siren Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Internal Siren Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Send Test Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Strobe Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Walk Test All Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
Test On Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Test Report
Dial Number Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14, 9-26
Send Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
Solution-144  Installation Manual  Index
Time 9-24
TIMEZONE
Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Day 11-11
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Time 11-11
User Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Token
Edit 5-5
Add Token . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Delete Token . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Token Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Tone Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Trouble Alert Beeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Turn Area Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
U
USERS
Add PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Token . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Area Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto Bypass Allowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bypass Zones Allowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change Other PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change Own PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Default Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete Token . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Door Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Erase User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expire Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PIN Retry Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Send Open/Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TimeZone Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User RAS PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Test Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Test Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4
5-4
5-7
5-8
5-8
5-3
5-3
5-2
5-4
5-5
5-9
5-2
5-10
5-10
5-8
5-9
5-7
5-8
9-13
6-11
6-12
5-4
Bypass Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Zone Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Zone Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
ZONES
Add RF Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Area Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Armed When Part On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Bypass Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Delete RF Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Door Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
EOL Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Input Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Input Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Input Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Inverted Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Keyswitch Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
NO EOL Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Report Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Report Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Sensor Watch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Set Chime Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Set Part 2 Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Tamper Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Test On Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Test RF Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Zone Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Zone Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Zone Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
V
View PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
View RF Device ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Voice Access Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Voice Module Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
W
Walk Test All Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14, 1117
Walk Test A Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Walk Test Options
User Test Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Walk Test 24Hr Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Walk Test Fire Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Walk Test Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
WIRING
Board Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
PCB Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Terminal Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Zone Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Z
Bosch Security Systems 10/12 BLCC600BI
14-5
Bosch Security Systems
25 Huntingwood Drive
Huntingwood, NSW 2128
Australia
Phone: +612 9672 1777
Facsimile: +612 9672 1717
© 2012 Bosch Security Systems
BLCC600BI
920305
Issue FTR1.0